FujiXerox C1110 Service Manual PDF

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B
Service Manual 1st Edition

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B
Service Manual 1st Edition Issued: October 2007
• This service manual covers the following • Handle with care to avoid loss or damage of
modelsFUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. Color Laser the manual.
Printer • Revision and Modification Information
DocuPrint C1110/C1110B When design changes or revisions relating to
this service manual occur, the overseas
• Related Materials technical information or overseas service
No other related materials issued other than this bulletin may be issued as supplementary
service manual. information until such changes are
• Confidentiality accomodated in the updated version of this
• This service manual is issued intending use by service manual.
maintenance service personnel authorized by
FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. Copying, transferring or CAUTION Important changes including
leasing this manual without prior consent by revisions of spare part
FUJI XEROX Co. Ltd. is prohibited. numbers and adjustment
• When a page becomes irrelavant (e.g. specifications must
superceded by a replacement page), destroy immediately be reflected on
the page by burning or shredding it. the respective pages of this
Edited by: Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. CS&S TSC SDEG

KSP R&D Business Park Bldg 6A7
3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa, JAPAN 213-8508
TEL 044-812-7637
[XEROX] [The Document Company] are registered trademarks.
PRINTED IN JAPAN
Company Name
Department Name
Telephone No.
Full Name Employee No.

Introduction
Getting to know the Service Manual
How to use the Service Manual
Terms and Symbols
Abbreviations
Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting
Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting
Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments
Chapter 5 Parts List
Chapter 6 General
Chapter 7 Wiring Data
Chapter 8 Accessories
Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) Not yet

issued
Chapter 10 Machine Overview

Preface
Preface
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Getting to know the Service Manual .............................................................. Preface-1
2 How to use the Service Manual ..................................................................... Preface-1
2.1 Contents of Manual ......................................................................................................Preface-1
2.2 Information on Updating ...............................................................................................Preface-2
3 Terms and Symbols ....................................................................................... Preface-3
4 Abbreviations ................................................................................................. Preface-4
Introduction
1. Getting to know the Service Manual
1. Getting to know the Service Manual

This manual is used as the standard service manual for the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.
• Publication Comment Sheet

Enter any comments and/or corrections regarding the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B service manual
into the Publication Comment Sheet, and send it to FX/CSS/IBS through the OpCo TS or CS
department.
2. How to use the Service Manual

This manual describes the standard procedures for the servicing of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.
Refer to Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure for efficient and effective servicing during maintenance
calls.
2.1 Contents of Manual

• Hardware
This manual summarizes all technical information on the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.
• Chapters
This manual is divided into ten chapters as described below.

This chapter describes the general work and servicing procedures for the maintenance of the
DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.
This chapter describes the troubleshooting procedures other than image quality
troubleshooting of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B. It also describes how to use the diagnostics
and some programs.

This chapter describes the image quality troubleshooting procedures of DocuPrint C1110/
C1110B.

This chapter describes the disassembly, assembly, adjustment and replacement procedures
for components of the DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.

This chapter contains spare parts list for DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.
Chapter 6 General
This chapter contains the following general information on DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.
6.1 Configuration of Printer
6.2 Electrical Properties
6.3 Mechanical Properties
6.4 Functions
6.5 Consumables
6.6 Operating Environment
6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions
6.8 Print Image Quality
6.9 Option
6.10 ESS Specification
6.11 Tools and Service Consumables
6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110
6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B
6.14 Printer Environment Settings
Preface-1
Introduction
2. How to use the Service Manual
6.15 Control Panel Menu Tree

This chapter describes the wiring data of DocuPrint C1110/C1110B.
7.1 Connectors [P (Plug)/J (Jack)]
7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram
7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts
This chapter provides information on accessories and options specific to DocuPrint C1110/
C1110B.
8.1 Network Expansion Card
8.2 Additional Memory
Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) (Not yet issued)

This chapter gives an overview of the functions of the main components of DocuPrint C1110/
C1110B.
2.2 Information on Updating

This manual will be revised and sent to each customer engineer as specified below. Revisions must
be incorporated correctly to keep the manual up-to-date.
Updating Procedure
• When the entire manual is revised, "1st Edition" on the front cover will be renewed to 1st Edition,
2nd Edition, 3rd Edition and so on.
• When this manual is partially revised, revisions will be sequentially indicated as Revision A,
Revision B, Revision C, etc. All revised pages will be marked accordingly with "Revision A",
"Revision B", "Revision C" and so on.
Revision Sidebar
When any paragraph, table or figure has been added or amended, a revision sidebar will be
added to indicate where the revision was made.
(Example)
If the same page is changed again due to a subsequent revision, revision sidebars associated
with the previous revision(s) will be deleted.
Preface-2
Introduction
3. Terms and Symbols
3. Terms and Symbols

Specific terms and symbols used in any particular chapter are described in the Preface for that
section. The terms and symbols described here are used throughout this manual.
• The terms and symbols used at the beginning of a text are defined as follows:
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation, such as death or serious
injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding
the statement.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as death or serious

injury if operators do not handle the machine correctly by disregarding
the statement.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as injury or property

damage if operators do not handle the machine correctly by
disregarding the statement.
INSTRUCTION Indicates that the printer or its components may be damaged if the instructed
procedure is not strictly observed.
NOTE Used to emphasize the procedure, servicing, and regulation.
REFERENCE Used to describe the technical terminology and supplementary explanations.
OBJECTIVE Used to explain purpose of adjustment.

• REP : Indicates the disassembly/assembly procedure for reference.
• ADJ : Indicates the adjustment procedure for reference.
• PL : Indicates the parts list for reference.
• ASSY : Means Assembly.
Safety Critical Components (SCC)

Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to
Fuji Xerox Co. Ltd-stipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components.
Important Information Stored Component (ISC)

Important Information Stored Components store customers’ important information they have entered
after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must
replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care
never to let customer information leak out.
Preface-3
Introduction
4. Abbreviations
4. Abbreviations
Abbreviations
This manual contains abbreviations that are specific to this manual, as well as general
abbreviations, which include:
ADC Automatic Density Control MAG Mag. Roll
AG Analog Ground MCU Machine Control Unit
APS Auto Paper Select MOB Marks On Belt
ARC Auto Registration Control MOT Motor
ASSY Assembly MSI Multi Sheet Inserter
ATS Auto Tray Switching N/P No Paper
B Black NVM Non Volatile Memory
BCR Bias Charge Roll OEM Original Equipment
Bk Black Manufacuring
BLK Black OHP Overhead Project
BLU Blue OP Operation
BRN Brown OPC Organic Photo Conductor
BTR Bias Transfer Roll ORN ORANGE
C Cyan PC Personal Computer
CLN Cleaner PCDC Pixel Count Dispense Control
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit PH Paper Handling
CRUM CRU Monitor PHD Printer Head
CTRG Cartridge PNK Pink
DET Detoner Roll POP Paper On Photoreceptor
DEVE. Developer PPM Prints Per Minute
DIAG. Diagnostic PR,P/R Process
DISP Dispense PV Print Volume
dpi dots per inch PWB(A) Printed Wiring Boad
DTS Detack Saw (Assembly)
DUP Duplex R Right
ESB Electro Static Brush R Rear
ESS Electric Subsystem R/H Right Hand
F Front REF Refresher
FEED, FDR Feeder REGI. Registration
FIP Fault Isolation Procedure RH Right Hand
GND Ground ROS Raster Output Scanner
GRN Green ROT Rotary
GRY Gray RTC Rubber Tube Charger
HT Half Tone RTN Return
HUM Humidity SEF Short Edge Feed
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply SG Signal Ground
ICDC Image Count Dispense Control SMH Special Material Handler
ID Image Density, or Identification SNR Sensor
IBT Intermediate Belt Transfer SOL. Solenoid
INTL, INLK Interlock SOS Start Of Scan
IOT Image Output Terminal STM Single Tray Module
K Black SW Switch
L Left TEMP. Temperature
L/H Left Hand TM Tray Module
LD Laser diode TNER, TNR Toner
LDD Lightly Doped Drain TP Thermopile
LED Light-emitting diode TR Transfer
LEF Long Edge Feed VIO Violet
LH Left Hand WHT White
LV Low Voltage XERO Xerographic
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply Y Yellow
M Magenta YEL Yellow
Preface-4
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1.1 Before Starting the Servicing ....................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Notes on the Handling of Customer Information .................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Other Things to Note .............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2 Servicing Call Procedure ..........................................................................................1-4
1.3 TRIM Servicing .........................................................................................................1-5
1.3.1 TRIM Servicing Procedure ..................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3.2 Machine Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts ...................................................... 1-6
1.3.3 TRIM Check List ..................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.1 Before Starting the Servicing
1.1.1 Safety
To prevent any accident that may occur during maintenance servicing, any WARNING or CAUTION
regarding the servicing must be strictly observed. Do not perform any hazardous operation.
1. Power Supply
To prevent electrical shocks, burns, or injury, etc., be sure to switch OFF the machine and
disconnect the plug before starting the maintenance servicing. If the machine has to be switched
ON, such as when measuring the voltage, take extra care to prevent an electrical shock.
2. Drive Area
Never inspect or lubricate the drive area such as the gears during the machine operation.
3. Heavy Parts
The weight of the machine is 18kg. When moving the machine to ensure sufficient working
space, take extra care to prevent back pain.
4. Safety Device
See that safety devices for preventing mechanical accidents, such as fuses, circuit breakers,
interlock switches, etc., and those for protecting customers from injury, such as panels and
covers, function properly. Modifications that hinder the function of any safety devices are strictly
prohibited.
5. Installing and removing the parts

The edge of parts and covers may be sharp, take care not to touch them. If the oil gets onto your
hand, wipe it off before getting on with the servicing. When removing parts or cables, do not pull
them out by force but remove them slowly.
6. Specified Tools
Follow the instruction when a tool is specified.
7. Organic Solvents
When using an organic solvent such as the Drum Cleaner or Machine Cleaner, pay attention to
the following:
• Ensure good ventilation in the room to prevent too much intake of the solvent.
• Do not use heated solvent.
• Keep away from fire.
8. Cleaning the Toner and Developer

As the toner may cause a dust explosion, sweep the spilt toner into a waste container. When
using a cleaner to clean the remaining toner, be sure to use the FX standard toner-proof cleaner
and not a customer's cleaner. Also, as the developer also contains toner, exercise the same
caution during cleaning.
9. Modifications
If any modifications are deemed necessary for the printer, submit an Application for Approval of
Modification prior to performing any work.
10.Other Safety Precautions

For safety, you should also pay attention to precautions other than the above 1 to 9 items. Follow
the SAFE WORKING PRACTICES FOR ENGINEERS issued by FXAP EH & S (Environmental
Health and Safety) to ensure greater safety during servicing,
1-1
1.1.2 Notes on the Handling of Customer Information

1. Handling electronic customer information such as copy/print/received Fax samples (paper
information) and log files (activity report, etc.).
When taking samples back to your base for the purpose of investigation/analysis, obtain consent
from the customer without fail. Besides, be sure to tell him/her the samples will be used only for
the primary purpose
If asked by the customer to submit an application for taking samples out, use ”FX Security Code:
separate document 15 ’Administration Table for Giving and Receiving Confidential/Personal
Information (IS-019)’” or obtain consent in writing as directed by the customer.
2. Handling PWB and HDD storing customer information

Take great care in handling PWB/HDD. Fax speed dial numbers and URLs the customer has
entered in the machine are important customer information, which is stored in PWB/HDD in the
machine.
1) At the time of replacement, be sure to transfer customer information onto the new PWB/HDD
and clear the information from the old one before discarding it, in order never to let the
information leak out. (Detailed in the prefaces to chapters 4 and 5.)
2) If the replacement of PWB/HDD proves that it is not the cause of a specific problem, be sure
to reinstall it in the machine. (If having installed/removed PWB/HDD temporarily for
diagnostics, clear information in Diag.)
3) If/When it is impossible to clear information electrically from HDD, shred the HDD (at a
charge) as requested by the customer.
3. Rewritten-in-maintenance NVMs involving security concerns

If having conducted a test by rewriting an NVM, such as polling, which involves security
concerns, be sure to return the NVM to the former value after the work. (E.g.: For the details of
polling, see FTO 2-202 common to all the models.)
4. If/When maintenance work requires that our device be connected to the customer’s network, be
sure to obtain permission of the customer’s information system administrator through the person
in charge (or of the person in charge), in order to do so.
5. Other notes on the handling of customer information

You need to take many other precautions besides the above items 1 to 4 in handling customer
information. Do the work, following rules and regulations on safety stipulated by your OpCo and
taking great care not to let information leak out.
1-2
1.1.3 Other Things to Note

Pay attention to the following when performing maintenance service to avoid wrong or redundant
servicing:
1. Reference Materials
Before performing maintenance servicing, read all relevant technical materials such as SB, FTI,
or FTO for a systematic approach.
2. Disassembling
Make sure to check the assembled condition before removing parts or disassembling the
machine.
3. Installation/Adjustment
After the installation or adjustment is complete, check that no parts or tools are left inside or on
the assemblies before using the machine.
4. Handling of parts/consumables replaced

Make sure that the replaced parts or consumables as well as the packaging materials are
collected back to the Service Center.
NOTE For the separation and processing methods for the collected items, refer to the
Common Technical Information No. 2-138 for all machines.
If you have replaced the following consumables, affix the "U" sticker for the recyclable parts to be
handled appropriately.
• Drum Cartridge
• Individual Color Toner Cartridge
For recyclable parts, fill the necessary items in the "U-TAG" and perform collection.
5. General precautions
• Take care not to disturb the customer's daily work.
• Place the drip cloth or paper on the customer's floor during work in the machine because
color toners may dirty the floor and are difficult to clean.
• Throw any trash generated during the maintenance service into the trash bag and bring them
to the servicing office.
• Record the service details and the consumables and parts replaced at visit in the Machine
Service Log.
DocuPrint C1110/C1110B weighs 18kg.

Always have 2 people available to move the printer.
Refer to the Installation Procedures for details.
1-3
1.2 Servicing Call Procedure
1.2 Servicing Call Procedure
1. Ask the operator(s) about the machine condition.

2. Record the billing meter readings.
Initial Actions
3. Inspect any printing error, then check the machine.
4. Check the Service Log.
1. Troubleshoot on Level 1.
2. Troubleshoot.
3. Check the print quality using the test patterns on the machine.
UM Call 4. Feed paper from the respective trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the
Feed Roll.
5. Repair all the secondary problems.
6. Perform TRIM servicing.
1. Check the print quality using the test patterns on the machine.
2. Feed paper from the respective trays and, if necessary, clean or replace the
SM Call Feed Roll.
3. Repair all the secondary problems.
4. Perform TRIM servicing.
1. Check overall operation/features.
2. Check the machine exterior and consumables.
Final Actions 3. Train the operator as required.
4. Complete the Service Log and Service Report.
5. Keep the print sample with the Service Log.
1-4
1.3 TRIM Servicing
1.3 TRIM Servicing

TRIM Servicing for DocuPrint C1110/C1110B is performed in all SM/UM to maintain the performance
of the machine. Independent visits for TRIM Servicing does not take place.
1.3.1 TRIM Servicing Procedure

1. Check overall operation before servicing
• Make prints with a test pattern containing 20% color pattern for each color, gradation pattern
and grid pattern.
1. 20% color pattern for each color: Checks for any scratches on the Transfer Assy and Drum,
and for fusing failure.
2. Gradation pattern : Checks for improper low-density reproducibility, color
balance and fusing failure.
3. Grid pattern : Checks for color misalignment and fusing failure.
* Refer to Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6.7.8 Test Print on executing test print.
2. Clean the interior of the machine

• Clean toner residues and paper powder etc. in the paper delivery system.
(Clean especially the operation section of the operator.)
3. Inspect parts that require periodic replacement (consumables) and replace them if necessary.
4. Safety Precautions
• Check the connection of the power plug and any damage on the cord and the plug.
5. Check the overall operation after servicing as follows:

• Check machine operation.
• Check the print quality.
• Check the billing meter reading.
1-5
1.3 TRIM Servicing
1.3.2 Machine Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts

• Check the total number of copies printed during TRIM Servicing before replacing the machine
consumables.
Machine Consumables
Product Name Country Product Code Expected yield
Print Cartridge 2K (Black) *1 AP/Korea/Taiwan CT201114 2kPV

China CT201118 2kPV
Print Cartridge 2K (Cyan) *1 AP/Korea/Taiwan CT201115 2kPV
China CT201119 2kPV
Print Cartridge 2K (Magenta) *1 AP/Korea/Taiwan CT201116 2kPV
China CT201120 2kPV
Print Cartridge 2K (Yellow) *1 AP/Korea/Taiwan CT201117 2kPV
China CT201121 2kPV
PHD Unit AP/Korea/Taiwan CT350604 20kPV
China
* Use Conditions
*1 Image Coverage Ratio = 5%
Periodic Replacement Parts
Product Name Product Code Note

50kPV
Fuser Unit-110V *1 EL300690
Includes Fuser Unit
50kPV
Fuser Unit-220V *1 EL300689
Includes Fuser Unit
Feed Roller Unit EL300691 50kPV
*1 Fuser Unit are CRU and can be ordered as product. This items are not registered as spare part.
1-6
1.3 TRIM Servicing
1.3.3 TRIM Check List

A ------ Perform checking. Clean, replace or supply if necessary.
B ------ Always perform cleaning and checking.
C ------ Always perform replacement service at the specified interval.
* Refer to "Test Print" in 2.6.6 Menu Tree and 2.6.7.8 Test Print on how to output test patterns.
Removal/
Every
No Servicing Items 100K Replacement Service Details
time
No.
• Activate the machine and check
Check Items before Servicing
1.1 A that abnormal noise is not
(Check the machine operation)
heard.
Check Items before Servicing • Output the Built-in Test Pattern
1.2 A
(Output test patterns) to check the print quality.
• Clean any paper dust and toner
residue in the paper path and
on the jam sensor.
Clean the interior of the machine
• Especially, clean the operation
2 (Clean the paper transport system) A C
section of the operator carefully.
Feed Roll/Retard Roll
• Check and clean the Feed Roll/
Retard Roll for every Tray and
SSI.
• Check that Heat Roll/Pressure
3.1 Fuser Assy B C: 50K REP 6.1 Roll are not scratched.
• Replace where necessary.
• Visual check only. Do not touch
3.2 PHD Assy B C: 20K
with hand.
• Make sure that the power plug
is plugged in properly.
• Make sure that the power cords
are not cracked and no wires
are exposed.
• Make sure that no extension
B cord with insufficient length or
4 Safety Precautions
power cord outside the
specification, such as an off-
the-shelf power strip, is being
used.
• Make sure that a single socket
does not have multiple power
plugs plugged to it.
• Print built-in test patterns to
Check Items after Servicing
5.1 A confirm that the print quality
(Print Quality Check)
satisfies the specification.
Check Items after Servicing • Check the paper feed and
5.2 A
(Check the machine operation) abnormal noise.
• Create the Service Log and
5.3 Post-servicing check (meter) A
Service Report.
1-7
1.3 TRIM Servicing
CAUTION Do not touch the Drum/Toner Cartridges with hand.

Do not use solvents such as Drum cleaner. (Long time is required for
recovery.)
1-8
CONTENTS
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting ........................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Confirms Installation Status ............................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3 Cautions for Service Operations ..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.4 Cautions for FIP Use....................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.5 Items to Be Confirmed Before Going to FIP Troubleshooting......................................................... 2-4
2.1.5.1 Basic Printer Problems ........................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.5.2 Display Problems .................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.5.3 Printing Problems.................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.5.4 Print Media Guidelines............................................................................................................ 2-6
2.2 FIP ............................................................................................................................2-10
2.2.1 FIP ................................................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.2.2 Flow of FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP...................................................................................................2-23
2.3.1 Level 1 FIP.................................................................................................................................... 2-23
FIP-1.1 Erase Flash Err 016-500/Write Flash Err 016-501/Verify Flash Err 016-502/
Format Error 016-737/Invalid ID 016-742/Range Chk Error 016-743/
Check Sum Error 016-744/Header Error 016-745 ................................................................ 2-23
FIP-1.2 Out of Memory 016-718 ........................................................................................................ 2-24
FIP-1.3 PDL Error 016-720 ................................................................................................................ 2-25
FIP-1.4 Network Error 018-319,018-320,116-350,116-351,116-352,116-35/
Font ROM Error 116-310/MACaddress Error 116-314/RAM Error 116-315/
Controller Error 116-317,116-327,116-328/NV RAM Error 116-326,116-390/
ASIC Error 116-343 .............................................................................................................. 2-26
FIP-1.5 PAGEC Time Error 024-362 ................................................................................................. 2-27
FIP-1.6 RAM Error 116-316/116-320................................................................................................. 2-28
FIP-1.7 Insert Yellow Cartridge/Insert Magenta Cartridge/Insert Cyan Cartridge/
Insert Black Cartridge ........................................................................................................... 2-29
FIP-1.8 Non-Xerox Toner (Y)............................................................................................................. 2-30
FIP-1.9 Non-Xerox Toner (M) ............................................................................................................ 2-31
FIP-1.10 Non-Xerox Toner (C)........................................................................................................... 2-32
FIP-1.11 Non-Xerox Toner (K)........................................................................................................... 2-33
FIP-1.12 Replace Yellow/Replace Magenta/Replace Cyan/Replace Black/
Yellow Low/Magenta Low/Cyan Low/Black Low................................................................. 2-34
FIP-1.13 Waste Full ........................................................................................................................... 2-35
FIP-1.14 Check Manual Feed ............................................................................................................ 2-36
FIP-1.15 Jam at Front (MPT Insert Jam) ........................................................................................... 2-38
FIP-1.16 Jam at Front (Regi On Off Jam).......................................................................................... 2-39
FIP-1.17 Jam at Exit .......................................................................................................................... 2-41
FIP-1.18 Jam at Exit .......................................................................................................................... 2-43
FIP-1.19 Jam at Manual Feed ........................................................................................................... 2-45
FIP-1.20 Jam at Reg. Roll.................................................................................................................. 2-49
FIP-1.21 Jam at Tray ......................................................................................................................... 2-53
FIP-1.22 MPC Error 016-738,016-739,016-740................................................................................. 2-58
FIP-1.23 MPC Error 018-310,018-311,018-312,018-313,018-314,018-315,018-316,018-317,116-333
........................................................................................................................................................... 2-59
FIP-1.24 CTD Sensor Error 092-310 ................................................................................................. 2-60
FIP-1.25 DTB Life Over 094-330/Transfer Life .................................................................................. 2-61
FIP-1.26 Check Unit/CTD Sensor/PHD ASSY Life............................................................................ 2-62
FIP-1.27 Insert PHD ASSY ................................................................................................................ 2-63
FIP-1.28 Low Density Yellow Cartridge ............................................................................................. 2-64
FIP-1.29 Low Density MagentaCartridge........................................................................................... 2-66
FIP-1.30 Low Density Cyan Cartridge ............................................................................................... 2-68
FIP-1.31 Low Density Black Cartridge ............................................................................................... 2-70
FIP-1.32 Replace PHD ASSY/PHD CRUM Error 091-916 ................................................................ 2-72
FIP-1.33 Insert Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-73
FIP-1.34 Load Manual Feed (Size Mismatch) ................................................................................... 2-74
FIP-1.35 Load Manual Feed (No Suitable Paper).............................................................................. 2-75
FIP-1.36 Load Tray ............................................................................................................................ 2-77
FIP-1.37 Load Tray/Tray Empty......................................................................................................... 2-78
FIP-1.38 Insert Fuser 010-317........................................................................................................... 2-80
FIP-1.39 Replace Fuser 010-351/Fuser Life...................................................................................... 2-82
FIP-1.40 Fuser Error 010-397............................................................................................................ 2-83
FIP-1.41 Fan Motor Error 042-313..................................................................................................... 2-85
FIP-1.42 Motor Error 042-325............................................................................................................ 2-87
FIP-1.43 Motor Error 042-326............................................................................................................ 2-88
FIP-1.44 Check Unit........................................................................................................................... 2-89
FIP-1.45 Front Cover Open ............................................................................................................... 2-90
FIP-1.46 Side Door Open .................................................................................................................. 2-92
FIP-1.47 MCU Firmware Err 024-340 ................................................................................................ 2-93
FIP-1.48 MCU NVRAM Error 041-340............................................................................................... 2-94
FIP-1.49 Laser Error 061-370 ............................................................................................................ 2-95
FIP-1.50 MCU Comm. Error 024-371 ................................................................................................ 2-96
FIP-1.51 Invalid User 016-757 ........................................................................................................... 2-97
FIP-1.52 Disabled Func 016-758 ....................................................................................................... 2-98
FIP-1.53 Limit Exceeded 016-759 ..................................................................................................... 2-99
FIP-1.54 Invalid Job 016-799........................................................................................................... 2-100
FIP-1.55 Download Mode 024-360 .................................................................................................. 2-101
FIP-1.56 K Mode Sol Error 042-372 ................................................................................................ 2-102
FIP-1.57 Env Sensor Error 092-661 ................................................................................................ 2-104
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble.........................................................................................2-105
2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 2-105
2.4.2 Operation Mode Table ................................................................................................................ 2-106
FIP-1.N1 When Power is Turned On ............................................................................................. 2-106
FIP-1.N2 During Standby............................................................................................................... 2-108
FIP-1.N3 During Printing................................................................................................................ 2-109
2.5 Other FIP ................................................................................................................2-111
FIP-Electrical Noise ......................................................................................................................... 2-111
FIP-AC ............................................................................................................................................. 2-112
FIP-DC ............................................................................................................................................. 2-113
FIP-Multiple Feed............................................................................................................................. 2-114
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode ....................................................................................2-115
2.6.1 Roles of the control panel in Diag. .............................................................................................. 2-115
2.6.2 Entering diag. CE mode.............................................................................................................. 2-115
2.6.3 Selecting Diag. item .................................................................................................................... 2-116
2.6.4 Change method parameters value.............................................................................................. 2-116
2.6.5 Executing/Exiting Diag. mode ..................................................................................................... 2-116
2.6.6 Diag. mode menu tree ................................................................................................................ 2-117
2.6.7 Contents of a Test....................................................................................................................... 2-121
2.6.7.1 CE Mode Diag..................................................................................................................... 2-121
2.6.7.2 Executing CE Mode diagnosis ............................................................................................ 2-121
2.6.7.3 ESS Diag ............................................................................................................................ 2-121
2.6.7.4 IOT Diag.............................................................................................................................. 2-125
2.6.7.5 Print Info ............................................................................................................................. 2-142
2.6.7.6 Installation........................................................................................................................... 2-143
2.6.7.7 Exit Mode ............................................................................................................................ 2-143
2.6.7.8 Test Print............................................................................................................................. 2-144
2.6.7.9 Parameter ........................................................................................................................... 2-152
2.7 NVM Access ...........................................................................................................2-155
2.7.1 NVM List ..................................................................................................................................... 2-157
2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting

After making sure of actual condition of a trouble, proceed with the troubleshooting process efficiently making use of the
Fault Isolation Procedure (FIP), 2.6 How to use Diag. CE Mode, Wiring Data (Chapter 7), and Machine Overview
(Chapter 10).
2.1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting
Flow of the troubleshooting is as follows:
Installation status check
How to use Diag. CE Mode

Trouble status check Wiring Data
Machine Overview
Execute FIP
Reference
information
Trouble recovery check
End
2.1.2 Confirms Installation Status
Be sure to check the following items before starting the troubleshooting procedures.
1 Voltage of the power supply is within the specifications.
2 Power cord is free from breakage, short-circuit, disconnected wire, or incorrect connection in the power
cord.
3 The laser printer is properly grounded.
4 The laser printer is not installed at a place subjected to too high temperature, too high humidity, too low
temperature, too low humidity or rapid change of temperature.
5 The laser printer is not installed close to water service, humidifier, heat generating unit, or fire, in very
dusty place, or a place exposed to air flow from the air conditioning system.
6 The laser printer is not installed in a place where volatile gas or inflammable gas is generated.
7 The laser printer is not installed under direct sunbeams.
8 The laser printer is installed in a well-ventilated place.
2-1
9 The laser printer is installed on a stout and stable plane.
10 Paper used meets specifications (standard paper is recommendable).
11 The laser printer is handled properly.
12 Parts which should be periodically replaced are replaced each time when specified number of sheets has
been printed.
2.1.3 Cautions for Service Operations
1 Be sure to remove the power cord except when it is specifically required.
If the printer is kept ON, never touch the conductive parts while it is not specifically required.
The power switch and inlet are live even while the power supply is cut off. Never touch the live parts.
2 When checking some parts with covers removed and with the interlock and safety and power switches ON,
disconnect the connectors (P/J411 and P/J412) on the ROS ASSY except when it is specifically required.
When checking some parts with covers removed and with the interlock and safety and power switches ON,
laser beams may be irradiated from the ROS ASSY. Since it is dangerous, be sure to disconnect the
connectors (P/J411 and P/J 412) while it is not required.
3 When checking some parts with the Front Cover removed and power ON, be sure to disconnect the
connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU while it is not required.
When checking some parts with the Front Cover removed and power ON, high voltage may be applied by
the PWBA HVPS. Be sure to disconnect the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU.
When connecting the connector (P/J16) on the PWBA MCU according to the instructions of the FIP, never
touch the PWBA HVPS and parts of high voltage.
4 When using Diag. tools or other tools of high voltage, be sure to keep them covered except when otherwise
specified.
When using Diag. Tool or other tools of high voltage, never touch parts of high voltage.
When using Diag. Tool or other tools of high voltage, be sure to follow the procedures in this manual.
2-2
5 When operating the driving units using the Diag or other tools, be sure to keep them covered unless
otherwise specified.
When operating the driving units using the Diag or other tools, never touch the driving units. When
operating the driving units using Diag or other tools, be sure to follow the procedures in this manual.
6 When touching hot parts, be careful not to get burnt.
7 Workers should wear a wrist band or the like to prevent static electricity from their body, grounding their
body while working.
2.1.4 Cautions for FIP Use
1 When troubleshooting according to the FIP, normal PWBA MCU, PWBA HVPS, PWBA LVPS, FUSER
ASSY, TRANSFER ASSY and so no may be necessary for isolation of failed parts. Prepare them in
advance.
2 In the initial check according to the FIP, check only items which can be simply checked.
3 In the initial check according to the FIP, check the constitutive parts of the major check parts and related
parts, as well as major check parts.
4 When working with the printer, be sure to remove the power cord except when required specifically.
5 Connector condition is denoted as follows:

[P/J12] -> Connector (P/J12) is connected.
[P12] -> Plug side with the connector (P/J12) disconnected (except when attached directly to the board).
[J12] -> Jack side with the connector (P/J12) disconnected (except when attached directly to the board).
6 [P/J1-2PIN <=> P/J3-4PIN] in the FIP means measurement with the plus side of the measuring instrument
connected to [2PIN] of [P/J1] and the minus side to [4PIN] of [P/J3].
7 [P/J1<=> P/J2] in the FIP means measurement for all terminals corresponding between [P/J1] and [P/J2]
referring to "Wiring Diagrams".
8 In [P/J1-2PIN <=> P/J3-4PIN] in the FIP where voltage is measured, [P/J3-4PIN] on the rear minus side is
always at the AG (analog ground), SG (signal ground), or RTN (return).
Therefore, after checking of proper conductivity between AGs, SGs, or RTNs respectively, the rear minus
side can be connected to the PIN of AG, SG or RTN instead of [P/J3-4PIN].
However, care should be taken not to mistake since [AG], [SG], and [RTN] are not on the same level.
9 Measure the voltage of small connectors with the special tool. Handle the tool with care, as the leading
edge of the tool is pointed.
10 When measuring the voltage, set the TRANSFER ASSY, TONER CARTRIDGEs and Paper Cassette,
close the COVERs and power ON if not required specifically.
11 Numerical values in the FIP are only for standard. If numerical values are approximate, they should be
considered permissible.
2-3
12 Parts which are always removed to check as indicated in the FIP and procedures for that purpose are not
specifically referred to here. They should be handled carefully.
13 "Replacement" in the FIP indicates replacement of parts which are considered to be the source of trouble to
be checked after replacing those parts, assemblies containing them (HIGH ASSY).
14 In the FIP, procedures are differentiated depending on specifications. Correct troubles according to the
instructions in the FIP.
15 For optional parts, some troubleshooting procedure may follow the manual for those options, of which you
should take note.
Keep those manuals for the optional parts when required.
2.1.5 Items to Be Confirmed Before Going to FIP Troubleshooting
2.1.5.1 Basic Printer Problems

Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs, check each the following:
z If a message is displayed on the personal computer connected with the printer, see "2.2.3 Status Code and
Error Message".
z The printer power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
z The printer power is ON.
z If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and then
turn on the printer. This often solves the problem.
2.1.5.2 Display Problems

z If the operation panel is blank, check and try the action below.
1 Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on the printer.
2 When an error has occurred, the error display mode and detailed error display mode can be switched by
holding "Continue" key. In the detailed error display mode, detailed error status can be displayed on your
PC.
z If the menu settings changed from the personal computer have no effect, check and try the actions below.
Settings in the software program, the printer driver, or the printer utilities are overriding the settings made on the
personal computer.
1 Change the menu settings from the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the software program.
2 b) Disable the settings in the printer driver, the printer utilities, or the software program so you can change
settings on the personal computer.
2.1.5.3 Printing Problems

z If a job did not print correct or incorrect characters were printed, check and try the actions below.
1 Make sure the green LED of "Ready/Data" on the operation panel lights before sending a job to print.
2 Make sure print media is loaded in the printer, then make sure the green LED of the "Tray" or "SSI" on the
operation panel lights
2-4
3 Verify that you are using the correct printer driver.
4 Make sure you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cables and it securely connected at the back of the
printer.
5 Verify that the correct print media size is selected.
6 If using a print spooler, verify that the spooler has not stalled.
7 Check the printer interface from the "Configuration Page". Determine the host interface you are using.
Print a Panel Setting page to verify that the current interfaces settings are correct.
8 Output fonts will not print correctly using the PCL driver in its default mode. To correct this problem, use
PostScript driver when using the PCL driver.
z If secure print is not available or not printing, refer to the requirements below.
1 64 MB is required.
2 The number of secure print jobs your printer can store is dependent on the job size including number of
pages, graphics, color attributes, and the amount of memory installed. Decrease this number.
z If print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the actions below.
1 Make sure the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer. Refer to Print Media
Guidelines of this section.
2 Flex print media before loading it.
3 Make sure the print media is loaded correctly.
4 Make sure the width and length guides on the print media sources are adjusted correctly.
5 If the print media are overfilled in sources, reduce the amount of media.
6 Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are using.
7 Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves.
8 Check the print media type loaded in the source, and refill only one type of print media, if print media
types are mixed.
9 Refill a new ream of print media, if some reams are mixed.
10 Remove the top and bottom sheets of a ream before loading the print media.
11 Load a print media source only when it is empty.
z If envelope misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the action below.
1 Load an envelope from the SSI.
z If page breaks in unexpected places, check and try the action below.
1 Check the print data.
2-5
2 Check the status on your PC.
z If a job prints from the wrong source or on the wrong print media, check and try the action below.
1 Check the "Paper Size" and "Paper Type" in the Tray Settings menu in the printer driver.
z If print media does not stack neatly in the output tray, check and try the action below.
1 Turn the print media stack over in the tray.
2.1.5.4 Print Media Guidelines

Print media is paper, labels, envelopes, coated paper among others. Your printer provides high-quality printing on a
variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for your printer helps avoid printing troubles. This section
describes how to select print media, how to care for print media, and how to load the print media in the standard 250-
sheet tray module.
Paper
For the best print quality in color, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) xerographic, grain long paper. For the best print quality in black
and white, use 90 g/m2 (24 lb.) xerographic, grain long paper. Before buying large quantities of any print media, it
recommends trying a sample first.
When loading paper, identify the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the paper accordingly. See
"Loading Print Media in Tray" and "SSI for detailed loading instructions.
Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. It recommends that you follow these guidelines
when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The tray automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb. bond) grain long. The single sheet inserter
automatically feeds paper weights from 60 to 216 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb. bond) grain long.
Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb.) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, and could cause paper jams. For best
performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb. bond) grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl usually
occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in
humid conditions, even in the paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and cause feeding problems.
Smoothness
The degree of paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If the paper is too rough, the toner does not fuse to the
paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems.
2-6
Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper properly.
Leave the paper in its original packaging until you are ready to use it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture
changes that can degrade its performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of the
paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper. For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb. bond) paper, grain long fibers are
recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2 (36 lb. bond), grain short is preferred.
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. Paper containing fibers such as cotton
possess characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling.
Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb.) xerographic paper. Business papers designed for
general business use also provide acceptable print quality.
Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When choosing any print media,
you should consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Only use paper able to withstand these temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or releasing hazardous emissions.
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
1 Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
2 Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
3 Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
4 Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ?0.09 in.,
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, you can adjust registration with your software program to successfully print on these forms.
5 Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
6 Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
7 Recycled papers containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN 19 309
8 Multiple-part forms or documents
9 Label paper with Cut
2-7
Unacceptable Paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
1 Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers,
carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
2 Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
3 Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
4 Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than 0.09 in.,
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, you can adjust registration with your
software program to successfully print on these forms.
5 Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
6 Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
7 Multiple-part forms or documents
8 Label paper with Cut
Selecting Paper
Proper paper selection helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
1 Always use a new, undamaged paper.
2 Before loading the paper, identify the recommended print side of the paper. This information is usually
indicated on the paper package.
3 Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.
4 Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source. This may result in a paper jam.
5 Do not remove trays while a job is printing.
6 Make sure the Paper Type and Paper Size settings are correct.
7 Make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
8 Flex paper back and forth, and then fan them. Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface.
9 When curl is excessive, with plain paper, turn it over and reset it.
2-8
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications
Table 2-1 Print Media Sizes and Support Y: Yes N: No
250-sheet Tray
A4 Y
A5 Y
B5 Y
Letter Y
Executive Y
Folio (8.5" x13") Y
Legal (8.5" x14") Y
Com-10 Y
Monarch Y
DL Y
C5 Y
User-specified print media Y
Table 2-2 Print Media Supported Y: Yes N: No
250-sheet Tray
Plain Paper Light (60-76gsm) Y
Plain Paper Normal (80gsm) Y
Plain Paper Thick (82-98gsm) Y
Labels Y
Covers Normal (106-163gsm) Y
Covers Thick (164-216gsm) Y
Envelope Y
Postcard Y
Coated Normal (106-163gsm) Y
Coated Thin (95-105gsm) Y
Coated Thick (164-216gsm) Y
2-9
2.2 FIP
2.2 FIP
2.2.1 FIP
The FIP is the first step for trouble diagnosis. The FIP isolates the presence of various troubles including error codes, and
guides the troubleshooting procedure.
2.2.2 Flow of FIP
N
Ask the operator about trouble status.
Is operator's operating method correct?
Turn off and turn on the Power. Instruct how to operate
Does error still occur when print N

is done by the problem mode? End of work
Refer to "2.2.3 Status Code and

Error Message"
When status code is
displayed:
Refer to "2.3 ERROR CODE FIP"
Refer to "3.1.1 Entry Chart for

Image Quality Troubleshooting"
When image quality trouble
is occurred:
Refer to "3.1.4 Image Quality FIP"
Refer to "2.4.1 Entry Chart for

Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting"
When abnormal noise
is occurred:
Refer to "2.4.2 Operation Mode Table"
2-10
2.2 FIP
2.2.3 Status Code and Error Message

Relevant
Problem Error Message Error Contents
FIP
Erase Flash Err
Restart Printer
<DOWNLOAD DELETE ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.1
The flash memory error is detected.
Error 016-500
Restart Printer
Write Flash Err
Restart Printer
<DOWNLOAD WRITE ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.1
Error 016-501
Restart Printer
Verify Flash Err
Restart Printer
<DOWNLOAD VERIFY ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.1
Error 016-502
Restart Printer
Out of Memory
Press Ok Button
<Memory Overflow>
Flip FIP-1.2
Exceeds the memory capacity.
Error 016-718
Press Ok Button
PDL Error
Press Ok Button
<PDL Error>
ESS Flip FIP-1.3
PDL error occurs.
Error 016-720
Press Ok Button
Format Error
Press Ok Button <DOWNLOAD FORMAT ERROR>
Flip The download file is broken, or communication error is FIP-1.1
Error 016-737 detected.
Press Ok Button
Invalid ID
Press Ok Button
<DOWNLOAD ID ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.1
The ID of the downloaded file is invalid.
Error 016-742
Press Ok Button
Range Chk Error
Press Ok Button
<DOWNLOAD RANGE ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.1
The wrong address is detected.
Error 016-743
Press Ok Button
Check Sum Error
Press Ok Button
<DOWNLOAD CHECKSUM ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.1
The checksum is invalid.
Error 016-744
Press Ok Button
2-11
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Header Error
Press Ok Button
<DOWNLOAD HEADER ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.1
The header information is invalid.
Error 016-745
Press Ok Button
Network Error
Restart Printer
<On Board Network OS Error>
Flip FIP-1.4
The error is detected by On Board Network OS.
Error 018-319
Restart Printer
Network Error
Restart Printer
<On Board Network VxWorks Error>
Flip FIP-1.4
The error is detected by On Board VxWORKS.
Error 018-320
Restart Printer
PAGEC Time Error
Restart Printer
<PAGEC Timeout Error>
Flip FIP-1.5
The PAGEC timeout error is detected.
Error 024-362
Restart Printer
Font ROM Error
Restart Printer
<ESS FontROM Error (Main)>
ESS Flip FIP-1.4
Checksum error in main Font ROM is detected.
Error 116-310
Restart Printer
MACaddress Error
Restart Printer <On Board Network MAC Address Checksum Error>
Flip Checksum error in Network MAC address is detected. FIP-1.4
Error 116-314 MAC: Media Access Control
Restart Printer
RAM Error
Restart Printer <ESS On Board RAM W/R Check Fail>
Flip The failure is detected by RAM W/R check during FIP-1.4
Error 116-315 initialization.
Restart Printer
RAM Error
Restart Printer <ESS DIMM Slot RAM W/R Check Fail>
Flip The error is detected by DIMM slot RAM W/R check FIP-1.6
Error 116-316 during initialization.
Restart Printer
Controller Error
Restart Printer
<ESS ROM Check (Main) Fail>
Flip FIP-1.4
Checksum error in the main program ROM.
Error 116-317
Restart Printer
2-12
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
RAM Error
Restart Printer <ESS DIMM Slot RAM Error>
Flip The error is detected by DIMM slot check during FIP-1.6
Restart Printer
NV RAM Error
Restart Printer <ESS NVRAM1 W/R Check Fail>
Flip The failure is detected by NVRAM 1 W/R check during FIP-1.4
Restart Printer
Controller Error
Restart Printer
<ESS Illegal Exception>
Flip FIP-1.4
CPU illegal exception is detected.
Error 116-324
Restart Printer
NV RAM Error
Restart Printer <ESS NVRAM2 W/R Check Fail>
Flip The failure is detected by NVRAM 2 W/R check during FIP-1.4
Restart Printer
Controller Error
Restart Printer
<ESS Instruction Cash Error>
ESS Flip FIP-1.4
Checksum error in the Instruction Cash.
Error 116-327
Restart Printer
Controller Error
Restart Printer
<ESS Data Cache Error>
Flip FIP-1.4
Checksum error in the Data Cash.
Error 116-328
Restart Printer
ASIC Error
Restart Printer
<ASIC Fail>
Flip FIP-1.4
The error is detected by ASIC error.
Error 116-343
Restart Printer
Network Error
Restart Printer <On Board Network Communication Fail>
Flip Communication error between CPU Network and ESS FIP-1.4
Error 116-350 F/W is detected.
Restart Printer
Network Error
Restart Printer <On Board Network Ethernet BIST parity/RAM R/W
Error>
Flip FIP-1.4
The error is detected by Network Ethernet parity RAM
Error 116-351 R/W check.
Restart Printer
2-13
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Network Error
Restart Printer <On Board Network Internal Loopback Error>
Flip The error is detected by on board Network Internal FIP-1.4
Error 116-352 Loopback check.
Restart Printer
Network Error
Restart Printer
<On Board Network Fatal Error>
ESS Flip FIP-1.4
The fatal error is detected by on board Network check.
Error 116-355
Restart Printer
NV RAM Error <ESS NVRAM1 SIZE And ID Check Fail>
Restart Printer The error is detected by consistency check between
Flip NVRAM size required by the system and its actual size, FIP-1.4
Error 116-390 and by consistency check of ID recorded when turning
Restart Printer ON the power.
Insert <IOT Y CRU Detached>
FIP-1.7
Yellow Cartridge Yellow Cartridge detached is detected.
Insert <IOT M CRU Detached>
FIP-1.7
MagentaCartridge Magenta Cartridge detached is detected.
Insert <IOT C CRU Detached>
FIP-1.7
Cyan Cartridge Cyan Cartridge detached is detected.
Insert <IOT K CRU Detached>
FIP-1.7
Black Cartridge Black Cartridge detached is detected.
Non-Xerox Toner <IOT CRUM ID Error>
FIP-1.8
Invalid Yellow CRUM ID error of Yellow Cartridge is detected.
FIP-1.9
Invalid Magenta CRUM ID error of Magenta Cartridge is detected.
FIP-1.10
Invalid Cyan CRUM ID error of Cyan Cartridge is detected.
Toner Non-Xerox Toner <IOT CRUM ID Error>
FIP-1.11
Cartridge Invalid Black CRUM ID error of Black Cartridge is detected.
<IOT Y CRU Life Over>
Replace Yellow FIP-1.12
Yellow Cartridge reached the replacement time.
<IOT M CRU Life Over>
Replace Magenta FIP-1.12
Magenta Cartridge reached the replacement time.
<IOT C CRU Life Over>
Replace Cyan FIP-1.12
Cyan Cartridge reached the replacement time.
<IOT K CRU Life Over>
Replace Black FIP-1.12
Black Cartridge reached the replacement time.
Replace <IOT Y CRU Life Over>
FIP-1.12
Yellow Cartridge Yellow Cartridge reached the replacement time.
Replace <IOT M CRU Life Over>
FIP-1.12
MagentaCartridge Magenta Cartridge reached the replacement time.
Replace <IOT C CRU Life Over>
FIP-1.12
Cyan Cartridge Cyan Cartridge reached the replacement time.
2-14
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Replace <IOT K CRU Life Over>
FIP-1.12
Black Cartridge Black Cartridge reached the replacement time.
Yellow Low <IOT Y CRU Near Life>
FIP-1.12
Replace Soon Yellow Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time.
<IOT M CRU Near Life>
Magenta Low
Magenta Cartridge is going to reach the replacement FIP-1.12
Replace Soon
time.
Cyan Low <IOT C CRU Near Life>
FIP-1.12
Replace Soon Cyan Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time.
Black Low <IOT K CRU Near Life>
FIP-1.12
Replace Soon Black Cartridge is going to reach the replacement time.
Toner
Cartridge <IOT Y CRU Waste Full>
Waste Full
Waste Toner counter value is going to reach the FIP-1.13
Yellow Cartridge
replacement time.
<IOT M CRU Waste Full>
Waste Full
MagentaCartridge
replacement time.
<IOT C CRU Waste Full>
Waste Full
Cyan Cartridge
replacement time.
<IOT K CRU Waste Full>
Waste Full
Black Cartridge
replacement time.
Check Manual Feed
Remove Paper <IOT MPT Paper Pullout JAM>
Flip Though it tried to feed a paper from MPT, the paper was FIP-1.14
Open and close not loaded or it was pulled out forcibly from MPT.
Front Cover
Jam at Front
Cover <IOT MPT Insert JAM>
Flip MPT No Paper Sensor detect when a paper is inserted FIP-1.15
Open Front Cover from MPT.
and Remove Paper
Jam at Front
Jam
Cover
<IOT Regi On early JAM>
Flip FIP-1.16
Regi sensor turned on earlier than specified time.
Open Front Cover
and Remove Paper
Jam at Front
Cover
<IOT Regi OFF Jam>
Flip FIP-1.16
Regi sensor turned off earlier than specified time.
Open Front Cover
and Remove Paper
Jam at Exit <IOT Exit JAM>
FIP-1.17
Open Front Cover The paper remains at Exit Sensor.
2-15
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Jam at Exit
Flip <IOT Exit Off early JAM>
FIP-1.18
Open Front Cover Exit sensor turned off earlier than specified time.
and Remove Paper
Jam at Exit
Flip <IOT Exit On early JAM>
FIP-1.18
Open Front Cover Exit sensor turned on earlier than specified time.
and Remove Paper
Jam at Exit
Flip <IOT Exit Off JAM>
FIP-1.18
and Remove Paper
Jam at Exit
Flip <IOT Exit On JAM>
FIP-1.18
Jam
and Remove Paper
Jam at
Manual Feed <IOT MPT Misfeed JAM>
Flip Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time FIP-1.19
Check Manual Feed after feeding a paper from MPT.
Open Front Cover
Jam at Reg. Roll <IOT Remain Registration JAM>
FIP-1.20
Open Front Cover The paper remains at Regi Sensor.
Jam at Tray
<IOT CASSETTE1 Misfeed JAM>
Flip Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time FIP-1.21
Check Tray after feeding a paper from CASSETTE1.
Open Front Cover
<Waiting for reseat paper of MPT>
Reseat paper
Regi Sensor is not turned ON within the specified time FIP-1.19
of Manual Feed
after feeding a paper from MPT.
MPC Error
Press Ok Button
<DOWNLOAD INITIAL ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.22
Failed to start MPC download mode at MPC download.
Error 016-738
Press Ok Button
Reseat MPC
Press Ok Button
<DOWNLOAD INSERTION ERROR>
MPC Flip FIP-1.22
MPC Download was attempted without MPC mounted.
Error 016-739
Press Ok Button
MPC Comm Error
Press Ok Button
<DOWNLOAD COMM ERROR>
Flip FIP-1.22
Communication error occurred ESS during download.
Error 016-740
Press Ok Button
2-16
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
MPC Error
Restart Printer
<MPC-ESS Communication Fail>
Flip FIP-1.23
Communication fail between MPC and ESS.
Error 018-310
Restart Printer
MPC Error
Restart Printer
<MPC Flash ROM Boot Module Checksum Error>
Flip FIP-1.23
Checksum error in MPC Flash ROM.
Error 018-311
Restart Printer
MPC Error
Restart Printer
<MPC RAM R/W Test Error>
Flip FIP-1.23
The error is detected by MPC RAM R/W check.
Error 018-312
Restart Printer
MPC Error
Restart Printer <MPC Flash ROM Application Module Checksum
Flip Error> FIP-1.23
Error 018-313 Checksum error in MPC Flash ROM.
Restart Printer
MPC Error
Restart Printer
<MPC MAC Address Checksum Error>
MPC Flip FIP-1.23
Checksum error in the MPC MAC address.
Error 018-314
Restart Printer
MPC Error
Restart Printer <MPC Ethernet BIST parity/RAM R/W Error>
Flip The error is detected by MPC Ethernet BIST parity FIP-1.23
Error 018-315 RAM R/W check.
Restart Printer
MPC Error
Restart Printer
<MPC Internal Loopback Error>
Flip FIP-1.23
The error is detected by Loopback test.
Error 018-316
Restart Printer
MPC Error
Restart Printer
<MPC Fatal Error>
Flip FIP-1.23
The error is detected by MPC check.
Error 018-317
Restart Printer
MPC error
Restart Printer
<PCI Option#0 Fail>
Flip FIP-1.23
Detection error of PCI option 0.
Error 116-333
Restart Printer
2-17
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
CTD Sensor Error
Restart Printer <IOT CTD (ADC) Sensor Error>
Flip
Error 092-310 Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys
FIP-1.24
Restart Printer "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK".
Flip 092-310
092-310 Code: 0801:fail 1/0802: Fail 2
Code: XXXX
DTB Life Over
Restart Printer
<IOT DTB Life Over>
Flip FIP-1.25
PHD ASSY reached the replacement time.
Error 094-330
Restart Printer
Check Unit <IOT CTD (ADC) Sensor Contamination>
FIP-1.26
CTD Sensor Contamination of the ADC Sensor is detected.
<IOT CTD (ADC) Sensor Contamination>
Transfer Belt CTD Sensor Contamination of the ADC Sensor is detected.
FIP-1.26
Insert <IOT PHD Detached>

FIP-1.27
PHD ASSY PHD ASSY detached is detected.
Low Density <IOT Y Toner Low Density>
FIP-1.28
Yellow Cartridge Detects low density of yellow.
Low Density <IOT M Toner Low Density>
FIP-1.29
MagentaCartridge Detects low density of magenta.
Low Density <IOT C Toner Low Density>
FIP-1.30
Cyan Cartridge Detects low density of cyan.
Low Density <IOT K Toner Low Density>
FIP-1.31
Black Cartridge Detects low density of black.
Replace <IOT CRUM ID Error>
FIP-1.32
PHD ASSY CRUM ID error of PHD ASSY is detected.
Transfer Life <IOT DTB Life Pre Warning>
FIP-1.25
Replace Soon The PHD ASSY is going to reach the replacement time.
Insert Output < Paper Empty at Manual Duplex>
FIP-1.33
to Manual Feed Waiting for side 2 to be set for manual duplex print(SSI).
Insert Output < Paper Empty at Manual Duplex>
FIP-1.33
to Tray Waiting for side 2 to be set for manual duplex print.
Load Manual Feed
XX(Paper size)
Paper <IOT Paper Size Mismatch>
Flip FIP-1.34
Setting The paper size mismatch in Tray 1 is detected.
Load Manual Feed
YY(paper type)
Load Manual Feed
XX(Paper size)
<No suitable paper>
Flip FIP-1.35
The paper empty is detected.
Load Manual Feed
YY(paper type)
2-18
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Load Tray
XX(Paper size)
<IOT Paper Size Mismatch>
Flip FIP-1.36
The paper size mismatch in CASSETTE1 is detected.
Load Tray
YY(paper type)
Paper Load Tray
Setting XX(Paper size)
<No suitable paper>
Flip FIP-1.37
Load Tray
YY(paper type)
<No paper in Ready>
Tray Empty FIP-1.37
Insert Fuser
010-317
<IOT Fuser Detached>
Flip FIP-1.38
Fuser detached is detected.
Insert Fuser
Restart Printer
Replace Fuser
010-351
<IOT Fuser Life Over>
Flip FIP-1.39
Fuser has reached the replacement time.
Replace Fuser
Restart Printer
<IOT Fuser Failure>
Fuser Failure is detected.
Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys
"Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK"
Fuser
Fuser Error 010-397
Restart Printer Code: XX
Flip
01: NC circuit fail/02: NC Detect disconnection/03: NC
Error 010-397
Detect fail/04: NC Comp disconnection/05: NC Comp FIP-1.40
Restart Printer
fail/06: NC Temp Over/07: STS Temp Over/08: NC
Flip Comp Table Fail/09: NC Overheat/0A: STS
010-397 disconnection/0B: STS Overheat/0C: STS Lowtemp/0D:
Code: XX NC Lowtemp/0E: Cool Timeover/0F: Fuser Ready Time
over ERR1/10: NC Warm up Time over ERR2/11: Fuser
Ready Time over ERR2/12: Relay Off STS H/13: Relay
Off NC H/14: Relay Other/15: Fuser Machine Code
ERR/16: Fuser Ready Time over ERR3
Fuser Life <IOT Fuser Life Pre Warning>
FIP-1.39
Replace Soon Fuser is going to reach replacement time.
Fan Motor Error
Restart Printer
<IOT Fan Motor Failure>
Flip FIP-1.41
Rear Fan Motor error is detected
Error 042-313
Restart Printer
Motor
Motor Error
Restart Printer
<IOT Motor Failure>
Flip FIP-1.42
Main Motor failure is detected.
Error 042-325
Restart Printer
2-19
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Motor Error
Restart Printer
<IOT Motor Failure>
Motor Flip FIP-1.43
Sub Motor failure is detected.
Error 042-326
Restart Printer
PHD CRUM Error
Restart Printer
<IOT CRUM ID Error>
Flip FIP-1.32
CRUM ID error of PHD ASSY is detected.
Error 091-916
PHD ASSY Restart Printer
Check Unit <PHD Tape Staying>
FIP-1.44
PHD ASSY Detects the tape staying on the PHD ASSY.
<IOT PHD Life Pre Warning>
PHD ASSY Life FIP-1.25
The PHD ASSY is going to reach the replacement time.
Front Cover Open <IOT Cover Front Open>
FIP-1.45
Close FrontCover Front cover is open.
Cover Open
Side Door Open <IOT Side Cover Open>
FIP-1.46
Close Side Door Side cover is open.
<IOT Firmware Error>
Firmware error occurs.
MCU Firmware Err Shows detail of error code when pressing three keys
Restart Printer "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK".
024-340
Flip
Code: XX
Error 024-340
FIP-1.47
Restart Printer
01: Task Over/02: Time Over/03: NV Write Retry/04:
Flip NV Write Queue Over/05: LEISUS Send Over/06:
024-340 CRUM Data/07: Pursuit Comp/08: Pursuit SUM/09:
Code: XX Fuser NV/0A: Dispense/0B: FSR SBY Mode/0C: Media
ERR2/0D: Hanpa/0E: FSR SBY Mode/0F: FSR Print
MCU Mode/10: Continuous Heater/11: PPM Group ERR/12:
CMODE ERR/13: Send CMD ERR
<IOT NVRAM Error>
MCU NVRAM Error IOT NVM Error occurs.
Restart Printer
Shows detail of error code and address when pressing
Flip
three keys "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK".
Error 041-340
ADDR: XXXX FIP-1.48
Restart Printer
Data: XX
Flip 1000 to 17FF: MCU PWBA/3000 to 30FF: Transfer
ADDR: XXXX Belt/3100 to 31FF: Yellow Toner Cartridge/3200 to
Data: XX 32FF: Magenta Toner Cartridge/3300 to 33FF: Cyan
Toner Cartridge/3400 to 34FF: Black Toner Cartridge
2-20
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Laser Error <IOT ROS Failure>

Restart Printer ROS Failure is detected.
Flip
Error 061-370
ROS "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". FIP-1.49
Restart Printer
061-370
Flip Code: XX
061-370 01: SOS Rotating up defect/02: SOS Interval defect/03h:
Code: XX LD defect
MCU Comm. Error
Restart Printer <IOT-ESS Communication Fail>
System Flip Communication failure between IOT and ESS is FIP-1.50
Error 024-371 detected.
Restart Printer
Invalid User
Press Ok Button
<Auditron - Invalid User>
Flip FIP-1.51
The user is not registered to any account.
Error 016-757
Press Ok Button
Disabled Func
Press Ok Button
<Auditron - Disabled Function>
Flip FIP-1.52
An invalid account was detected.
Error 016-758
Press Ok Button
Limit Exceeded
Press Ok Button
<Auditron - Reached Limit>
Flip FIP-1.53
The number of registered users exceeded its upper limit.
Error 016-759
Press Ok Button
Other
Invalid Job
Press Ok Button
<Job Environment Violation>
Flip FIP-1.54
Detects violation data for the print condition.
Error 016-799
Press Ok Button
Download Mode
Send FW Data
<MCU Firmware Down Load Error>
Flip FIP-1.55
The MCU downloaded file is invalid.
Error 024-360
Send FW Data
K Mode Sol Error
Restart Printer <IOT K Mode Solenoid Error>
Flip K Mode Solenoid (Color Mode Switching Solenoid) FIP-1.56
Error 042-372 error is detected.
Restart Printer
2-21
2.2 FIP
Relevant
FIP
Env Sensor Error <IOT Environment Sensor Error>

Restart Printer Humid sensor error is detected.
Flip
Error 092-661
Other "Down arrow", "Upper arrow", and "OK". FIP-1.57
Restart Printer
092-661
Flip Code: XX
092-661 01: Humidity Sensor Error/10: Temperature Sensor
Code: XX Error/11: Humidity and Temperature Sensor Error
2-22
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP

2.3.1 Level 1 FIP
FIP-1.1 Erase Flash Err 016-500/Write Flash Err 016-501/Verify Flash

Err 016-502/Format Error 016-737/Invalid ID 016-742/Range Chk
Error 016-743/Check Sum Error 016-744/Header Error 016-745
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Possible causative parts:
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
Checking the download file Re-download the
1 Go to step 2.
Was the file for 6130N downloaded? correct file.
Checking the connection between PC and printer
Are your PC and the printer correctly connected by USB or LAN?
2 Go to step 3. End of work
Disconnect and reconnect the USB or network cable.
Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON?
Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS
3 Reseat the PWBA ESS. Go to step 4. End of work
Checking re-downloading the correct file for 6130N Replace the PWBA
4 Re-download the correct file from Xerox web site. ESS. (Refer to End of work
Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? REP8.3)
2-23
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.2 Out of Memory 016-718
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
MEMORY CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.12)
Checking the memory capacity for print Add the MEMORY
1 Print the small size file (like a Windows test print). Go to step 2. CARD or divide the
Does the error still occur when printing? printing job.
Checking after reseating the MEMORY CARD
2 Reseat the MEMORY CARD. Go to step 3. End of work
Does the error still occur when printing?
Checking the memory card capacity Replace the PWBA
3 Is the memory capacity recognized normally? Go to step 4. ESS. (Refer to
Checked by [Information Page] - [Configuration] in [Setup]. REP8.3)
Checking after replacing the MEMORY CARD Replace the PWBA
4 Replace the MEMORY CARD. ESS. (Refer to End of work
Does the error still occur when printing? REP8.3)
2-24
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.3 PDL Error 016-720
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
Checking the printing job
1 Print the small size file (like a Windows test print). Go to step 2. End of work
Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS Replace the PWBA
2 Reseat the PWBA ESS. ESS. (Refer to End of work
2-25
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.4 Network Error 018-319,018-320,116-350,116-351,116-352,116-

35/Font ROM Error 116-310/MACaddress Error 116-314/RAM
Error 116-315/Controller Error 116-317,116-327,116-328/NV
RAM Error 116-326,116-390/ASIC Error 116-343
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
1 Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Go to step 2. End of work
2-26
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.5 PAGEC Time Error 024-362
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
End of work, if the
Checking the error
1 Go to step 2. error occurs again,
Does the error still occur when turning off and on the power?
go to step 2.
Checking the PWBA ESS installation
Replace the PWBA
2 Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) End of work.
ESS.
2-27
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.6 RAM Error 116-316/116-320
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL9.1.27)
MEMORY CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.12)
Checking the MEMORY CARD for installation
1 Reseat the MEMORY CARD. Go to step 2. End of work
Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON?
Checking after replacing the MEMORY CARD Replace the PWBA
2 Replace the MEMORY CARD. ESS. (Refer to End of work
Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON? REP8.3)
2-28
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.7 Insert Yellow Cartridge/Insert Magenta Cartridge/Insert Cyan

Cartridge/Insert Black Cartridge
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
TONER CARTRIDGE (K) (PL5.1.21)
TONER CARTRIDGE (C) (PL5.1.22)
TONER CARTRIDGE (M) (PL5.1.23)
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) (PL5.1.24)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K)
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K), and check that the
lock key is in the lock position.
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K). (Refer to
REP5.7)
Checking the HARN ASSY TONER CRUM for continuity
Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. Replace the HARN
4 Disconnect J311 (Y), J312 (M), J313 (C) or J324 (K) from the Go to step 5. ASSY TONER
connector CRUM. CRUM
Is each cable of J31 <=> J311, J312, J313 or J324 continuous?
Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA
5 Reseat the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-29
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.8 Non-Xerox Toner (Y)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14)
HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (PL5.1.26)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR correctly.
Checking the Toner Type Replace the TONER
2 Go to step 3.
Is the Xerox Toner seated? CARTRIDGE (Y).
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key
is in the lock position.
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock
key is in the lock position.
Checking the connector for connection
Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and
CONNECTOR CRUM.
Are P/J31 and P/J311 connected correctly?
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J31
5 Go to step 7.
and/or P/J311 surly,
then go to step 6.
Replace the HARN
Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU.
7 Go to step 8. ASSY TONER
Disconnect J311 from the CONNECTOR CRUM.
CRUM.
Is each cable of J31 <=> J311 continuous?
Checking the power to CONNECTOR CRUM Replace the
Replace the PWBA
Disconnect J31 from the PWBA MCU. CONNECTOR
8 MCU. (Refer to
Is the voltage across P31-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, CRUM. (Refer to
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC? REP5.6)
2-30
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.9 Non-Xerox Toner (M)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
2 Go to step 3.
Is the Xerox Toner seated? CARTRIDGE (M).
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock
CONNECTOR CRUM.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J31
5 Go to step 7.
then go to step 6.
Replace the HARN
CRUM.
Replace the PWBA
8 MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
2-31
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.10 Non-Xerox Toner (C)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
2 Go to step 3.
Is the Xerox Toner seated? CARTRIDGE (C).
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (C)
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (C)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock
CONNECTOR CRUM.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J31
5 Go to step 7.
then go to step 6.
Replace the HARN
CRUM.
Replace the PWBA
8 MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
2-32
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.11 Non-Xerox Toner (K)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
2 Go to step 3.
Is the Xerox Toner seated? CARTRIDGE (B).
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (K)
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (K)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock
CONNECTOR CRUM.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J31
5 Go to step 7.
then go to step 6.
Replace the HARN
CRUM.
Replace the PWBA
8 MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
2-33
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.12 Replace Yellow/Replace Magenta/Replace Cyan/Replace

Black/Yellow Low/Magenta Low/Cyan Low/Black Low
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K) Replace the PWBA
1 Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K). MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-34
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.13 Waste Full
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
TONER CARTRIDGE (PL5.1.21/5.1.22/5.1.23/5.1.24)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the waste toner counter
Is the counter going to reach the replacement time? Replace the TONER
1 Go to step 2.
Checked by [Parameter] - [Life Y/M/C/K Waste Toner] in CARTRIDGE.
diagnosis.
Checking the error Replace the PWBA
2 Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE. MCU. (Refer to End of work.
Does the error still occur when turning of and on the power? REP8.11)
2-35
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.14 Check Manual Feed
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
HARN ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18)
ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9)
ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)
SENSOR PHOTO (PL3.2.13)
ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14)
SPRING REGI R M (PL3.2.24)
SPRING REGI L M (PL3.2.29)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
1 Was a paper pulled out from SSI forcibly? Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Checking the printing
2 Reload a paper to SSI. Go to step 3. End of work
Checking after opening and closing the COVER ASSY FRONT
Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT, and then latch
correctly.
Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for
shape and operation
Remove the PHD ASSY once to check the followings.
Are ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL seated Clean or replace the
4 Go to step 5.
correctly? defective ROLL(s).
Are they not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated
smoothly?
Check these items by turning with your finger.
contacting Replace the
Is the ROLL REGI METAL surely contacted with the ROLL SPRING REGI R M
5 Go to step 6.
ASSY REGI by the spring force on both sides of the ROLL REGI and/or SPRING
METAL? REGI L M.
Check this item with your finger.
Reseat the
Checking the ACTUATOR SSI for shape and operation
ACTUATOR SSI. If
Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the
6 Go to step 7. broken or damaged,
operation.
replace the
Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR SSI normal?
ACTUATOR SSI.
Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for
operation
Replace the PWBA
operation.
7 MCU. (Refer to Go to step 8.
Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator
REP8.11)
(ACTUATOR SSI) of the SSI No Paper Sensor (SENSOR
PHOTO) is operated?
Checked by [Digital Input] - [Manual Feeder Sensor] in diagnosis.
2-36
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper
Sensor) for connection
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SENSOR
PHOTO.
Are P/J23 and P/J233 connected correctly
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
8 Go to step 10. and/or P/J233
correctly, then go to
step 9.
9 Does the error still occur when printing? Go to step 10. End of work
Checking the HARN ASSY L SIDE for continuity
10 Go to step 11.
Disconnect J233 from the SENSOR PHOTO. ASSY L SIDE.
Checking the power to the SENSOR PHOTO
Replace the PWBA
11 Go to step 12. MCU. (Refer to
Is the voltage across P23-6pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU,
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Checking the SENSOR PHOTO for operation
Check the voltage across J23-8pin <=> ground on the PWBA
Replace the
MCU. Replace the PWBA
SENSOR
12 Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the MCU. (Refer to
PHOTO.(Refer to
operation. REP8.11)
REP3.10)
Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the SENSOR
PHOTO is operated?
2-37
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.15 Jam at Front (MPT Insert Jam)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
HARNESS ASSY L SIDE (PL3.1.18)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
After print
Checking the customer operation
1 completion, insert Go to step 2.
Did the customer insert the paper to the SSI during print?
the paper to the SSI.
Checking the SSI No Paper Sensor for operation
2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
(ACTUATOR SSI) is operated by paper.
Checked by [Sensor Check] - [Tray 1 MPT Sensor] in diagnosis.
Replace the PWBA
Checking the error
3 MCU. (Refer to End of work
REP8.11)
Checking the connectors of the SSI No Paper Sensor for
connection
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and SSI No
Paper Sensor.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
step 5.
6 Go to step 7.
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Check the voltage across J23-8pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the
Replace the PWBA
MCU. SENSOR
8 MCU. (Refer to
Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the PHOTO.(Refer to
REP8.11)
operation. REP3.10)
Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR SSI is operated?
2-38
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.16 Jam at Front (Regi On Off Jam)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HAR ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9)
Checking the error
1 Clear the jammed paper. Go to step 2. End of work.
Set the paper
Checking the paper setting
2 Go to step 4. correctly, and go to
Was the paper correctly set to Tray?
step 3.
3 Does the error still occur when printing? Go to step 4. End of work.
contacting Replace the
Is the ROLL REGI METAL surely contacted with the ROLL SPRING REGI R M
4 Go to step 5.
ASSY REGI by the spring force on both sides of the ROLL REGI and/or SPRING
METAL? REGI L M.
Check this item with your finger.
Checking the Regi Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation
5 Does the Regi Clutch operate properly? Go to step 6. Go to step 7.
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Regi Clutch] in diagnosis.
Checking the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for operation
(ACTUATOR REGI IN) of the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) Replace the PWBA
6 is operated? MCU. (Refer to Go to step 11.
Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the REP8.11)
operation.
Checked by [Digital Input] - [Regi Sensor] in diagnosis.
Checking the connectors of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi
Clutch) for connection
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and
CLUTCH ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch).
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J26
7 Go to step 8.
and/or P/J262
correctly.
2-39
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL for continuity
Replace the HARN
8 Go to step 9. ASSY KSNR
Disconnect P262 from the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.
REGCL.
Is each cable of J26 <=> P262 continuous?
Checking the power to the CLUTCH ASSY DRV
Disconnect J26 from the PWBA MCU. Replace the PWBA
9 Is the voltage across P26-4pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, Go to step 10. MCU. (Refer to
about +24 VDC when the Interlock Switch (HARN ASSY REP8.11)
INTERLOCK) is pushed?
Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance
Replace the PWBA Replace the
Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.
10 MCU. (Refer to CLUTCH ASSY
Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280-
REP8.11) DRV.
ohm?
Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)
for connection
PHOTO.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
11 Go to step 12.
and/or P/J232
correctly.

12 Go to step 13.
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Check the voltage across 23-5pin <=> ground on the PWBA
Replace the
SENSOR
PHOTO.(Refer to
operation. REP8.11)
REP3.12)
PHOTO is operated?
2-40
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.17 Jam at Exit
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1)
HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the paper feeding
Was a paper fed from SSI?
Set the paper to SSI
Was the paper correctly set to SSI without slant?
step 3.
Replace the paper
Checking the paper condition with a new and dry
4 Go to step 6.
Is the paper wrinkled or damaged? one, then go to step
5.
Checking after reloading a new paper
6 Reload a new paper. Go to step 7. End of work
Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching
correctly.
Checking the FUSER ASSY
Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance in the Remove the paper
8 FUSER ASSY? and/or substance, Go to step 9.
Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has then go to step 9.
cooled down.
Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY
Reseat the FUSER ASSY.
9 Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has Go to step 10. End of work
cooled down.
Checking the Exit Sensor for operation
Replace the PWBA
of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY is operated?
Checked by [Digital Input] - [Exit Sensor] in diagnosis.
REP8.11)
Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has
cooled down.
2-41
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the connectors of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY
for connection
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and FUSER
ASSY.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J17
11 Go to step 12.
and/or P/J171
correctly.
Checking the HARN ASSY FUSER for continuity

Remove the FUSER ASSY.
Replace the HARN
12 Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Go to step 13.
ASSY FUSER.
NOTE: P171 is attached to the frame.
Checking the power to the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY
Replace the PWBA
Disconnect the connector of J17 on the PWBA MCU.
Is the voltage across J17-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU,
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Check the voltage across J17-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA Replace the FUSER
14 MCU. MCU. (Refer to ASSY. (Refer to
Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor is REP8.11) REP6.1)
operated?
2-42
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.18 Jam at Exit
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
HARNESS ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the error
1 Clear the jammed paper. Go to step 2. End of work.
Set the paper
Was the paper correctly set to SSI or CASSETTE1?
step 3.
Checking the FUSER ASSY installation
cooled down.
Checking the FUSER ASSY
Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance in the Remove the paper
5 FUSER ASSY? and/or substance, go Go to step 7.
Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has to step 6.
cooled down.
7 Go to step 8. End of work.
correctly.
Replace the PWBA
of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY is operated?
Checked by [Digital Input] - [Exit Sensor] in diagnosis.
REP8.11)
cooled down.
Checking the connectors of the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY
for connection
ASSY.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J17
9 Go to step 10.
and/or P/J171
correctly.
2-43
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Replace the HARN
10 Disconnect J17 from the PWBA MCU. Go to step 11.
ASSY FUSER.
Checking the power to the Exit Sensor in the FUSER ASSY
Replace the PWBA
Disconnect the connector of J17 on the PWBA MCU.
Is the voltage across J17-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU,
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Check the voltage across J17-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA Replace the FUSER
12 MCU. MCU. (Refer to ASSY. (Refer to
Does the voltage change, when the actuator of the Exit Sensor is REP8.11) REP6.1)
operated?
2-44
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.19 Jam at Manual Feed
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
ACTUATOR REGI ROLL (PL3.2.8)
DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HARN ASSY MAIN MOT (PL9.1.7)
HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9)
Use the paper that
Checking the paper size meets the
1 Go to step 3.
Does the using paper size meet the specification? specifications, then
go to step 2.
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
Is the paper in the SSI wrinkled or damaged? one, then go to step
4.
5 Reload a new paper in the SSI. Go to step 6. End of work
correctly.
The paper lead edge
stay after the ROLL
Checking the paper lead edge staying position
ASSY REGI and
7 Does the paper lead edge stay before the ROLL ASSY REGI and Go to step 8.
ROLL REGI
ROLL REGI METAL?
METAL, then go to
step 13.
Checking after resetting the guide sides of the SSI
8 Reset the side guides. Go to step 9. End of work
Remove the
Checking the paper transfer path between the SSI paper loading obstacles or stain
9 window and Regi.Sensor from the paper Go to step 11.
Are there any obstacles on the paper transfer path? transfer path, then
go to step 10.
Reseat the
ACTUATOR SSI. If
11 Go to step 12. broken or damaged,
operation.
replace the
ACTUATOR SSI.
2-45
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
operation
operation.
PHOTO) is operated?
Checking the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation,
and ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation
Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis,
and then enter the [Regi Clutch].
Does the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) operate properly,
and the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate?
During this check, cheat the interlock switch (HARN ASSY
INTERLOCK).
Checking the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Reseat the
Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape ACTUATOR REGI
14 and operation. Go to step 15. ROLL. If broken or
Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL deformed, replace it
normal? with a new one.
Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the
Replace the PWBA
ACTUATOR REGI ROLL is operated?
REP8.11)
operation.
PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor).
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
step 17.
18 Go to step 19.
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
2-46
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Replace the PWBA
MCU. SENSOR
20 MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
operation. REP3.10)
for connection
PHOTO.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
21 Go to step 22.
and/or P/J232
correctly.

22 Go to step 23.
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Replace the
SENSOR
PHOTO.(Refer to
operation. REP8.11)
REP3.12)
Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL is
operated?
2-47
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and CLUTCH
ASSY DRV.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J26
25 Go to step 26.
and/or P/J262
correctly.

Replace the HARN
REGCL.
Checking the CLUTCH ASSY DRV for resistance Replace the
Replace the PWBA
Disconnect P/J262 of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. CLUTCH ASSY
28 MCU. (Refer to
Is the resistance across J262-1 and J262-2 approximately 280- DRV. (Refer to
REP8.11)
ohm? REP3.1)
2-48
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.20 Jam at Reg. Roll
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11)
TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Use the paper that
1 Go to step 3.
go to step 2.
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
Is the paper wrinkled or damaged? one, then go to step
4.
5 Reload a new paper. Go to step 6. End of work
correctly.
Checking around the Regi Sensor Remove the paper
7 Are there any remaining paper and/or foreign substance around and/or substance, Go to step 9.
the Regi Sensor? then go to step 8.
Remove the
remaining paper. If
Checking the TRANSFER ASSY
the belt is damaged,
9 Are there any remaining paper and/or damage on the belt of the Go to step 10.
replace the
TRANSFER ASSY?
TRANSFER ASSY.
(Refer to REP6.3)
shape and operation
Remove the PHD ASSY once to check the followings.
Are ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL seated Clean or replace the
10 Go to step 11.
correctly? defective ROLL(s).
Also, are they not contaminated and/or damaged, and rotated
smoothly?
Check these items by turning with your finger.
2-49
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Reseat the
Checking the ACTUATOR REGI IN and ACTUATOR REGI
ACTUATOR REGI
ROLL for shape and operation
IN and/or
11 Go to step 12. ACTUATOR REGI
following.
ROLL. If broken or
Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI IN and
deformed, replace it
ACTUATOR REGI ROLL normal?
or they.
(ACTUATOR REGI IN) of the Regi. Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO)
12 is operated? Go to step 13. Go to step 16.
operation.
Checking the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) for operation
Does the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) operate properly?
13 Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Go to step 14. Go to step 24.
INTERLOCK).
Checking the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) for operation,
and ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL for rotation
Does the Regi. Clutch (CLUTCH ASSY DRV) operate properly,
and the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate?
INTERLOCK).
Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the
15 Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. TRANSFER ASSY. End of work
Does the error still occur when printing? (Refer to REP6.3)
2-50
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
for connection
PHOTO.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
16 Go to step 17.
and/or P/J232
correctly.

17 Go to step 18.
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Check the voltage across 23-5pin <=> ground on the PWBA
Replace the
SENSOR
PHOTO.(Refer to
operation. REP8.11)
REP3.12)
PHOTO is operated?
2-51
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
ASSY DRV (Regi Clutch).
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J26
20 Go to step 21.
and/or P/J262
correctly.

Replace the HARN
REGCL.
Replace the PWBA
23 MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
ohm? REP3.1)
Checking the connectors for connection
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and DRIVE
ASSY MAIN (Main Motor).
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J21
24 Go to step 25.
and/or P/J211
correctly.
Checking the HARN ASSY MAIN MOT for continuity

25 Go to step 26.
Disconnect J211 from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. ASSY MAIN MOT.
Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Disconnect J21 from the PWBA MCU. Replace the DRIVE Replace the PWBA
26 Are the voltages across J21-2pin/J21-4pin <=> ground on the ASSY MAIN. MCU. (Refer to
PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN (Refer to REP7.2) REP8.11)
ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed?
2-52
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.21 Jam at Tray
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1)
HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5)
SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.9)
ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)
ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Replace the paper
1 Go to step 3.
Is the paper in the Tray 1 wrinkled or damaged? one, then go to step
2.
3 Reload a new paper in the Tray 1. Go to step 4. End of work
correctly.
Checking the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) for operation
Does the Main Motor (DRIVE ASSY MAIN) operate properly?
5 Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. Go to step 6. Go to step 18.
INTERLOCK).
Checking the DRIVE ASSY PH for operation
Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate
properly?
6 Checked by [Digital Output] - [Regi Clutch] and [Main Motor Go to step 7. Go to step 29.
FULL2] in diagnosis.
INTERLOCK).
Checking the paper feeding position
Is the paper not fed from the CASSETTE1?
Checking after resetting the Guide Sides and End Guide on the
CASSETTE1
8 Reset the Guide Sides and End Guide, and reseat the Go to step 9. End of work
CASSETTE1 to the printer correctly.
2-53
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the HOLDER ASSY RETARD on the Tray 1 for shape
Replace the
and rotation
HOLDER ASSY
9 Pull the Tray 1 out from the printer. Go to step 10.
RETARD. (Refer to
Is the HOLDER ASSY RETARD not contaminated and/or
REP2.3)
damaged, and rotated smoothly?
Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED for shape and rotation
Replace the ROLL
Pull the CASSETTE1 out from the printer.
10 Go to step 11. ASSY FEED.
Is the ROLL ASSY FEED not contaminated and/or damaged, and
(Refer to REP3.8)
rotated smoothly?
Checking the Cassette Feed Solenoid (SOLENOID FEED) for
operation
Does the Cassette Feed Solenoid (SOLENOID FEED) operate Replace the
properly? CASSETTE ASSY
11 Go to step 21.
Checked by [Digital Output] - [CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID 250. (Refer to
(Auto OFF)] in diagnosis. REP2.1)
INTERLOCK).
The paper lead edge
stay after the ROLL
Checking the paper lead edge staying position
ASSY REGI and
12 Does the paper lead edge stay before the ROLL ASSY REGI and Go to step 13.
ROLL REGI
ROLL REGI METAL?
METAL, then go to
step 16.
Remove the
Checking the paper transfer path between the ROLL ASSY FEED
obstacles or stains
13 and ROLL ASSY REGI. Go to step 14.
from the paper
Are there any obstacles on the paper transfer path?
transfer path.
Checking the ACTUATOR REGI IN for shape and operation
Reseat the
Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape
ACTUATOR REGI
14 and operation. Go to step 15.
IN. If broken or
Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI IN
deformed, replace it.
normal?
(ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated?
operation.
Checking the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL for shape and operation Reseat the
Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape ACTUATOR REGI
16 and operation. Go to step 17. ROLL. If broken or
Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL deformed, replace it
normal? with a new one.
Replace the PWBA
(ACTUATOR REGI IN) is operated?
REP8.11)
operation.
2-54
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
ASSY MAIN (Main Motor).
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J21
18 Go to step 19.
and/or P/J211
correctly.

19 Go to step 20.
Checking the connectors of the SOLENOID FEED (Cassette Feed
Solenoid) for connection
SOLENOID FEED.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
21 Go to step 22.
and/or P/J231
correctly.

22 Go to step 23.
Disconnect P231 from the SOLENOID FEED. ASSY L SIDE.
Checking the power to the SOLENOID FEED
Checking the SOLENOID FEED for resistance Replace the PWBA Replace the KIT
24 Disconnect P/J231 of the SOLENOID FEED. MCU. (Refer to SOLENOID FEED.
Is the resistance across J231-1 and J231-2 about 96 ohm? REP8.11) (Refer to REP3.7)
2-55
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
for connection
PHOTO.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
25 Go to step 26.
and/or P/J232
correctly.

26 Go to step 27.
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Replace the
SENSOR
PHOTO.(Refer to
operation. REP8.11)
REP3.12)
Does the voltage change, when the actuator (ACTUATOR REGI
IN) is operated?
2-56
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
ASSY DRV.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J26
29 Go to step 30.
and/or P/J262
correctly.

Replace the HARN
REGCL.
Replace the PWBA
32 MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
ohm? REP3.1)
2-57
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.22 MPC Error 016-738,016-739,016-740
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.11)
Install the MULTI
Checking the MPC PROTOCOL
1 Go to step 2.
Is the MPC installed on the PWBA ESS? CARD. (Refer to
REP8.4)
Checking the download MULTI PROTOCOL CARD firmware Redownload the
2 Go to step 3.
Is the download firmware the 6130N? correct firmware.
Checking the MPC installation
3 Reseat the MPC. Go to step 4. End of work
Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware?
Checking the PWBA ESS installation
4 Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) Go to step 5. End of work
Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware?
Checking after replacing the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD Replace the PWBA
5 Replace the MPC. ESS. (Refer to End of work
Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware? REP8.3)
2-58
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.23 MPC Error 018-310,018-311,018-312,018-313,018-314,018-

315,018-316,018-317,116-333
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (OPTION) (PL8.1.11)
Reseat the MULTI
PROTOCOL
Checking the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD for installation
1 Go to step 2. CARD(Refer to
Is the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD installed correctly?
REP8.4), then go to
step 2.
2 Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON? Go to step 3. End of work
Checking after replacing the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD Replace the PWBA
3 Replace the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD. ESS. (Refer to End of work
Does the error still occur when the power is turned ON? REP8.3)
2-59
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.24 CTD Sensor Error 092-310
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the ADC Sensor Window
Open the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Is the ADC Sensor window dirty?
ADC Sensor window
Wsb01012GA
Turn off the power, and gently wipe the ADC Sensor window with
a clean dry cloth or cotton swab.
After wiping the window, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Checking the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY
Replace the
3 TRANSFER ASSY. Go to step 4.
Is there any damage on the belt surface of the TRANSFER
(Refer to REP6.3)
ASSY?
TRANSFER ASSY.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J28
step 5.
Disconnect J281 from the TRANSFER ASSY. Replace the HARN
6 Go to step 7.
Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. ASSY L SIDE.
Checking the power to the ADC Sensor Replace the ADC
Replace the PWBA
Disconnect J28 from the PWBA MCU. Sensor or
7 MCU. (Refer to
Is the voltage across P28-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA MCU, TRANSFER ASSY.
REP8.11)
about +5 VDC? (Refer to REP6.3)
2-60
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.25 DTB Life Over 094-330/Transfer Life
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Replace the PHD
Checking the life counter value of the PHD ASSY
1 ASSY. (Refer to Go to step 2.
Does the life count value show the near of the end?
REP4.4)
Checking after reseating the PHD ASSY
2 Reseat the PHD ASSY. Go to step 3. End of work
Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY
Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Replace the PWBA
3 CAUTION: Be sure to pull eight sealing tapes out from a MCU. (Refer to End of work
new PHD ASSY before installation. REP8.11)
2-61
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.26 Check Unit/CTD Sensor/PHD ASSY Life
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Turn OFF the power, and gently wipe the ADC Sensor window
with a clean dry cloth or cotton swab.
After wiping the window, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.
ADC Sensor window
Wsb01012GA

Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and ADC Sensor.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J28
step 3.
4 Go to step 5.
Disconnect J281 from the TRANSFER ASSY. ASSY L SIDE.
Clean the belt with a
Checking the surface of the belt on the TRANSFER ASSY
5 clean dry cloth, then Go to step 7.
Is the belt dirty?
go to step 6.
Checking after replacing the TRANSFER ASSY
Replace the PWBA
Replace the TRANSFER ASSY or ADC Sensor. (Refer to
7 MCU. (Refer to End of work
REP6.3)
REP8.11)
2-62
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.27 Insert PHD ASSY
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11)
Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and PHD ASSY.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J42
2 Go to step 4.
then go to step 3.
Checking the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO for continuity
Disconnect P422 from the PHD ASSY. Replace the HARN
4 Go to step 5.
Disconnect J42 from the PWBA MCU. ASSY PHD XPRO.
Is each cable of P422 <=> J42 continuous?
2-63
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.28 Low Density Yellow Cartridge
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1)
FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)
MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3)
GEAR IDLER (PL5.1.6)
GEAR IDLER AUG (PL5.1.7)
GEAR IDLER AGI (PL5.1.8)
HARN ASSY TNR MOT (PL5.1.25)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Replace the TONER
Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) in
CARTRIDGE (Y),
1 [Parameters] on the diagnosis. Go to step 3.
then go to step 2.
Does the remainder value shows the near of the end? (Refer to
(Refer to REP5.7)
Chapter 2 for details of the life counter value.)
Checking the sealing tapes for yellow toner of the PHD ASSY
staying
Pull the sealing
Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT.
3 Go to step 5. tapes out, then go to
Remove the PHD ASSY.
step 4.
Has the sealing tapes for yellow toner been pulled out?
After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY.
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and shake it from side to
side.
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock key
Checking the TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation
Does the TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function
normally?
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Yellow Toner Motor] in diagnosis.
INTERLOCK).
Checking the gears of the DISPENSER ASSY for shape and
operation
Are the shape and operation of the gears of the DISPENSER
ASSY normal?
Replace the
defective gear(s) or
7 Go to step 12.
DISPENSER ASSY.
(Refer to REP5.1)
Gear
Wsb01014GA
2-64
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (Y)
MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP).
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J18
8 Go to step 10.
then go to step 9.
Checking the HARN ASSY TNR MOT for continuity
10 Go to step 11.
Disconnect J181 from the TNR (Y) MOT. ASSY TNR MOT.
Checking the power to TNR (Y) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Replace the
Disconnect J18 from the PWBA MCU. MOTOR ASSY Replace the PWBA
11 Is the voltage across P18-3pin <= > ground on PWBA MCU, DISP or FRAME MCU. (Refer to
about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY ASSY MOT. (Refer REP8.11)
INTERLOCK) is pushed. to REP5.3 and 5.2)
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y), and check that the lock
13 Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) Go to step 14. End of work
Does the error still occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? (Refer to REP6.3)
2-65
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.29 Low Density MagentaCartridge
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
Replace the TONER
Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (M) in
CARTRIDGE (M),
then go to step 2.
(Refer to REP5.7)
Checking the sealing tapes for magenta toner of the PHD ASSY
staying
Pull the sealing
step 4.
Has the sealing tapes for magenta toner been pulled out?
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and shake it from side to
side.
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock
Checking the TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation
Does the TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function
normally?
6 Checked by [Digital Output] - [Magenta Toner Motor] in Go to step 7. Go to step 8.
diagnosis.
INTERLOCK).
2-66
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
operation
ASSY normal?
Replace the
7 Go to step 12.
DISPENSER ASSY.
(Refer to REP5.1)
Gear
Wsb01016GA

Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (M)
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J18
8 Go to step 10.
then go to step 9.
10 Go to step 11.
Disconnect J182 from the TNR (M) MOT. ASSY TNR MOT.
Checking the power to TNR (M) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Replace the
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (M), and check that the lock
2-67
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.30 Low Density Cyan Cartridge
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (C)
Replace the TONER
Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (C) in
CARTRIDGE (C),
then go to step 2.
(Refer to REP5.7)
Checking the sealing tapes for cyan toner of the PHD ASSY
staying
Pull the sealing
step 4.
Has the sealing tapes for cyan toner been pulled out?
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (C)
Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and shake it from side to
side.
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock key
Checking the TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation
Does the TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function
normally?
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Cyan Toner Motor] in diagnosis.
INTERLOCK).
operation
ASSY normal?
Replace the
7 Go to step 12.
DISPENSER ASSY.
(Refer to REP5.1)
Gear
Wsb01018GA
2-68
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (C)
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J19
8 Go to step 10.
then go to step 9.
10 Go to step 11.
Disconnect J191 from the TNR (C) MOT. ASSY TNR MOT.
Checking the power to TNR (C) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Replace the
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (C)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (C), and check that the lock
2-69
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.31 Low Density Black Cartridge
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (K)
Replace the TONER
Check the life count value of the TONER CARTRIDGE (K) in
CARTRIDGE (K),
then go to step 2.
(Refer to REP5.7)
Checking the sealing tapes for black toner of the PHD ASSY
staying
Pull the sealing
step 4.
Has the sealing tapes for black toner been pulled out?
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGE (K)
Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and shake it from side to
side.
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock key
Checking the TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) for rotation
Does the TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) function
normally?
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Black Toner Motor] in diagnosis.
INTERLOCK).
operation
ASSY normal?
Replace the
7 Go to step 12.
DISPENSER ASSY.
(Refer to REP5.1)
Gear
Wsb01020GA
2-70
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (K)
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J19
8 Go to step 10.
then go to step 9.
10 Go to step 11.
Disconnect J192 from the TNR (K) MOT. ASSY TNR MOT.
Checking the power to TNR (K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP) Replace the
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGE (K)
Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), and check that the lock
2-71
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.32 Replace PHD ASSY/PHD CRUM Error 091-916
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11)
Replace the PHD
Checking the PHD ASSY type
2 Go to step 4. ASSY for 6130N,
Is the seated PHD ASSY for 6130N?
then go to step 3.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J42
5 Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and PHD ASSY. Go to step 7.
then go to step 6.
Checking the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO for continuity
Disconnect P422 from the PHD ASSY.
Is each cable of P422 <=> J42 continuous?
Replace the HARN

7 Go to step 8.
ASSY PHD XPRO.
Checking after replacing the PHD ASSY Replace the PWBA

8 Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-72
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.33 Insert Output
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No

1 Go to step 2. Load the paper.
Did the customer load the paper to the tray?
2 Try print again. Go to step 3.
Did the customer load the paper to the tray too late?
3 Go to No paper FIP Try print again.
Did the customer load the paper to specified tray?
2-73
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.34 Load Manual Feed (Size Mismatch)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Use the paper that
1 Go to step 3.
go to step 2.
Checking the print data, paper (print media) and paper settings
Check the followings.
- Are the print data and the paper suitable?
3 - Are the paper setting and paper suitable? Go to step 4. End of work
- Are the paper setting and print data suitable?
After checking, correct the incorrect item(s).
Replace the PWBA
MCU (Refer to
Reloading a correct paper to SSI
REP8.11), if not,
4 Reload a correct paper to fill the paper setup. End of work
replace the PWBA
ESS. (Refer to
REP8.3)
2-74
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.35 Load Manual Feed (No Suitable Paper)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the paper for loading and setting
Check that the loaded paper meets the print job.
Check that the paper setting to require the print job meets the
specification.
Does the error still occur after reloading the paper and changing
the paper settings that requires the print job?
Checking after setting the guide sides of the SSI
2 Reset the guide sides. Go to step 3. End of work
Checking after reloading a paper to SSI
3 Reload a correct paper to fill the paper setup. Go to step 4. End of work
Reseat the
ACTUATOR SSI. If
Remove the CHUTE LOW (PL3.2.27) once to check the shape
4 Go to step 5. broken or deformed,
and operation.
replace the
ACTUATOR SSI.
operation
Replace the PWBA
operation.
REP8.11)
PHOTO) is operated?
PHOTO.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
step 7.
8 Go to step 9.
2-75
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Replace the PWBA
MCU. SENSOR
10 MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
operation. REP3.10)
2-76
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.36 Load Tray
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Use the paper that
1 Go to step 3.
go to step 2.
Checking the print data, paper (print media) and paper settings
Check the followings.
- Are the print data and the paper suitable?
3 - Are the paper setting and paper suitable? Go to step 4. End of work
- Are the paper setting and print data suitable?
After checking, correct the incorrect item(s).
Checking after reloading a paper and the CASSETTE ASSY 250
Reload a correct paper into the CASSETTE ASSY 250.
Reseat the CASSETTE ASSY 250 correctly.
Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA
5 Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) ESS. (Refer to End of work
2-77
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.37 Load Tray/Tray Empty
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
ACTUATOR NO PAPER (PL3.2.19)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the paper for loading and setting
Check that the loaded paper meets the print job.
Check that the paper setting to require the print job meets the
specification.
Does the error still occur after reloading the paper and changing
the paper settings that requires the print job?
Reseat the
Checking the ACTUATOR NO PAPER for shape and operation ACTUATOR NO
Pull the CASSETTE ASSY 250 out. PAPER. If broken or
2 Go to step 3.
Are the shape and operation of the ACTUATOR NO PAPER deformed, replace
normal? the ACTUATOR
NO PAPER.
Checking the CST No Paper Sensor (SENSOR PHOTO) for
operation
Pull the CASSETTE ASSY 250 out. Replace the PWBA
3 Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the actuator MCU. (Refer to Go to step 4.
(ACTUATOR NO PAPER) of the CST No Paper Sensor REP8.11)
(SENSOR PHOTO) is operated?
Checked by [Digital Input] - [CST NO PAPER] in diagnosis.
Checking the connectors of the SENSOR PHOTO (CST No Paper
PHOTO.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J23
4 Go to step 5.
and/or P/J234
correctly.

5 Go to step 6.
2-78
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Replace the
Check the voltage across J23-11pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA
SENSOR
7 MCU. MCU. (Refer to
PHOTO.(Refer to
Does the voltage change, when the ACTUATOR NO PAPER is REP8.11)
REP3.11).
operated?
2-79
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.38 Insert Fuser 010-317
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
cooled down.
cooled down.
ASSY.
Are P/J17 and P/J171 connected correctly? Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J17
step 3.
Replace the HARN
4 cooled down. Go to step 5.
ASSY FUSER.
2-80
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the resistances of Temp. Sensor in the FUSER ASSY
cooled down.
Check the resistances across the following pins of the removed
FUSER ASSY.
J171-5pin <=> J171-4pin
J171-6pin <=> J171-8pin
J171-6pin <=> J171-7pin Replace the FUSER
Can the resistances be measured? (The resistances are 7 k-ohm at ASSY. (Refer to
Replace the PWBA
180 degrees C). REP6.1)
5 MCU. (Refer to
After replacement,
REP8.11)
be sure to clear the
life counter value.
2-81
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.39 Replace Fuser 010-351/Fuser Life
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Replace the FUSER
ASSY. (Refer to
Checking the life counter value of the FUSER ASSY REP6.1)
1 Go to step 2.
Does the life counter value show the near of the end? After replacement ,
be sure to clear the
life counter value.
cooled down.
Checking after replacing the FUSER ASSY
Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1)
Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has Replace the PWBA
3 cooled down. MCU. (Refer to End of work
NOTE: After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter
value.
2-82
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.40 Fuser Error 010-397
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3)
cooled down.
cooled down.
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU (P/J17) and
FUSER ASSY (P/J171).
Check the connections between the FUSER ASSY (P/J171) and
PWBA LVPS (P/J47). "Reconnect the
Check the connections between the PWBA LVPS (P/J501 and P/ connector(s) P/J17,
J502) and PWBA MCU (P/J14 and P/J15). P/J47, P/J171, P/
3 Are these connectors connected correctly? Go to step 5. J501, P/J502, P/J14
and/or P/J15
correctly,
then go to step 4."
Replace the HARN
5 Disconnect J47 from the PWBA LVPS. Go to step 6.
ASSY FUSER.
Is each cable of J17 and J47 <=> P171 continuous?
Checking the HARN ASSY LVPS for continuity
6 Go to step 7.
Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. ASSY LVPS.
2-83
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
7 cooled down. Go to step 8. End of work
NOTE: After replacement, be sure to clear the life counter
value.
Checking after replacing the PWBA LVPS Replace the PWBA
8 Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-84
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.41 Fan Motor Error 042-313
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)
PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the FAN MAIN for rotation
Replace the PWBA
Does the FAN MAIN function normally?
Checked by [Digital Ouput] - [Fan (HIGH)] in diagnosis.
REP8.11)
During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Check the connection between the FAN MAIN and PWBA LVPS.
Is P/J503 on PWBA LVPS connected correctly?
Reconnect the
connector P/J503
3 Go to step 5.
step 4.
Check the connections between the PWBA LVPS and PWBA
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J501
5 Go to step 7.
and P/J14 correctly,
then go to step 6.
Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. Replace the HARN
7 Go to step 8.
Disconnect J14 from the PWBA MCU. ASSY LVPS.
2-85
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the power to the FAN MAIN
Disconnect J503 from the PWBA LVPS.
Is the voltage across P503-1pin <=> ground on the PWBA LVPS,
about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN ASSY
Replace the FAN

8 MAIN. (Refer to Go to step 9.
REP8.1)
Checking after replacing the PWBA LVPS Replace the PWBA

9 Replace the PWBA LVPS. (Refer to REP8.6) MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-86
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.42 Motor Error 042-325
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
1 Does the error occur when the power is turned OFF and ON? Go to step 2. End of work
Checking the Main Motor for rotation
Replace the PWBA
Does the Main Motor function normally?
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.
REP8.11)
Checking the connectors of the MAIN MOTOR for connection
ASSY MAIN.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J21
step 5.
6 Go to step 7.
Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY MAIN
7 Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. Go to step 8. End of work
2-87
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.43 Motor Error 042-326
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HARN ASSY SUB MOT (PL9.1.8)
Checking after reseating the FUSER ASSY and PHD ASSY
Reseat the FUSER ASSY and PHD ASSY.
cooled down.
Checking the Sub Motor for rotation
Replace the PWBA
Does the Sub Motor function normally?
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis.
REP8.11)
Checking the connectors of the SUB MOTOR for connection
ASSY SUB.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J22
step 5.
Checking the HARN ASSY SUB MOT for continuity
6 Go to step 7.
Disconnect J221 from the DRIVE ASSY SUB. ASSY SUB MOT.
Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY SUB
7 Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. Go to step 8. End of work.
Checking the power to the DRIVE ASSY SUB
8 Are the voltages across J22-2pin/J22-4pin <=> ground on the ASSY SUB. (Refer MCU. (Refer to
PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock switch (HARN to REP7.1) REP8.11)
2-88
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.44 Check Unit
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the sealing tapes of the PHD ASSY staying
Turn off the power, and open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Pull the sealing
1 Remove the PHD ASSY. Go to step 3. tapes out, then go to
Has the sealing tapes (total eight sealing tapes) been pulled out? step 2.
After checking, reseat the PHD ASSY correctly.
2-89
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.45 Front Cover Open
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7)
PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1)
HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Replace the
Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT (Front Cover) for shape COVER ASSY
1 Go to step 2.
Are there any damages on the COVER ASSY FRONT? FRONT. (Refer to
REP1.7)
Reseat or replace
the COVER ASSY
2 Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. Go to step 3.
FRONT. (Refer to
Is the COVER ASSY FRONT latched correctly?
REP1.7)
Checking the interlock switch for operation
Replace the PWBA
Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the COVER
ASSY FRONT is closed and opened?
REP8.11)
Checked by [Digital Input] - [IL OPEN] in diagnosis.
Check the connections between PWBA MCU and PWBA LVPS.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J14
step 5.
6 Go to step 7.
Disconnect J501 from the PWBA LVPS. ASSY LVPS.
2-90
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the power to the Interlock Switch
Disconnect the connector of J44 on the PWBA LVPS.
Is the voltage across P44-1 <=> ground on the PWBA LVPS,
about +24 VDC?
Replace the PWBA

7 Go to step 8. LVPS. (Refer to
REP8.6)
Checking the Interlock Switch for operation

Replace the HARN
Check the voltage across P44-3pin <=> ground on the PWBA Replace the PWBA
ASSY
8 LVPS. LVPS. (Refer to
INTERLOCK.
Does the voltage change, when the Interlock Switch is turned ON/ REP8.6)
(Refer to REP8.7)
OFF?
2-91
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.46 Side Door Open
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5)
SWITCH (PL5.1.9)
HARN ASSY SIDE SW (PL5.1.27)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Replace the
Checking the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (Side Cover) for
COVER ASSY
1 shape Go to step 2.
WINDOW TNR.
Are there any damages on the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR?
(Refer to REP1.5)
Reseat or replace
Checking the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR for latching
the COVER ASSY
2 Open and close the COVER ASSY WINDOW TRN. Go to step 3.
WINDOW TNR.
Is the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR latched correctly?
(Refer to REP1.5)
Checking the Side R Switch (SWITCH) for operation
Replace the PWBA
Does the number on the screen increase by one, when the COVER
ASSY WINDOW TRN is closed and opened?
REP8.11)
Checked by [Digital Input] - [Side Switch] in diagnosis.
Checking the HARN ASSY SIDE SW for continuity
Disconnect J291 from the SIDE R SWITCH.
Replace the HARN

4 Go to step 5.
ASSY SIDE SW.
Checking after replacing the Side R Switch (SWITCH) Replace the PWBA
5 Replace the Side R Switch (SWITCH). (Refer to REP5.4) MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-92
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.47 MCU Firmware Err 024-340
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Does the error still occur after several ON/OFF procedures of the
1 Go to step 2. End of work *1
power?
Upgrade the
Checking the firmware version
2 Go to step 3. firmware, then go to
Is the firmware the latest version?
step 3.
Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU
3 Reseat the PWBA MCU. Go to step 4. End of work *1
Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU
Go to Electrical
4 Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) End of work
Noise.
Checking the external noise
Are there any other electrical appliances within 3 meters form the
printer, such as generators, radio and appliances with motors?
Either turn off the other electrical appliances, or relocate the
printer at least 6 meters away from other appliances.
Does the electrical noise error still occur?
Request the client to
Checking the AC ground
6 Go to step 7. fix AC power
Is AC power supply outlet wired and grounded appropriately?
supply outlet.
Checking the TRANSFER ASSY for connection
Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Clean or replace the
7 Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four TRANSFER ASSY Go to step 8.
springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or or SPRING(s).
deformed?
Checking the PHD ASSY for connection
Clean and/or replace
8 the PHD ASSY or Go to step 9.
Are five HV terminals on the PHD ASSY, and five springs on the
SPRING(s).
frame (PL4.1.10 and PL4.1.15 to 18) dirty and/or deformed?
Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the PWBA
10 Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. HVPS. (Refer to End of work
Does the electrical noise error still occur? REP4.3)
2-93
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.48 MCU NVRAM Error 041-340
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
TONER CARTRIDGE (PL5.1.21/5.1.22/5.1.23/5.1.24)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the error
Replace the PWBA
Checking the failure parts
Is the "ADDR: 1***" displayed?
REP8.11)
Replace the
3 TRANSFER ASSY. Go to step 4.
Is the "ADDR: 30**" displayed?
(Refer to REP6.3)
Checking the failure parts Replace the Yellow
4 Go to step 5.
Is the "ADDR: 31**" displayed? Toner Cartridge.
Replace the
5 Magenta Toner Go to step 6.
Is the "ADDR: 32**" displayed?
Cartridge.
Checking the failure parts Replace the Cyan Replace the Black
6
Is the "ADDR: 33**" displayed? Toner Cartridge. Toner Cartridge.
2-94
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.49 Laser Error 061-370
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)
HARN ASSY ROS RE (PL4.1.22)
HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO (PL4.1.23)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
2 Reseat the PWBA MCU. Go to step 3. End of work
Checking after reseating the ROS ASSY
3 Reseat the ROS ASSY. Go to step 4. End of work
Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA MCU.
Are P/J40, P/J41, P/J411 and P/J412 connected correctly?
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
4 Go to step 6. P/J41, P/J411 and/or
P/J412 correctly,
then go to step 5.
Checking the HARN ASSY ROS RE for continuity
Disconnect P/J40 from the PWBA MCU. Replace the HARN
6 Go to step 7.
Disconnect P/J411 from the ROS ASSY. ASSY ROS RE.
Checking the HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO for continuity
Replace the HARN
7 Go to step 8. ASSY ROS
Disconnect J412 from the ROS ASSY.
VIDEO.
Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the PWBA
8 Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-95
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.50 MCU Comm. Error 024-371
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HARN ASSY ESS (PL9.1.1)
Checking after reseating the PWBA ESS and PWBA MCU
2 Reseat the PWBA ESS and PWBA MCU. Go to step 3. End of work
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and PWBA
ESS.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J10
step 4.
Checking the HARN ASSY ESS for continuity
5 Go to step 6.
Disconnect J101 from the PWBA ESS. ASSY ESS.
Checking after replacing the PWBA ESS Replace the PWBA
6 Replace the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) MCU. (Refer to End of work
2-96
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.51 Invalid User 016-757
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Please request the
registration to your
Checking your account registration
1 Go to step 3. system
Is your account registered in your network?
administrator, then
go to step 2.
Please consult your Connect your PC
Checking connection
3 system with printer surely,
Is your PC surely connected with the printer via network?
administrator. then go to step 4.
Please consult your
4 Does the error still occur when printing? system End of work
administrator.
2-97
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.52 Disabled Func 016-758
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
Turn ON the power
Checking the power of the printer
1 Go to step 3. of the printer, and go
Is the power of the printer turned ON?
to step 2.
Please inquire to
your system
Checking your operation
3 Go to step 4. administrator, or
Is the operation that you did an available function for 6130N?
check this operation
by the User Guide.
Connect your PC
Checking connection
4 Go to step 6. with printer surely,
Is your PC surely connected with the printer?
then go to step 5.
2-98
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.53 Limit Exceeded 016-759
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
Check the [Print Auditron] setting
Reset to 5 or less
1 Does the value of [User Registration] exceed the limitation? Go to step 3.
and go to step 2.
Maximum user is five.
Checking the PWBA ESS installation Replace the PWBA
3 Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) ESS. (Refer to End of work.
2-99
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.54 Invalid Job 016-799
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
Use the paper that
1 Go to step 3.
Does the paper size in use meet the specifications? specifications, then
go to step 2.
Checking the paper size setup
Does the using paper size match the printer setup value?
Replace the PWBA
Setup the paper size through your PC.
4 ESS. (Refer to End of work
REP8.3)
Replace the PWBA Check that the
Checking the printing job
5 ESS. (Refer to printing data is
Does the error still occur when printing the Windows test print?
REP8.3) correct.
2-100
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.55 Download Mode 024-360
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
Checking the download firmware Redownload the
1 Go to step 2.
Is the download firmware the 6130N? correct firmware.
Checking the PWBA ESS installation Replace the PWBA
2 Reseat the PWBA ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) ESS. (Refer to End of work
Does the error still occur when downloading the firmware? REP8.3)
2-101
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.56 K Mode Sol Error 042-372
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Checking the K Mode Solenoid (Color Mode Switching Solenoid)
for operation
Does the K Mode Solenoid function normally?
3 Checked by [Digital Output] - [K Mode Solenoid] in diagnosis. Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
Does the K Mode Solenoid click sound arise from the DRIVE
ASSY PH, when the K Mode Solenoid check is performed?
Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY PH
4 Reseat the DRIVE ASSY PH. Go to step 9. End of work
Checking the connector of the K Mode Solenoid in the DRIVE
ASSY PH for connection
Check the connection between the PWBA MCU and K Mode
Solenoid.
Is P/J24 connected correctly?
Reconnect the
connector P/J24
5 Go to step 7.
step 6.
Checking the power to the K Mode Solenoid
Checking the K Mode Solenoid for resistance Replace the PWBA Replace the DRIVE
8 Disconnect P/J24 from the PWBA MCU. MCU. (Refer to ASSY PH. (Refer to
Is the resistance across J24-1 and J24-2 about 80 to 110-ohm? REP8.11) REP7.4)
2-102
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the connectors of the K Mode Sensor in the DRIVE
ASSY PH for connection
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and K Mode
Sensor.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J26
step 10.
Replace the HARN
Disconnect J261 from the K Mode Sensor.
REGCL.
Checking the power to the K Mode Sensor
Replace the PWBA
REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
Checking the K Mode Sensor for operation
Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH from the printer once, but P/J261
and P/J24 should be connected. Replace the PWBA Replace the DRIVE
13 Enter the [Digital Input] - [K Mode Sensor] in diagnosis. MCU. (Refer to ASSY PH. (Refer to
During this check, close the COVER ASSY FRONT. REP8.11) REP7.4)
Does the voltage change, when a piece of paper is inserted into the
gap of the K Mode Sensor?
2-103
2.3 ERROR CODE FIP
FIP-1.57 Env Sensor Error 092-661
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7)
PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
HARN ASSY HUM (PL9.1.6)
Checking after reseating the SENSOR HUM
2 Reseat the SENSOR HUM. Go to step 3. End of work
Checking the HARN ASSY HUM for continuity
Disconnect J201 from the SENSOR HUM.
Replace the HARN

3 Go to step 4.
ASSY HUM.
Checking the power to SENSOR HUM

Replace the Replace the PWBA
Disconnect the connector of J20 from the PWBA MCU.
4 SENSOR HUM. MCU. (Refer to
(Refer to REP8.8) REP8.11)
about +5 VDC?
2-104
2.4 Abnormal Noise Trouble

2.4.1 Entry Chart for Abnormal Noise Troubleshooting
Check the Operation Mode Table of Power ON.

Does abnornal noise arise during
Check the components are normal without any
adjustment after Power ON?
Y stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N1)
Check the Operation Mode Table of Standby.

Does abnormal noise arise during
Standby?
Y stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N2)
N
Check the Operation Mode Table of Printing.

Does abnormal noise arise during
printing? Y stains and/or damages. (Refer to FIP-1.N3)
2-105
2.4.2 Operation Mode Table
FIP-1.N1 When Power is Turned On
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
Checking the Main Motor
1 Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 2. Go to step 5.
Reseat the PHD ASSY.
Does the noise arise from the printer?
Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY
Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY.
Try replacing the
PHD ASSY (Refer
to REP4.4),
Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY MAIN
TRANSFER ASSY
Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
4 (Refer to REP6.3) End of work
and DRIVE ASSY
MAIN (Refer to
REP7.2) one after
another.
Checking the Sub Motor Check the
5 Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 6. installation situation
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. of printer.
cooled down.
2-106
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Try replacing the
PHD ASSY (Refer
Checking after reseating the DRIVE ASSY SUB to REP4.4), FUSER
Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. ASSY (Refer to
8 End of work
Does the noise arise from the printer? REP6.1) and
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. DRIVE ASSY SUB
(Refer to REP7.1)
one after another.
2-107
FIP-1.N2 During Standby
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)
PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1)
Checking the FAN MAIN Replace the FAN Replace the PWBA
1 Does the noise arise from the Fan? MAIN. (Refer to LVPS. (Refer to
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Fan (High)] in diagnosis. REP8.1) REP8.6)
2-108
FIP-1.N3 During Printing
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)
Checking the paper feeding
1 Does the noise arise from the printer when the paper is fed from Go to step 2. Go to step 6.
the Tray 1?
Replace the paper
Checking the paper condition in the Paper Cassette with a new dry and
2 Go to step 4.
Is the paper dry and recommended paper? recommended one,
then go to step 3.
Checking noise when the paper is fed from the Tray 1
Checking the HOLDER ASSY RETARD in the Paper Cassette for
Replace the
rotation
HOLDER ASSY
4 Remove the Paper Cassette from the printer. Go to step 5.
RETARD. (Refer to
Does the SEPARATOR ROLLER rotate smoothly?
REP2.3)
Turning it with your finger.
Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED for rotation
Remove the Paper Cassette from the printer.
Replace the ROLL
and then enter the [Cassette Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)].
5 ASSY FEED. Go to step 9.
Does the noise arise from this Roller?
(Refer to REP3.8)
NOTE: After checking is completed, turn off [Cassette Feed
SOLENOID (Auto OFF)] check first, and then turn off [Main
Motor FULL2] check.
Reset the paper
Checking the paper guide sides setting and paper setting of SSI guide sides, and
6 Were the paper guide sides of SSI correctly set, and was the paper Go to step 7. correctly insert the
correctly inserted into SSI? paper to SSI, then
go to step 7.
Replace the paper
Checking the paper condition with a new dry and
7 Go to step 9.
then go to step 8.
Checking noise when the paper is fed from the SSI
8 Go to step 9 End of work
Checking the Main Motor
9 Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 10. Go to step 16.
2-109
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the foreign substances on the surfaces of the ROLL Remove the foreign
12 ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL substances, then go Go to step 14.
Are there any foreign substances on the surfaces of these parts? to step 13.
Checking noise when printing
Replace the ROLL
rotation
ASSY REGI and/or
14 Enter the [Digital Output] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, Go to step 15.
ROLL REGI
METAL.
Does the noise arise from the Roller(s)?
Try replacing the
PHD ASSY (Refer
to REP4.4),
Checking the DRIVE ASSY MAIN for installation
TRANSFER ASSY
Reseat the DRIVE ASSY MAIN.
15 (Refer to REP6.3) End of work
and DRIVE ASSY
MAIN (Refer to
REP7.2) one after
another.
Checking the Sub Motor Check the
16 Does the noise arise from the printer? Go to step 17. installation situation
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. of the printer.
Checking the PHD ASSY for installation
Checking the FUSER ASSY for installation
Try replacing the
PHD ASSY (Refer
Checking the DRIVE ASSY SUB for installation to REP4.4), FUSER
Reseat the DRIVE ASSY SUB. ASSY (Refer to
19 End of work
Does the noise arise from the printer? REP6.1) and
Checked by [Digital Output] - [Sub Motor FULL2] in diagnosis. DRIVE ASSY SUB
(Refer to REP7.1)
one after another.
2-110
2.5 Other FIP
2.5 Other FIP

Other FIP covers the Electrical Noise FIP, Power Supply FIP and Multiple Feed FIP, except Error Code FIP, Abnormal
Noise FIP and Image Quality FIP.
FIP-Electrical Noise
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the external noise
Are there any other electrical appliances within 3 meters form the
printer, such as generators, radio and appliances with motors?
Either turn off the other electrical appliances, or relocate the
printer at least 6 meters away from other appliances.
Request the client to
Checking the AC ground
2 Go to step 3. fix AC power
Is AC power supply outlet wired and grounded appropriately?
supply outlet.
Open the COVER ASSY FRONT. Clean or replace the
3 Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four TRANSFER ASSY Go to step 4.
springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or or SPRING(s).
deformed?
SPRING(s).
Checking after reseating the TRANSFER ASSY Reseat the PWBA
6 Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. HVPS. (Refer to End of work
Does the electrical noise error still occur? REP4.3)
2-111
2.5 Other FIP
FIP-AC
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the printer
1 Does the motor noise arise when turning on the power? Go to FIP-DC. Go to step 2.
During this test, close the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Checking the power supply on wall outlet
2 Connect the power cord with other wall outlet. End of work Go to step 3.
Does the printer operate normally?
Checking the power code for connection
3 Reconnect the power cord. End of work Go to step 4.
Checking the BREAKER GFI for operation
4 End of work Go to step 5.
Does the BREAKER GFI operate normally?
Checking the connector of PWBA LVPS for connection
Disconnect the power cord and wait for one minute.
Reconnect the all connectors of PWBA LVPS.
Checking the connector of MAIN SWITCH for connection
Replace the PWBA
6 End of work LVPS. (Refer to
Reconnect the connector of MAIN SWITCH.
REP8.6)
2-112
2.5 Other FIP
FIP-DC
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the connector of the PWBA LVPS for connection
Reconnect the all connectors of the PWBA LVPS.
Checking the connector of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL for
connection
2 Reconnect the connector (P/J220) of the CONSOLE ASSY End of work Go to step 3.
PANEL.
Does the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL operate normally?
Checking after reseating the PWBA MCU Replace the PWBA
3 Reseat the PWBA MCU. End of work LVPS. (Refer to
Does the printer operate normally? REP8.6)
2-113
2.5 Other FIP
FIP-Multiple Feed
Note
This multiple feed trouble occurs only when the paper is fed from the Paper Cassette.
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Possible causative parts
Use the paper that
Checking the using paper meets the
1 Go to step 3.
Does the using paper meet the specifications? specifications, then
go to step 2.
2 Does the multi feed still occur when printing? Go to step 3. End of work
Replace the paper
Checking paper condition with a new dry and
3 Go to step 5.
then go to step 4.
4 Does the multi feed still occur when printing? Go to step 5. End of work
Replace the ROLL
Checking the ROLL ASSY FEED and HOLDER ASSY ASSY FEED (Refer
RETARD for rotation to REP3.8) and/or
5 End of work
Does the ROLL ASSY FEED and HOLDER ASSY RETARD HOLDER ASSY
rotate smoothly and operate correctly? RETARD. (Refer to
REP2.3)
2-114
2.6 How to use Diag. CE mode

2.6.1 Roles of the control panel in Diag.
No. Name Description
1 LCD display Displays the status of the printer, menu options, and messages.
2 <Menu> button Pressed to display the menu screen.
Pressed to confirm the menu option selected on the menu screen. This
3 <Eject/Set> button
button is used also when printing reports/lists.
Pressed to exit the Power Saver mode (Sleep mode). This button/lamp
4 <Power Saver> button/lamp
lights when the printer is the Power Saver mode (Sleep mode).
5 <Cancel Job> button Pressed to stop printing.
Pressed to advance to the next menu, item, or option.

The < > button is used also when using the Secure/Sample Print feature.
< >, < >, < >, < > Holding down the < > or < > button scrolls through menus, items, and
6
button options in a circular fashion. Pressing the < > and < > buttons
simultaneously displays the default values.
To use the Secure/Sample Print feature, additional memory of 256 MB or
above (optional) must be installed.
7 <Error> lamp Blinks or lights when an error occurs.
8 <Ready> lamp Lights when the printer is ready to print.
2.6.2 Entering diag. CE mode
1 Turn off the power.
2 Turn on the power while holding down <S> and <T> keys.
3 Input a password. ( <T> <T> <Eject/Set> )
4 The "CE Mode" and "ESS Diag" are displayed. (Entered the Diag. mode.)
2-115
2.6.3 Selecting Diag. item
The diagnosis setting items are configured as menus, which can be operated with the control panel keys. Arrow keys
select menu items and <Eject/Set> key activates functions.
2.6.4 Change method parameters value
For parameter setting, pressing <Eject/Set> key after selecting an item from the menu displays the current setting value
of the item. Then a numeric value selected by <T> and <S> keys are written into the NVM by <Eject/Set> key.
2.6.5 Executing/Exiting Diag. mode
The diagnosis can be executed by as follows.

1 A test item is displayed. <Eject/Set> key fixed the test item.
2 The display prompts the user to start the test. Press <Eject/Set> key and start the test.
The diagnosis can be stopped by as follows.

1 During the diagnosis test, press <Cancel Job> key.
2 The diagnosis is stopped, and the display indicates the one step higher menu.
Note
If an error occurs during the diag. sequence, the diagnosis displays the error and stops, leaving the
remaining items unperformed.
Pressing <Cancel Job> or <Eject/Set> key releases the error display, and then the menu items are
displayed.
2-116
2.6.6 Diag. mode menu tree
Menu Tree of the CE Mode is as follows.
CE Mode
ESS Diag All Test
CodeROM Test
FrontROM Test
EEPROM Test
DRAM Test
MAC+PHY Test
ASIC Test
Panel Test
IOT Test
IOT Diag Digital Input
Digital Output
NVM Settings Edit NVM
Save NVM to ESS
Load NVM from ESS
Initialize Slave
Print NVM Info
Print Info Config Page
Print Settings
2-117
Installation Serial No.
Tone Correction
Display Counter
HexDump
Pixel Counter
Configuration Dip Switch 0
Dip Switch 1
Dip Switch 2
Dip Switch 3
Counter Type Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Print Counter Dip

Color
Switch
Print0
Dip
B/WSwitch
Print 1
Dip
Total
Switch
Print2
Color
Dip Switch
Backup
3
Dip
B/WSwitch
Backup3
Total
Dip Switch
Backup
3
Dip
Color
Switch
Error3
Dip
B/WSwitch
Error3
CopyCounter MtoB
CopyCounter BtoM
Clear All NVM
Clear JobHistory
Clear AuditronPV
2-118
Test Print No Image IOT
Pattern IOT
Grid 2
Cyan20%
Magenta20%
Yellow20%
Black20%
CMY20%
Gradation
Toner Palette
Stain Check
Parameter Slow Scan KtoPaper
Slow Scan 600M
Slow Scan 600Y
Slow Scan 600C
Fast Scan KtoM
Fast Scan KtoY
Fast Scan KtoC
Fast Scan M-Feed
Fast Scan Tray 1
Fast Scan 2 KtoM
Fast Scan 2 KtoY
Fast Scan 2 KtoC
2-119
Life Y Toner
Life M Toner
Life C Toner
Life K Toner
Life Fuser Sheet
Life Print Sheet
Life DTB Waste Read
Initialize
Life YwasteToner
Life MwasteToner
Life CwasteToner
Life KwasteToner
Life Drum Y Time
Life Drum M Time
Life Drum C Time
Life Drum K Time
Life Drum Xero
Life Drum Deve K
Life Manual Feed
Life Tray1 Sheet
Print
Exit Mode Complete Exit
2-120
2.6.7 Contents of a Test
2.6.7.1 CE Mode Diag.

This section describes how to perform each test of the CE Mode Diag. in detail.
2.6.7.2 Executing CE Mode diagnosis

5 Press <S> or <T> key to select the test item.
6 Press <Eject/Set> key twice to execute the test.
Note
To exit the test or to returning to one step higher menu, press <Cancel Job> key.
2.6.7.3 ESS Diag

Executes the ESS Diag except the following.
Note
Do not turn off the Main Switch when the ESS Diag Test is executing.
All Test
This test executes the all tests of the ESS diagnostic except the MAC+PHY test and Panel Test.
Normal Error
CHECK OK *** ERROR
***: Displays the test name that became error.

(CodeROM/FontROM/EEPROM/DRAM/ASIC/IOT)
2-121
CodeROM Test
Calculates the ROM checksum and compares it with the value stored in the ROM.
Executes this test when the 116-317 error occurred.
Test result: NG (Go to FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)
This test calculates the checksum of the each ROM, and compares it with the valid checksum value stored in the
corresponding chip beforehand. When the checksum is identical to the stored value, this test judges the chip is normal.
Normal Error
CodeROM #* ERROR
CHECK OK S=xxxx V=yyyy
(xxxx:calculated value yyyy:ROM stored value *:0,1)
FontROM Test
Calculates the Font ROM checksum and compares it with the value stored in the FontROM.
This test calculates the checksum of the each FontROM, and compares it with the valid checksum value stored in the
corresponding chip beforehand. When the checksum is identical to the stored value, this test judges the chip is normal.
Normal Error
FontROM ERROR
CHECK OK S=xxxx V=yyyy
(xxxx:calculated value yyyy:ROM stored value)
EEPROM Test
Performs write/read/verify on the diag. area of the EEPROM.

Executes this test when the 116-323, 116-326 and 116-390 errors occurred.
Test result: NG (Go to each FIP.) OK (Turn off/on the main power.)
The test performs read/write/verify of the test patterns (0xff,0xaa, 0x55 and 0x00) on one byte at every 0x400 from the
first address of EEPROM.
Normal Error
CHECK OK EEPROM ID* ERROR (*:1,2)
2-122
DRAM Test
Tests OPEN/SHORT with the address line of the DRAM.

Performs write/read/verify on the entire DRAM.
Executes this test when the 016-718, 116-315, 116-316 and 116-320 errors occurred.
When the optional DRAM SIMM is checked and found, it checks the optional memory area.
First, the test performs read/write/verify of the increment data for the whole tested area by the word. Then, it performs
read/write/verify of the test patterns (0xffffffff, 0xaaaaaaaa, 0x55555555, 0x00000000) for the whole tested area by the
word.
Normal Error
CHECK OK DRAM slot* ERROR (*：0,1)
MAC+PHY Test
MAC: Media Access Control

PHY: Physical Layer
MAC+PHY Test 1
PHY Internal loopback test
MAC+PHY Test 1
External PHY external loopback test
Executes this test when the 018-319, 018-320, 116-314, 116-351,116-352 and 116-355 errors occurred.
Normal Error
CHECK OK MAC+PHY ERROR
ASIC Test
ASIC register check.

Normal Error
CHECK OK ASIC ERROR
2-123
Panel Test
Tests the LED, LCD and buttons of the control panel.

This test checks input and output of the control panel. When buttons are pressed in the manner shown in the following
table, the test displays the corresponding contents of the LED and LCD.
Button LED LCD

S Displays "UP" on the LCD.
T Displays "DOWN" on the LCD.
W Displays "LEFT" on the LCD.
X Displays "RIGHT" on the LCD.
Eject/Set Displays "SET" on the LCD.
Menu Displays "MENU" on the LCD.
Cancel Job Displays "CANCEL JOB" on the LCD.
Power Saver Displays "POWER SAVER" on the LCD
S T pressed at the same time - (The test is completed) - (The test is completed)
: Indicate the left square is Ready LED, the center square is Alarm LED and the right square is Power Saver LED.
Not lighting Lighting
IOT Test
Communication test with the IOT

This test checks communication with the IOT. Then it reads the status register of the IOT to check whether commands
can be exchanged with the IOT.
It sends the following command to read the status register, and checks whther the appropriate response returns.
Read ROM Revision No
Normal Error
CHECK OK IOT ERROR
2-124
2.6.7.4 IOT Diag

Digital Input
This function checks whether the sensors and the switches operate normally or not.
The Digital Input is performed for all the sensors and the switches.
Exit operation of the Digital Input makes the control panel display the IOT diag. function menu.
At the start of the Digital Input, number " 0 " is displayed on the control panel. This number is counted up when a sensor
or switch is turned on from off, therefore it allows the user to know the component is active.
When a paper jam is occurred, or an error message or code is displayed, execute this test to locate the damaged parts.
The test will execute the Digital Input codes of the components that are supposed to be faulty from the error details.
(Refer to each FIP on Chapter 2.)
Test result: NG (Go to each FIP or replace the parts.)
OK (Turn off/on the main power.)
z Executing Digital Input
5 Press the <T> key to select the "IOT Diag", and then press <Eject/Set> key.
6 Select "Digital Input", and then press <Eject/Set> key.
9 Press the <Cancel Job> key and then <Menu> key to exit your selecting test.
Parameters for the Digital Input are as follows.
Diag. Code Components

DI-00 Manual Feeder Sensor
DI-01 CST NO PAPER
DI-02 Regi Sensor
DI-03 Exit Sensor
DI-04 K Mode Sensor
DI-06 Side Switch (SIDE SW)
DI-07 Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN)
2-125
Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN) Exit Sensor
Side Switch (SIDE SW)
K Mode Sensor
CST NO PAPER
Regi Sensor
Manual Fedder Sensor

Wsb02605AA
2-126
z Checking the Sensor and Switch
Sensor and Switch name

Confirmation procedures
(Diag. Code)
1 Turn on the power and enter the Diagnostic Mode.
2 Execute the Manual Feeder Sensor.
3 Check the sensor.
Console Panel
Manual Feeder Sensor Digital Input

DI-00 OFF
(DI-00)
ON
Digital Input
DI-00 L - 00
Wsb02606AA
4 Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the test.

2 Execute the CST NO PAPER.
3 Check the sensor.
Console Panel
Digital Input
DI-01 OFF
ON
CST NO PAPER
(DI-01) Digital Input
DI-01 L - 00
Wsb02607AA
NOTE:
At this test, check to be sure that the paper tray is loaded with paper.
2-127

(Diag. Code)
2 Execute the Regi Sensor.
3 Check the sensor.
Console Panel Actuator
Digital Input
DI-02 OFF
Regi Sensor ON
(DI-02)
Digital Input
DI-02 L - 00
Wsb02608AA

2 Execute the Exit Sensor.
3 Check the sensor.
Console Panel
ON
Digital Input Digital Input
DI-03 OFF DI-03 L - 00
Exit Sensor
(DI-03)
Wsb02609AA
Caution:
Take care not to be burn yourself from the heat of the heater placed
inside the FUSER.
2-128

(Diag. Code)
NOTE:
Remove the PH Drive. Press the lever mounted on the Solenoid to
retract the actuator from the sensor.

2 Execute the K Mode Sensor.
3 Check the Sensor.
Actuator
K Mode Sensor
(Color Mode Switching Sensor) K Mode Solenoid
(DI-04)
Console Panel
Digital Input
DI-04 OFF
ON
Paper
Digital Input
DI-04 L - 00
K Mode Sensor
Wsb02610AA

2 Execute the Side Switch.
3 Check the switch.
Console Panel
Digital Input
Side Switch (SIDE SW) DI-06 OFF
(DI-06)
ON
Digital Input
DI-06 L - 00
Wsb02611AA
2-129

(Diag. Code)
2 Execute the Cover Open Sensor.
3 Check the switch.
Console Panel
Digital Input
Cover Open Sensor (IL OPEN) DI-07 OFF
(DI-07)
ON
Digital Input
DI-07 L - 00
Wsb02612AA
2-130
Digital Output
This function checks whether the motors, clutches and solenoids operate.
When the interlock is opened while the Digital Output is performed, each component ends to operate.
Note
In this Test Mode, each motor, clutch or solenoid can be turned individually. Therefore it allows the CE to
check a component' s operation from outside, and judge whether the component is normal or not.
When all the diag. functions are stopped, all the motors, clutches or solenoids can be turned off.
Monitor test can make each of the motors, clutches or solenoids operate simultaneously.
When a paper jam or PQ problem is occurred, or an error message or code is displayed, this test enables to look for the
broken or damaged parts.
Test result: NG (Go to each FIP or replace the parts.)
OK (Turn off/on the main power.)
2-131
z Executing Digital Output
5 Press the <T> key to select the "IOT Diag", and then press <Eject/Set> key.
6 Select "Digital Output", and then press <Eject/Set> key.
7 Press <S> or <T> key to select test item.
8 Press <Eject/Set> key to execute the test.
9 Press the <Cancel Job> key and then <Menu> key to exit your selecting test.
Parameters for the Digital Output are as follows.
Diag. Code Components

DO-00 Main Motor FULL2 (COLOR)
DO-01 Main Motor FULL1 (BW)
DO-02 Main Motor HALF
DO-05 Sub Motor FULL2 (COLOR)
DO-06 Sub Motor FULL1 (BW)
DO-07 Sub Motor HALF
DO-0A K Mode SOLENOID (Auto OFF)
DO-0B CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID (Half Rotation)
DO-0C CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID (To Initial Position)
DO-1E Fan (HIGH)
DO-1F Fan (LOW)
DO-21 Yellow Toner Motor
DO-23 Magenta Toner Motor
DO-25 Cyan Toner Motor
DO-27 Black Toner Motor
DO-29 Regi Clutch
DO-2F CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID (Auto OFF)
DO-3D Black Drum Erase Lamp
DO-3F Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp
2-132
"Black Toner Motor"
"Cyan Toner Motor"
Fan
"Fan(HIGH)" "Magenta Toner Motor"
"Fan(LOW)"
"Yellow Toner Motor"
"Black Drum Erase Lamp"
Sub Motor
"Sub Motor(FULL2)"
"Sub Motor(FULL1)" "Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
"Sub Motor(HALF)" Drum Erase Lamp"
Main Motor
"Main Motor(FULL2)"
"Main Motor(FULL1)"
"Main Motor(HALF)"
K Mode SOLENOID
"K Mode SOLENOID(Auto OFF)"
Regi Clutch
"Regi Clutch"
CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID

"CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Half)"
"CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Init)"
"CASSETTE1 Feed SOLENOID(Auto)" Wsb02613AA
2-133
z Checking Motor, Clutch and Solenoid
Note
Before executing the Digital Output, close cover and door.
Motor,Clutch and Solenoid

Confirmation procedure
name (Diag. Code)
NOTE:
When performing operation for five minuets or longer with the front
cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid
exposure to light.

2 Open the front cover and cheat the Interlock system.
3 Execute the Main Motor FULL 2.
Main Motor (FULL 2)/Main

Motor (FULL 1)/Main Motor
(HALF)
(DO-00, 01, 02) Drum
Belt
Wsb02010GA
4 Check the drum and belt rotation.

6 Remove the cheater and close the front cover.
2 Execute the Sub Motor FULL 2.
Exit Roll
Sub Motor (FULL 2)/Sub Motor

(FULL 1)/Sub Motor (HALF)/
Motor HALF
(DO-05, 06, 07)
Wsb02011GA
3 Check the exit roll rotation.

2-134

name (Diag. Code)
NOTE:
These procedures are for technical staff. When performing operation
for five minuets or longer with the front cover open, remove the PHD
ASSY, and cover the drum to avoid exposure to light.
1 Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH. (REP7.4)

2 Cheat the interlock system.
4 Execute the K Mode Solenoid.
K Mode Solenoid (Auto OFF)

(Color Mode Switching
Solenoid)
(DO-0A)
K Mode Solenoid
Wsb02012KA
5 Check the K Mode Solenoid movement.

7 Turn of the printer power.
8 Attach the DRIVE ASSY PH.
9 Remove the cheater and turn on the power.
2-135

name (Diag. Code)
NOTE:
The Main Motor and the Feed Solenoid operate simultaneously.

2 Remove the paper tray.
3 Execute the CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Half).
Feed Roll
CASSETTE1 Solenoid (Half)/
CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid
(Init)
(DO-0B,0C)
Wsb02013GA
4 Check the Feed Roll rotation.

6 Replace the paper tray.
2 Execute the Fan (HIGH).
Fan (HIGH)/Fan (LOW)

(DO-1E, 1F)
Wsb02014GA
3 Check the Fan rotation.

2-136

name (Diag. Code)
NOTE:
These procedures are for technical staff. Described below is the
check procedure common among the four toner motor. Note the
operation for the toner in the PHD ASSY spills if the motor is rotated
for a long time.

2 Open the Side Cover and remove the toner cartridge.
3 Open the toner cartridge holder.
4 Execute the Toner Motor.
Yellow Toner Motor/Magenta

Toner Motor/Cyan Toner Motor/
Black Toner Motor
(DO-21, 23, 25, 27)
Gear
Wsb02015GA
5 Check the Toner Motor rotation.

7 Replace the toner cartridge and close the toner cartridge holder.
8 Close the Side Cover.
2-137

name (Diag. Code)
2 Execute the Regi Clutch.
3 Check the clutch noise.
Combination test is as follows.
NOTE:
The Regi Roll rotates when the MAIN MOTOR ON and the REGI
CLUTCH ON are executed. These procedures are for the technical
staff. When performing operation for five minutes or longer with the
front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the drum to
avoid exposure to light.

2 Open the front cover and cheat the Interlock System.
3 Execute the Main Motor FULL 2 and the Regi Clutch.
Regi Clutch
(DO-29) Regi Roll
Wsb02016GA
4 Check the Regi Roll rotation.

5 Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the clutch.
6 Press the <T> key to display the Main Motor FULL 2.
7 Press the <Cancel Job> key to stop the motor.
2-138

name (Diag. Code)
NOTE:
This test should be carried out in the case where the Feed Roll fails
to rotate under the CASSETTE1 FEED SOLENOID ON (Half
Rotation/To Initial Position) status. These procedures are for the
technical staff. When performing operation for five minutes or longer
with the front cover open, remove the PHD ASSY, and cover the
drum to avoid exposure to light.
1 Remove the Left Cover. (REP1.12)

2 Cheat the Interlock System.
4 Execute the CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid (Auto).
CASSETTE1 Feed Solenoid

(Auto)
(DO-2F)
CASSETTE1
Feed Solenoid
Wsb02614AA
5 Check the Feed Solenoid movement.

7 Turn off the printer power.
8 Attach the Left Cover.
10 Turn on the printer power.
2-139

name (Diag. Code)
NOTE:
These procedures are for the technical staff.

2 Open the front cover.
3 Remove the PHD ASSY and cover the drum to avoid exposure to
light.
4 Cheat the Interlock Syastem.
5 Execute the Black Drum Erase Lamp.
Black Drum Erase Lamp

(DO-3D) Black Drum Erase Lamp
Wsb02018GA
6 Check the lamp lighting.

8 Remove the cheater and replace the PHD ASSY.
9 Close the front cover.
2-140

name (Diag. Code)
NOTE:
These procedures are for the technical staff.

2 Open the front cover.
3 Remove the PHD ASSY and cover the drum to avoid exposure to
light.
4 Cheat the Interlock Syastem.
5 Execute the Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum Erase Lamp.
Yellow, Magenta and Cyan Drum

Erase Lamp
Cyan Drum Erase Lamp
(DO-3F)
Magenta Drum Erase Lamp
Yellow Drum Erase Lamp
Wsb02019GA
6 Check the lamp lighting.

8 Remove the cheater and replace the PHD ASSY.
9 Close the front cover.
2-141
NVM Settings
Under the [NVM Setting] menu, do not use [Edit NVM] and [Initialize Slave], because these operations handle internal
data.
Perform only the following menu operations.
[Save NVM to ESS]

Saves the internal data of PWBA MCU to PWBA ESS temporarily when PWBA MCU needs to be replaced due
to a trouble, etc.
[Load MVN from ESS]

Loads the internal data saved via [Save NVM to ESS] to the new PWBA MCU.
[Print NVM Info]

Displays the current setting values of NVM.
2.6.7.5 Print Info

Config Page
The version of software of the printer and the printer configuration can be confirmed by executing this test.
Print Settings
The service tag, printing count value and error count value can be confirmed by executing this test.
2-142
2.6.7.6 Installation
Menu Contents Setting value

Serial No. Serial number of the printer. Read only
On: Enable
Tone Correction Specifies whether or not tone correction is performed.
Off: Disable
Specifies whether or not life counters are showed to the reports or the
Display Counter -
display. (Not used)
Allows you to print the received print data in hexadecimal notation.
Used to analyze the received data in case of a printing error. On: Enable
HexDup
Setting Hex Dump to ON allows you to print the received data via Off: Disable
[Info Page] under [Print info].
Pixel Counter Pixel count values of colors Y/M/C/K. Read only
The use of "Configuration" is prohibited since it is a tool for design
Configuration -
development.
Allows you to configure the counter for a specific OEM destination.
Counter Type -
Do not use this menu.
Color Print/Color Backup Number of color print.
B/W Print/B/W Backup Number of black and white print.
Total Print/Total Backup Total of Color and B/W print.
Print Counter Read only
Color Error Number of error in color print.
Number of error in black and white
B/W Error
print.
CopyCounter M to Copies the counter value in the master NVM of the PWBA ESS to
-
B the backup NVM of the PWBA ESS.
CopyCounter B to Copies the counter value in the backup NVM of the PWBA ESS to
-
M the master NVM of the PWBA ESS.
Clear All NVM Initializes all value of NVM. -
Clear JobHistory Initializes Job History. -
Initializes print volume (PV) or information of Print Auditron.
Clear AuditronPV When Print Auditron is enabled, initializes information of Print -
Auditron.
2.6.7.7 Exit Mode

Completes the diagnosis operation and reboot the data.
2-143
2.6.7.8 Test Print

Print an internal test pattern of the printer. If paper jam or paper empty occurs during the print, the test waits until they
are resolved.
z Executing test print
5 Press <T> key to select "Test Print", and then press <Eject/Set> key.
Note
To exit the test or to returning to one step higher menu, press <Cancel Job> key.
No Image IOT
Prints the blanked paper.
2-144
Pattern IOT
Prints the IOT built-in 600dpi pattern.

When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the printing process or the PWBA ESS
related.
Compare the sample chart with the print.
Check result: NG (Check the printing process.) OK (Check the PWBA ESS related.)
Wsb02023KA
2-145
Grid 2
Prints the ESS built-in grid pattern.

When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as printer-related or otherwise.
Check result: NG (Check the printing process and PWBA ESS-related.) OK (Check the network, cable, PC and so on.)
Leg_Sec02_004FA
2-146
Cyan 20%
Outputs cyan 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper.

When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the cyan toner or another color.
Check result: NG (Check the cyan toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)
Leg_Sec02_005FA
Magenta 20%
Outputs magenta 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper.

When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the magenta toner or another color.
Check result: NG (Check the magenta toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)
Leg_Sec02_006FA
2-147
Yellow 20%
Outputs yellow 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper.

When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the yellow toner or another color.
Check result: NG (Check the yellow toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)
Leg_Sec02_007FA
Black 20%
Outputs black 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper.

When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the black toner or another color.
Check result: NG (Check the black toner-related.) OK (Check another toner.)
Leg_Sec02_008FA
2-148
CMY 20%
Outputs C/M/Y 20% paint on the whole area of a A4 paper.

When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the balance of three color toners or otherwise.
Check result: NG (Check the yellow, magenta or cyan toner-related.) OK (Check black toner.)
Leg_Sec02_009FA
Gradation
Outputs the tone pattern from 2% to 100% on a A4 paper for each of 4 colors.
When the PQ problem occurred, this test enables to identify the problem as the printing process or PWBA ESS-related.
Check result: NG (Check the printing process.) OK (Check the PWBA ESS-related.)
Leg_Sec02_010FA
2-149
Toner Palette
Outputs each 100% density color pattern of Y/M/C/K.

When the PQ problem occurred in the picture or photo printing, this test enables to identify the problem as the toner or
another.
Check result: NG (Check the problem toner-related.) OK (Check the print job or print data.)
Leg_Sec02_011FA
2-150
Stain Check
Allows you to check the print for any regular lines or toner spots when encountering PQ problems.
From the difference in the interval of regular lines or spots, you can determine the parts that have caused the trouble.
Page 1 to 4: Prints the scale patterns in vertical and horizontal directions for evaluating regularity and intervals.
Page 5: Prints the list of intervals by component fault.
Page 1 Page 2
13 13
Wsb02028KA Wsb02027KA
Page 3 Page 4
13
13
Page 5
Wsb02025GA
2-151
2.6.7.9 Parameter
Registration adjustment
Item Renge Description

Slow Scan K to Paper -128 to 127
Sets the registration in the paper feeding direction.
Slow Scan 600 Y/M/C -30 to 30
First Scan K to M, Y, C -128 to 127
Fast Scan 2 K to M, Y, C -1 to 2 Sets the registration in the scanning direction.
Fast Scan M-Feed, Tray -30 to 30
Life Counter - Reads the life counter and the printer.
Note
Print the parameter list using the Print function of Parameter Menu in diagnosis before changing the value
of the registration.
Adjustable
Parameter Function Default
range
Slow Scan K to Paper
Black registration adjustment -- -128 to 127
(Shifts 0.17mm/1count)
Slow Scan 600 M,Y,C (Shifts
Color registration adjustment (600 dpi) -- -30 to 30
0.042mm/1count)
Fast Scan K to M, Y or C (Shifts Color registration adjustment
-- -128 to 127
0.042mm/1count) Calculation of adjustment is shown below.
(exp. Yellow)
Fast Scan 2 K to M, C or Y (Value of Fast Scan Reg K to Y + Value of Fast -- -1 to 2
(Shifts 0.01mm/1count) Scan Reg2 K to Y )/4
Fast Scan M-Feed or Tray
Black registration adjustment at side 1 print -- -30 to 30
(Shifts 0.17mm/1count)
2-152
Note
The default values are different in each printer.
Shifts the print area in this direction Shifts the print area in this direction
by reducing the value. by increasing the value.
Fast Scan K to M, Y, C
Fast Scan 2 K to M, Y, C
Fast Scan M-Feed, Tray
Slow Scan K to Paper Default

Slow Scan 600 M, Y, C Value
Shifts the print area in this direction

by reducing the value.
Image Side
Shifts the print area in this direction

by increasing the value.
Default
Value Wsb02615AA
2-153
Life
Note
These counter values are reference only. Do not use as the official value.
Counter Name Value of life warning

Life Y Toner (Dispense time) -
Life M Toner (Dispense time) -
Life C Toner (Dispense time) -
Life K Toner (Dispense time) -
Life Fuser Sheet 1677215
Life Print Sheet -
Read: Reads the counter value.
Life DTB (Transfer Belt) Waste Initialize: Initializes values of the 320000
(Toner cleaning count) Life DTB Sheet, Life DTB Time
and Life DTB Waste.
Life Y waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) 19000
Life M waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) 19000
Life C waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) 19000
Life K waste Toner (Waste Toner cleaning count) 19000
Life IU Y Time (Dispense Time) 6792000
Life IU M Time (Dispense Time) 6792000
Life IU C Time (Dispense Time) 6792000
Life IU K Time (Dispense Time) 6792000
Life IU Xero (Round Time) 300000
Life IU Deve K (Sheet) 300000
Life Manual Feed -
Life Tray Sheet -
Print
This function prints the parameter values and life counter values stored in the engine.
2-154
2.7 NVM Access
2.7 NVM Access

By operating the Control Panel, you can access the NVM (EEPROM in the IOT) to read/write data there.
The following functions are available.
z Editing NVM data. Data at the addresses below can be edited.
z Saving NVM data into the Controller.
z Loading data saved in the Controller back into the NVM
z Printing out data saved in the Controller
Editing NVM
The following shows how the UI guides you to edit data.

1 Select the menu shown at left and press the Set key.
NVM Settings
Edit NVM
2 The LCD displays what is shown at left.

Pressing the left/right arrow allows moving the cursor to the left/right.
Pressing the up/down arrow allows changing the value the cursor points to. Changing the value at Address
Area (Ad) allows reading and displaying data on the right side of the equal sign (=).
Edit NVM
Ad0100=00000000*
cursor
3 Changing the data leads to deletion of the * mark, which shows the current NVM value is changed.
Set data at a specific address is represented by leftmost 2 digits
displayed on the right side of the equal sign "=".
Edit NVM
Ad0100=00000001
4 Pressing the Set key allows writing a new value in the NVM.
Edit NVM
Ad0100=00000001*
5 Pressing the Cancel key allows returning to the previous screen.
NVM Settings
Edit NVM
2-155
2.7 NVM Access
Saving NVM data
To save NVM data into the Controller. Data at the NVM addresses below can be saved.
1000-17FF in total
Loading NVM data
To load data saved in the Controller into the management areas below.
1000-17FF
Printing NVM data
To print data saved in the Controller.
2-156
2.7 NVM Access
2.7.1 NVM List
Never try to write data in the NVM that is not described below since it is used as a system area for the
machine.
The setting values are only for reference as they vary according to the specifications.
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1000 Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi paper to K 0-255 - 00 0
Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to M
1001 0-255 - 00 0
(600dpi)
Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to Y
1002 0-255 - 00 0
(600dpi)
Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to C
1003 0-255 - 00 0
(600dpi)
Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to M
1004 0-255 - 00 0
(1200dpi)
Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to Y
1005 0-255 - 00 0
(1200dpi)
Line Qty Adjustment Value for Lead Regi K to C
1006 0-255 - 00 0
(1200dpi)
1007 Adjustment value for Side Regi K to M 0-255 - 00 0
1008 Adjustment value for Side Regi K to Y 0-255 - 00 0
1009 Adjustment value for Side Regi K to C 0-255 - 00 0
100A Side Regi adjustment value at MSI Feed 0-255 - 00 0
100B Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY1 Feed 0-255 - 00 0
100C Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY2 Feed 0-255 - 00 0
100D Side Regi adjustment value at TRAY3 Feed 0-255 - 00 0
100E Side Regi adjustment value at Duplex 0-255 - 00 0
1010 Adjustment value for Side Regi K to M (1/4dot) 0-255 - 00 0
1011 Adjustment value for Side Regi K to Y (1/4dot) 0-255 - 00 0
1012 Adjustment value for Side Regi K to C (1/4dot) 0-255 - 00 0
1014-
NVM User Data area (OEM FREE AREA) 0-255 - 00 0
1021
1022 Standard Size Setting MSI 0-255 - 04 4
1023 Standard Size Setting TRAY1 0-255 - 07 7
2-157
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1024 Standard Size Setting TRAY2 0-255 - 07 7
1025 Standard Size Setting dummy 0-255 - 07 7
1026 2100-2970 0.1mm 08 8
Universal Size Setting MSI width
1027 - - 6F 111
1028 1480-4318 0.1mm 0D 13
Universal Size Setting MSI length
1029 - - E4 228
102A 2100-2970 0.1mm 08 8
Universal Size Setting TRAY1 width
102B - - 6F 111
102C 1480-4318 0.1mm 0D 13
Universal Size Setting TRAY1 length
102D - - E4 228
102E 2100-2970 0.1mm 08 8
Universal Size Setting TRAY2 width
102F - - 6F 111
1030 1480-4318 0.1mm 0D 13
Universal Size Setting TRAY2 length
1031 - - E4 228
FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1
1100
PlainPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1101
PlainPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1102
CotedPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1103
CotedPaper-M
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1104
CotedPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1105
HeavierPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1106
HeavierPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0
1107 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Envelope 0-255 ℃ 00 0

1108 FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Postcard 0-255 ℃ 00 0
1109
Transparency
0-255 ℃ 00 0
110A FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Label-L 0-255 ℃ 00 0

110B FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Label-H 0-255 ℃ 00 0
110C FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Thicker 0-255 ℃ 00 0
110D FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Recycled 0-255 ℃ 00 0
110E FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Custom1 0-255 ℃ 00 0
110F FUSER Temperature Correction Value Speed1 Custom2 0-255 ℃ 00 0
1110
PlainPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0
2-158
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1111
PlainPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1112
CotedPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1113
CotedPaper-M
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1114
CotedPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1115
HeavierPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1116
HeavierPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1119
Transparency
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1120
PlainPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1121
PlainPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1122
CotedPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1123
CotedPaper-M
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1124
CotedPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1125
HeavierPaper-L
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1126
HeavierPaper-H
0-255 ℃ 00 0

1129
Transparency
0-255 ℃ 00 0

2-159
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value
1132 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-L
1133 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-H
1134 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-L
1135 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-M
1136 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-H
1137 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-L
1138 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-H
1139 0-255 - 00 0
Envelope
113A Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard 0-255 - 00 0
113B 0-255 - 00 0
Transparency
113C Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L 0-255 - 00 0
113D Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H 0-255 - 00 0
113E Simp Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker 0-255 - 00 0
113F 0-255 - 00 0
Recycled
1140 0-255 - 00 0
Custom1
1141 0-255 - 00 0
Custom2
1142 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-L
1143 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-H
1144 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-L
1145 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-M
1146 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-H
2-160
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1147 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-L
1148 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-H
1149 0-255 - 00 0
Envelope
114B 0-255 - 00 0
Transparency
114F 0-255 - 00 0
Recycled
1150 0-255 - 00 0
Custom1
1151 0-255 - 00 0
Custom2
1152 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-L
1153 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-H
1154 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-L
1155 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-M
1156 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-H
1157 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-L
1158 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-H
1159 0-255 - 00 0
Envelope
115B 0-255 - 00 0
Transparency
115F 0-255 - 00 0
Recycled
2-161
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1160 0-255 - 00 0
Custom1
1161 0-255 - 00 0
Custom2
Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value
1162 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-L
1163 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-H
1164 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-L
1165 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-M
1166 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-H
1167 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-L
1168 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-H
1169 Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Envelope 0-255 - 00 0
116A Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Postcard 0-255 - 00 0
116B 0-255 - 00 0
Transparency
116C Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-L 0-255 - 00 0
116D Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Label-H 0-255 - 00 0
116E Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Thicker 0-255 - 00 0
116F Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Recycled 0-255 - 00 0
1170 Dup Speed1 Transfer Voltage Correction Value Custom1 0-255 - 00 0
1172 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-L
1173 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-H
1174 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-L
1175 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-M
1176 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-H
1177 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-L
1178 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-H
2-162
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
117B 0-255 - 00 0
Transparency
1182 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-L
1183 0-255 - 00 0
PlainPaper-H
1184 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-L
1185 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-M
1186 0-255 - 00 0
CotedPaper-H
1187 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-L
1188 0-255 - 00 0
HeavierPaper-H
118B 0-255 - 00 0
Transparency
1192 ROS Time Out (sec) 0-30 sec 05 5
1193 FUSER Time Out (Min) 0-120 min 3C 60
11A6 High Altitude Offset Value (Trans) [0] 0-255 - 00 0
11AA High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [0] 0-255 - 00 0
2-163
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
11AB High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [1] 0-255 - 04 4
11AC High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [2] 0-255 - 06 6
11AD High Altitude Offset Value (Xero) [3] 0-255 - 08 8
High Altitude Offset Mode (common)
MODE0(0): altitude of 0[m] default
11AE MODE1(1): altitude of 1000[m] below 0-255 - 00 0
MODE2(2): altitude of 1000[m]-2000[m]
MODE3(3): altitude of 2000[m]-3500[m]
XERO Idling Sequence Execution Counter (Command
11AF 0-255 - 00 0
6F)
Deve Idling Time Timer Counter[s] (Command 7F) 60
11BC 0-255 sec 3C 60
sec
11C0 PV requirement for operating CL1 High 0-255 - 01 500
11C1 PV requirement for operating CL1 Low 0-255 - F4 -
11C2 Temperature Difference requirement for operating CL1 0-255 - 04 4
1606 Regi Con Sample Block Error details (Process) 0-255 - 00 0
1607 Regi Con Sample Block Error details (Lateral) 0-255 - 00 0
Lead Regi Adjustment Qty by media (in steps of
1628 0-255 0.2mm E7 231
0.2mm)[SSI] PlainPaper-L
1629 0-255 0.2mm E5 229
0.2mm)[SSI] PlainPaper-H
162A 0-255 0.2mm E4 228
0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-L
162B 0-255 0.2mm E3 227
0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-M
162C 0-255 0.2mm E1 225
0.2mm)[SSI] CotedPaper-H
162D 0-255 0.2mm E0 224
0.2mm)[SSI] HeavierPaper-L
162E 0-255 0.2mm E0 224
0.2mm)[SSI] HeavierPaper-H
162F 0-255 0.2mm E5 229
0.2mm)[SSI] Envelope
1630 0-255 0.2mm E2 226
0.2mm)[SSI] Postcard
1631 0-255 0.2mm EC 236
0.2mm)[SSI] Transparency
1632 0-255 0.2mm E3 227
0.2mm)[SSI] Label-L
1633 0-255 0.2mm E1 225
0.2mm)[SSI] Label-H
1634 0-255 0.2mm E5 229
0.2mm)[SSI] Thicker
2-164
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1635 0-255 0.2mm E6 230
0.2mm)[SSI] Recycled
1636 0-255 0.2mm ED 237
0.2mm)[SSI] Custom1
1637 0-255 0.2mm ED 237
0.2mm)[SSI] Custom2
1638 0-255 0.2mm 01 1
0.2mm)[Tray1] PlainPaper-L
1639 0-255 0.2mm 02 2
0.2mm)[Tray1] PlainPaper-H
163A 0-255 0.2mm 02 2
0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-L
163B 0-255 0.2mm 02 2
0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-M
163C 0-255 0.2mm 05 5
0.2mm)[Tray1] CotedPaper-H
163D 0-255 0.2mm 03 3
0.2mm)[Tray1] HeavierPaper-L
163E 0-255 0.2mm 07 7
0.2mm)[Tray1] HeavierPaper-H
163F 0-255 0.2mm 02 2
0.2mm)[Tray1] Envelope
1640 0-255 0.2mm 01 1
0.2mm)[Tray1] Postcard
1641 0-255 0.2mm 00 0
0.2mm)[Tray1] Transparency
1642 0-255 0.2mm 02 2
0.2mm)[Tray1] Label-L
1643 0-255 0.2mm 01 1
0.2mm)[Tray1] Label-H
1644 0-255 0.2mm 01 1
0.2mm)[Tray1] Thicker
1645 0-255 0.2mm 02 2
0.2mm)[Tray1] Recycled
1646 0-255 0.2mm 00 0
0.2mm)[Tray1] Custom1
1647 0-255 0.2mm 00 0
0.2mm)[Tray1] Custom2
Intervals of PV at which to execute JobEndProCon for
168C 0-255 PV 19 25
FC Normal(New)
168D 0-255 PV 19 25
FC Warning
168E 0-255 PV 19 25
FC Near Empty(Empty)
2-165
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
168F 0-255 PV 1E 30
BW Normal(New)
1690 0-255 PV 1E 30
BW Warning
1691 0-255 PV 1E 30
BW Near Empty(Empty)
Intervals of PV at which to execute Forced ProCon for
1692 0-255 PV 32 50
FC Normal(New)
1693 0-255 PV 32 50
FC Warning
1694 0-255 PV 19 25
FC Near Empty(Empty)
1695 0-255 PV 3C 60
BW Normal(New)
1696 0-255 PV 3C 60
BW Warning
1697 0-255 PV 1E 30
BW Near Empty(Empty)
16A0 0-65535 - 00 0
Vdark Average
16A0 - - 00 -
16A2 0-65535 - 02 688
Vcln Average
16A3 - - B0 -
16AA 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC TC Y
16AB - - 00 -
16AC 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC TC M
16AD - - 00 -
16AE 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC TC C
16AF - - 00 -
16B0 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC TC K
16B1 - - 00 -
16B6 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC SAD Y
16B7 - - 00 -
16B8 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC SAD M
16B9 - - 00 -
16BA 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC SAD C
16BB - - 00 -
16BC 0-65535 - 02 512
RADC SAD K
16BD - - 00 -
16CE 0-1023 - 00 164
TC Setting Control Reference Value Y
16CF - - A4 -
2-166
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
16D0 0-1023 - 00 211
TC Setting Control Reference Value M
16D1 -- - D3 -
16D2 0-1023 - 00 215
TC Setting Control Reference Value C
16D3 - - D7 -
16D4 0-1023 - 00 164
TC Setting Control Reference Value K
16D5 - - A4 -
16D6 0-1023 - 00 164
TC Control Target Value Y
16D7 - - A4 -
16D8 0-1023 - 00 211
TC Control Target Value M
16D9 - - D3 -
16DA 0-1023 - 00 215
TC Control Target Value C
16DB - - D7 -
16DC 0-1023 - 00 164
TC Control Target Value K
16DD - - A4 -
16DE 0-1023 - 00 185
SAD Setting Control Reference Value Y
16DF - - B9 -
16E0 0-1023 - 00 166
SAD Setting Control Reference Value M
16E1 - - A6 -
16E2 0-1023 - 00 154
SAD Setting Control Reference Value C
16E3 - - 9A -
16E4 0-1023 - 00 227
SAD Setting Control Reference Value K
16E5 - - E3 -
16E6 0-1023 - 00 185
SAD Control Target Value Y
16E7 - - B9 -
16E8 0-1023 - 00 166
SAD Control Target Value M
16E9 - - A6 -
16EA 0-1023 - 00 154
SAD Control Target Value C
16EB - - 9A -
16EC 0-1023 - 00 227
SAD Control Target Value K
16ED - - E3 -
17A2 HW Error History (5 errors back) Error No. 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17A3 HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(High) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17A4 HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(Middle) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17A5 HW Error History (5 errors back) Counter(Low) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17A6 HW Error History (4 errors back) Error No. 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17A7 HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(High) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17A8 HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(Middle) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
2-167
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
17A9 HW Error History (4 errors back) Counter(Low) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17AA HW Error History (3 errors back) Error No. 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17AB HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(High) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17AC HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(Middle) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17AD HW Error History (3 errors back) Counter(Low) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17AE HW Error History (2 errors back) Error No. 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17AF HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(High) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17B0 HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(Middle) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17B1 HW Error History (2 errors back) Counter(Low) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
HW Error History (the error before the latest one) Error
17B2 0-16777215 PV 00 0
No.
HW Error History (the error before the latest one)
17B3 0-16777215 PV 00 0
Counter(High)
17B4 0-16777215 PV 00 0
Counter(Middle)
17B5 0-16777215 PV 00 0
Counter(Low)
17B6 HW Error History (the latest) Error No. 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17B7 HW Error History (the latest) Counter(High) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17B8 HW Error History (the latest) Counter(Middle) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17B9 HW Error History (the latest) Counter(Low) 0-16777215 PV 00 0
17BA Environment (Temp) Sensor Error details 0-255 - 00 0
17BC Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Details 0-255 - 00 0
17BD Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Address H 0-255 - 00 0
17BE Firmware Error details: 2 errors back Address L 0-255 - 00 0
17BF Firmware Error details: 2 errors back data 0-255 - 00 0
Firmware Error details: the error before the latest one
17C0 0-255 - 00 0
Details
17C1 0-255 - 00 0
Address H
17C2 0-255 - 00 0
Address L
17C3 0-255 - 00 0
data
17C4 Firmware Error details: the latest Details 0-255 - 00 0
17C5 Firmware Error details: the latest Address H 0-255 - 00 0
17C6 Firmware Error details: the latest Address L 0-255 - 00 0
17C7 Firmware Error details: the latest data 0-255 - 00 0
17C8 Motor Fail details 0-255 - 00 0
17C9 FanMotorFailure details 0-255 - 00 0
2-168
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
17CA CTD SensorError (Pro Con) details 2 0-255 - 00 0
17CB NV-RAM Error(U6) details Details 0-255 - 00 0
17CC NV-RAM Error(U6) details Address (H) 0-255 - 00 0
17CD NV-RAM Error(U6) details Address (L) 0-255 - 00 0
17CE NV-RAM Error(U6) details data 0-255 - 00 0
17CF ROS Fail(U2) details 0-255 - 00 0
17D0 Fuser Error(U4) History 1st 0-255 - 00 0
17D1 Fuser Error(U4) History 2nd 0-255 - 00 0
17D2 Fuser Error(U4) History 3rd 0-255 - 00 0
17D3 Fuser Error(U4) History 2 errors back 0-255 - 00 0
17D4 Fuser Error(U4) History the error before 0-255 - 00 0
17D5 Fuser Error(U4) History latest 0-255 - 00 0
17D6 CTD SensorError (Pro Con) details 2 0-255 - 00 0
17D8 Fixed Temp with Environment Sensor disabled 0-255 - 16 22
17D9 Fixed Humidity with Environment Sensor disabled 0-255 - 32 50
17DA Exit Jam Qty dummy 0-16777215 sheet 00 0
17DB Exit Jam Qty High - sheet 00 0
17DC Exit Jam Qty Middle - sheet 00 0
17DD Exit Jam Qty Low - sheet 00 0
17DE HW Error2 History (5 errors back) 1st 0-255 - 00 0
17DF HW Error2 History (4 errors back) 2nd 0-255 - 00 0
17E0 HW Error2 History (3 errors back) 3rd 0-255 - 00 0
17E1 HW Error2 History (2 errors back) 2 errors back 0-255 - 00 0
HW Error2 History (the error before the latest one) the
17E2 0-255 - 00 0
error before
17E3 HW Error2 History (the latest) latest 0-255 - 00 0
To 1 at init.c. To 0 at print start. This makes it known that
17FC 0-255 - 00 0
data is reset during printing.
17FD NVM Version Information Test 0-255 - 06 6
17FE NVM Version Information Minor 0-255 - 00 0
17FF NVM Version Information Major 0-255 - 02 2
2-169
2.7 NVM Access
Reference Only
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1032 Printer Life Counter dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
1033 Printer Life Counter High - - 00 0
1034 Printer Life Counter Middle - - 00 0
1035 Printer Life Counter Low - - 00 0
1036 SSI PV Counter dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
1037 SSI PV Counter High - - 00 0
1038 SSI PV Counter Middle - - 00 0
1039 SSI PV Counter Low - - 00 0
103A Tray1 PV Counter dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
103B Tray1 PV Counter High - - 00 0
103C Tray1 PV Counter Middle - - 00 0
103D Tray1 PV Counter Low - - 00 0
103E Tray2 PV Counter dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
103F Tray2 PV Counter High - - 00 0
1040 Tray2 PV Counter Middle - - 00 0
1041 Tray2 PV Counter Low - - 00 0
1042 Duplex PV Counter dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
1043 Duplex PV Counter High - - 00 0
1044 Duplex PV Counter Middle - - 00 0
1045 Duplex PV Counter Low - - 00 0
1046 FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
1047 FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) High - - 00 0
1048 FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) Middle - - 00 0
1049 FUSER Unit Life Counter (sheet) Low - - 00 0
104A FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 45000
104B FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold High - - 00 -
104C FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold Middle - - AF -
104D FUSER Unit Pre-Warning Threshold Low - - C8 -
104E FUSER Unit Warning Threshold dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 50000
104F FUSER Unit Warning Threshold High - - 00 -
1050 FUSER Unit Warning Threshold Middle - - C3 -
1051 FUSER Unit Warning Threshold Low - - 50 -
1052 FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
1053 FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold High - - FF 255
1054 FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold Middle - - FF 255
1055 FUSER Unit Life Limit Threshold Low - - FF 255
2-170
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1066 DTB Life PV Counter dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 0
1067 DTB Life PV Counter High - - 00 0
1068 DTB Life PV Counter Middle - - 00 0
1069 DTB Life PV Counter Low - - 00 0
106A DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 16777215
106B DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold High - - FF -
106C DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold Middle - - FF -
106D DTB PV Pre-Warning Threshold Low - - FF -
106E DTB PV Warning Threshold dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 16777215
106F DTB PV Warning Threshold High - - FF -
1070 DTB PV Warning Threshold Middle - - FF -
1071 DTB PV Warning Threshold Low - - FF -
1072 DTB PV Limit Threshold dummy 0-16777215 PV 00 16777215
1073 DTB PV Limit Threshold High - - FF -
1074 DTB PV Limit Threshold Middle - - FF -
1075 DTB PV Limit Threshold Low - - FF -
1076 DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter dummy 0-16777215 cycle 00 0
1077 DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter High - - 00 0
1078 DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter Middle - - 00 0
1079 DTB Life Round Time (cycle qty) Counter Low - - 00 0
DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Pre-Warning Threshold
107A 0-16777215 cycle 00 4151636
dummy
107B - - 3F -
High
107C - - 59 -
Middle
107D - - 54 -
Low
DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold
107E 0-16777215 cycle 00 5189546
dummy
107F DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold High - - 4F -
1080 DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold Middle - - 2F -
1081 DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Warning Threshold Low - - AA -
1082 DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold dummy 0-16777215 cycle 00 16777215
1083 DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold High - - FF -
1084 DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold Middle - - FF -
1085 DTB Round Time (cycle qty) Limit Threshold Low - - FF -
1086 DTB Life Waste Toner Counter dummy 0-16777215 - 00 0
1087 DTB Life Waste Toner Counter High - - 00 0
2-171
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
1088 DTB Life Waste Toner Counter Middle - - 00 0
1089 DTB Life Waste Toner Counter Low - - 00 0
DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold
108A 0-16777215 - 00 225000
dummy
108B DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold High - - 03 -
DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold
108C - - 6E -
Middle
108D DTB Waste Toner Counter Pre-Warning Threshold Low - - E8 -
108E DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold dummy 0-16777215 - 00 300000
108F DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold High - - 04 -
1090 DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold Middle - - 93 -
1091 DTB Waste Toner Counter Warning Threshold Low - - E0 -
1092 DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold dummy 0-16777215 - 00 320000
1093 DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold High - - 04 -
1094 DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold Middle - - E2 -
1095 DTB Waste Toner Counter Limit Threshold Low - - 00 -
DTB Life Total Dispense Time Counter (Related to
1096 0-16777215 disp time 00 0
Waste.) dummy
1097 - - 00 0
Waste.) High
1098 - - 00 0
Waste.) Middle
1099 - - 00 0
Waste.) Low
109A DTB Life Pixel Count Counter dummy 0-16777215 pixel 00 0
109B DTB Life Pixel Count Counter High - - 00 0
109C DTB Life Pixel Count Counter Middle - - 00 0
109D DTB Life Pixel Count Counter Low - - 00 0
109E DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) dummy 0-16777215 sheet 00 0
109F DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) High - - 00 0
10A0 DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) Middle - - 00 0
10A1 DTB Jam Counter (Related to Waste.) Low - - 00 0
10A2 Total Dispense Time Y Counter dummy 0-16777215 disp time 00 0
10A3 Total Dispense Time Y Counter High - - 00 0
10A4 Total Dispense Time Y Counter Middle - - 00 0
10A5 Total Dispense Time Y Counter Low - - 00 0
10A6 Total Dispense Time M Counter dummy 0-16777215 disp time 00 0
10A7 Total Dispense Time M Counter High - - 00 0
10A8 Total Dispense Time M Counter Middle - - 00 0
2-172
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
10A9 Total Dispense Time M Counter Low - - 00 0
10AA Total Dispense Time C Counter dummy 0-16777215 disp time 00 0
10AB Total Dispense Time C Counter High - - 00 0
10AC Total Dispense Time C Counter Middle - - 00 0
10AD Total Dispense Time C Counter Low - - 00 0
10AE Total Dispense Time K Counter dummy 0-16777215 disp time 00 0
10AF Total Dispense Time K Counter High - - 00 0
10B0 Total Dispense Time K Counter Middle - - 00 0
10B1 Total Dispense Time K Counter Low - - 00 0
2-173
2.7 NVM Access
When there were the instructions that were alterableness.
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
User Mode PPM-GROUP[F/C]
0=8.0ppm
1730 1=12.0ppm 0-255 - 01 1
2=unused
3=16.0ppm
User Mode PPM-GROUP[BW]
0=8.0ppm
1731 1=12.0ppm 0-255 - 03 3
2=unused
3=16.0ppm
User Mode Set Temp (52.5mm/sec)
1732 0-255 - B4 180
can be set in a range of 140 to 200 (8Ch to C8h)℃ .
User Mode Set Temp (78.75mm/sec)
1733 0-255 - B4 180
can be set in a range of 160 to 200 (A0h to C8h)℃ .
User Mode Set Temp (105mm/sec)
1734 0-255 - B4 180
can be set in a range of 160 to 200 (A0h to C8h)℃ .
Difference between Set Temp in User Mode and Upper
1735 Limit (52.5mm/sec) 0-255 - 14 20
can be set in a range of 0 to 130 (00h to 82h).
1736 Limit (78.75mm/sec) 0-255 - 14 20
1737 Limit (105mm/sec) 0-255 - 14 20
1738 Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [0] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
1739 Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [0] α 0-255 - 00 0
173A Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [1] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
173B Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [1] α 0-255 - 00 0
173C Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [2] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
173D Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [2] α 0-255 - 00 0
173E Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [3] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
173F Fixed Vtr1/α Table Simplex [3] α 0-255 - 00 0
2-174
2.7 NVM Access
Add Default
Remarks Range Unit
(Hex) Hex Dec
174A Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [0] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
174B Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [0] α 0-255 - 00 0
174C Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [1] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
174D Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [1] α 0-255 - 00 0
174E Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [2] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
174F Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [2] α 0-255 - 00 0
1750 Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [3] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
1751 Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [3] α 0-255 - 00 0
175A Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [8] Vtr1 0-255 - 00 0
175B Fixed Vtr1/α Table Duplex [8] α 0-255 - 00 0
2-175
2.7 NVM Access
Blank page
2-176
CONTENTS
3.1 Image Quality Trouble ................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting............................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Items to Be Confirmed Before Image Quality Troubleshooting....................................................... 3-5
3.1.3 Print Image Quality Specifications .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.1.4 Image Quality FIP ......................................................................................................................... 3-11
FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density) ..................................................................................................... 3-11
FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image) ........................................................................................................ 3-15
FIP-1.P3 Solid black .......................................................................................................................... 3-19
FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction) ............................................ 3-21
FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction)........................................ 3-24
FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes .................................................................................................................... 3-27
FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes ................................................................................................................ 3-30
FIP-1.P8 Partial lack .......................................................................................................................... 3-33
FIP-1.P9 Spots................................................................................................................................... 3-36
FIP-1.P10 Afterimage ........................................................................................................................ 3-39
FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog) ............................................................................................................. 3-42
FIP-1.P12 Skew ................................................................................................................................. 3-46
FIP-1.P13 Paper damage .................................................................................................................. 3-48
FIP-1.P14 No fix................................................................................................................................. 3-51
FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color shift)........................................................................................... 3-52
3.1 Image Quality Trouble

3.1.1 Entry Chart for Image Quality Troubleshooting
Start
Test Printing
No
Is there a corresponding FIP?
Yes
Replace TONER CARTRIDGE, PHD ASSY
Carry out the corresponding troubleshooting.
TRANSFER ASSY Y and FUSER ASS
ASSY.
No No
The trouble is restored? The trouble is restored?
Yes Yes
End End
9UD##
Note
It is stated as the ESS is normal. By operating test print with the Printer Engine only, if the trouble is on ESS
side or the Printer Engine side can simply be diagnosed, except those phenomena that are not able to be
diagnosed by test print.
*Test print result with the Printer Engine only is normal. --- >Malfunction on ESS side
*Test print result with the Printer Engine only is also abnormal. ---> Malfunction on the Printer Engine side
When it is the case of [Malfunction on ESS side], replace with normal ESS and normal Interface Cable, and
check.
When the trouble still occurs after replacement, check the host side, and operate Troubleshooting
efficiently, using the following image quality FIP according to each phenomenon.
3-1
Note
When the image quality trouble of print occurs, get a print to judge, understand and treat the trouble
substance precisely and appropriately, and then troubleshoot efficiently, using the image quality FIP table
according to each phenomenon.
When trouble restorations with image quality FIP is not possible, check again with the image quality FIP,
and then replace [ESS and possible causative parts] in order and check, and operate Troubleshooting,
using [Chapter 2 Troubleshooting].
Image quality FIP states regarding the typical image quality trouble, as follows.
z FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density)

z FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image)
z FIP-1.P3 Solid black
z FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction)
z FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal direction)
z FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes
z FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes
z FIP-1.P8 Partial lack
z FIP-1.P9 Spots
z FIP-1.P10 Afterimage
z FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog)
z FIP-1.P12 Skew
z FIP-1.P13 Paper damage
z FIP-1.P14 No fix
z FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color Shift)
3-2
Note
When horizontal lines and/or spot occur periodically, it is possibly caused by the trouble of a particular roll.
In this case, compare the trouble intervals on the test print with the Pitch Chart. The interval does not
necessarily match circumference of the roll. The trouble may be solved easily by the check.
Exit Pinch Roll (FUSER)

Exit Roll (FUSER)
Heat Roll (FUSER)
PHD Fuser Belt (FUSER)
FUSER
BTR (PRINTER)
BTR (PRINTER)
BTR (PRINTER)
BTR (PRINTER)
Drive Roll (PRINTER)
BCR (PHD) Drum (PHD)

BCR Cleaner Roll (PHD) Magnet Roll (PHD) Wsb01046GA
3-3
Pitch Chart
The chart is printed [Stain Check] in the [Test Print] tab of the diagnosis.
Page 1 Page 2
13 13
Page 3 Page 4
13
13
Page 5
Wsb02025KA
3-4
3.1.2 Items to Be Confirmed Before Image Quality Troubleshooting
Print Quality Problems
Customers may need your help determining the cause of print quality issues such as streaking, fading, or dropouts. Here
are some questions that may help you determine why your customer's printer is not printing optionally. First, confirm the
following items to understand customer's operating condition.
1 Does your customer's print media fall within the Printer Media Guidelines? (Refer to "Printer Media
Guidelines").
2 Is there enough toner?
3 Has the printer been cleaned recently?
Checking printer condition
z Toner
Low toner can cause print quality problems such as fading, streaking, white lines, or dropouts. Have your
customer print a small document from a different application to replicate the problem and verify the
amount of toner available for printing. When your customers print a document, the Laser Printer Status
Monitor should display a dialog box that estimates the amount of toner left in the cartridge.
If the toner is low, your customers can sometimes extend the cartridge life by removing the cartridge from
the printer, gently shaking it from side-to-side, and replacing it (Rocking the toner cartridge from side-to-
side loosens toner that may get stuck).
z Cleaning
Paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the printer and cause print quality problems, such as
smearing or toner specks. Clean inside the printer to prevent these problems.
Prior checks before troubleshooting
Check the following items if any print quality problems occur before going to each troubleshooting. Those actions may
solve problems easily and simply.
If the any problems below have occurred, check and take actions described in each item.
1 Color is out of alignment:
a) Clean inside of the printer.

b) If you install a new black cartridge and a PHD Unit cleaning has not been done, this problem will
happen. Clean inside of the printer.
2 Print is too light:
a) The toner may be low. Confirm the amount of the toner and change the toner cartridges if necessary.
b) Set the Draft Mode check box to off in the [Advanced] tab on the printer driver.
c) If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings in the Tray Settings menu.
d) Verify that the correct print media is being used.
e) The PHD Unit needs to be replaced. Change the PHD Unit.
3-5
3 Toner smears or print comes off page:
a) If you are printing on an uneven print surface, change the Paper Type settings in the Tray Settings menu.
b) Verify that the print media is within the printer specifications. (Refer to "Printer Media Guidelines").
4 Toner spots appear on the page/printing is blurred:
a) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly.

b) Change the toner cartridge.
5 Entire page is white:
a) Make sure the packaging material is removed from the toner cartridge.
b) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly.
c) The toner may be low. Change the toner cartridge.
6 Streaks appear on the page:
a) The toner may be low. Change the toner cartridge.

b) If you are using preprinted forms, make sure the toner can withstand temperatures of 0?C to 35?C.
7 Characters have jagged or uneven edges:
a) If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer,
and the software program.
8 Part or all of the page prints in black:
a) Check the toner cartridge to make sure it is installed correctly.
9 The job prints, but the top and side margins are incorrect:
a) Make sure the Paper Size setting in the Tray Settings is correct.
b) Make sure the margins are set correctly in your software program.
3-6
3.1.3 Print Image Quality Specifications
Image Quality Guarantee Conditions
The image quality is specified and guaranteed under the following conditions.
1 Environmental Condition
Temperature: 10°C - 32°C
Humidity: 15% RH - 85% RH (85% RH at 28°C)
Note that defect may occur due to condensation after around 30 minutes if the printer is turned on in a
critical environment.
2 Guaranteed Paper
The print image quality specified in this chapter should be guaranteed when the standard paper is fed from
the cassette tray. The print image quality is evaluated on the maximum size of each standard paper.
Color print quality: X-Pression 24 lb paper
Black and White quality: 4200 paper
3 Paper condition
The paper used is flesh paper immediately after unpacked, which has been left in the operating
environment for 12 hours before unpacking.
4 Printer condition
The print image quality specified in this chapter is guaranteed with the printer in normal condition.
5 Criterion for judgment

The print image quality is guaranteed with Spec. In rate = 90% ( l =90%).
6 For Color chart, Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Skew, Linearity, Magnification Error, Registration and
Printed Guaranteed Area, refer to each chart below.
3-7
Chart
Parallelism
3-8
Perpendicularity
Skew
Linearity
3-9
Magnification Error
Registration
Guaranteed Printing Area
4mm 4mm
4mm
355.6mm
(14inch)
Guaranteed printing area
351.6mm
4mm 210.9mm
215.9mm
(8.5inch)
Kmy01001KA
3-10
3.1.4 Image Quality FIP
FIP-1.P1 Faint print (Low density)
Trouble substance
The density of the image is entirely too faint.
ESS and possible causative parts
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
zFRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)
ABCDEabcde12345
zMOTOR ASSY DISP (Y/M/C/K) (PL5.1.3)
zTONER CARTRIDGE K (PL5.1.21)
zTONER CARTRIDGE C (PL5.1.22)
zTONER CARTRIDGE M (PL5.1.23)
zTONER CARTRIDGE Y (PL5.1.24)
zTRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
zPWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
Before commencing troubleshooting, check the paper transfer path. Make sure there is no foreign materials on the
transfer path, such as staples, paper clips, scraps of paper and so on.
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Check the printing
1 Print the Windows test page. Go to step 2.
data.
Is the image printed correctly?
Replace the toner
Checking the Toner Type
2 Go to step 3. with the Xerox
Is the Xerox Toner seated?
toner.
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
then go to step 4.
4 Is the image printed correctly? End of work Go to step 5.
Checking the menu settings Cancel the [Draft
5 Check the [Advanced] tab of the Printer Driver. Mode], then go to Go to step 7.
Is the [Draft Mode] selected? step 6.
Checking the faint color
Is there the faint toner? Check the original
7 Go to step 8.
Checked by [Toner Palette] of [Test Print] in [CE Mode] tab of printing data.
Diagnosis.
3-11
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking after reseating the TONER CARTRIDGEs
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs, and check that their lock keys
are in the lock positions.
Are four HV terminals on the right side of the TRANSFER ASSY,
and four springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/
or deformed?
Clean or replace the
TRANSFER ASSY
9 Go to step 10.
or SPRING(s), then
go to step 10.


the PHD ASSY or
10 Go to step 11.
SPRING(s), then go
to step 11.

11 Reseat the PHD ASSY. End of work Go to step 12.
3-12
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the laser beam windows of the ROS ASSY
Are the laser beam windows on the ROS ASSY clean?
Clean the
window(s) with soft
12 Go to step 13.
cloth or cotton swab
gently.
Checking the laser beam path

Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and
PHD ASSY?
Remove the foreign

13 Go to step 14.
substances.
Replace the
Does the Toner Dispenser Motor function normally?
MOTOR ASSY
Checked by [Motor Test] - [Yellow Toner Motor, Magenta Toner
14 Go to step 16. DISP (Y, M, C or K)
Motor, Cyan Toner Motor or Black Toner Motor] in [Digital
(Refer to REP5.3),
Output] of diagnosis.
then go to step 15.
Replace the PWBA
15 Is the image printed correctly? End of work MCU. (Refer to
REP8.11)
16 Reseat the PWBA MCU. End of work Go to step 17.
Checking after reseating the PWB ESS
17 Reseat the PWB ESS. End of work Go to step 18.
18 Reseat the TRANSFER ASSY. End of work Go to step 19.
19 Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) End of work Go to step 20.
20 Replace the PHD ASSY. (Refer to REP4.4) End of work Go to step 21.
Checking after reseating the PWBA HVPS
21 Reseat the PWBA HVPS. End of work Go to step 22.
3-13
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking after replacing the FRAME ASSY MOT
22 Replace the FRAME ASSY MOT. (Refer to REP5.3) End of work Go to step 23.
Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the PWB
23 Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) End of work ESS. (Refer to
Is the image printed correctly? REP8.3)
3-14
FIP-1.P2 Blank print (No image)
Trouble substance
The entire paper is printed pure white.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

zMOTOR ASSY DISP (Y/M/C/K) (PL5.1.3) or FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)
zDRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1)
zDRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2)
zDRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4)
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Printing data form is
Checking the printing not suitable for the
1 Print the Windows test page. printer, then check Go to step 2.
Is the image printed correctly? the printing data
form.
Replace the toner
Checking the Toner Type with the Xerox
2 Go to step 4.
Is the Non-Xerox Toner seated? toner, then go to
step 3.
Replace the PWB
3 Is the image printed correctly? End of work ESS. (Refer to
REP8.3)
Checking after reseating all TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K)
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs, and check that their lock keys
are in the lock positions.
TRANSFER ASSY
5 Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four Go to step 7.
or SPRING(s), then
springs on the frame (PL4.1.11, 12, 13 and 14) dirty and/or
go to step 6.
deformed?
3-15
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Replace the paper
7 Go to step 9.
then go to step 8.
Checking the life counter value of the TONER CARTRIDGEs
Check the life counter value of the TONER CARTRIDGEs in Replace the TONER
9 [Parameters] on the diagnosis. CARTRIDGE(s). Go to step 10.
Does the remainder value show the near of the end? (Refer to (Refer to REP5.7)
Checking the laser beam windows of the ROS ASSY
Are the laser beam windows on the ROS ASSY clean?
Clean the
window(s) with soft
10 Go to step 11.
cloth or cotton swab
gently.

PHD ASSY?
Remove the foreign

11 Go to step 12.
substances.

Checking the Toner Dispenser Motors for function
Does the Toner Dispenser Motors function normally?
Checked by [Motor Test] - [Yellow Toner Motor, Magenta Toner
Motor, Cyan Toner Motor and Black Toner Motor] in diagnosis.
3-16
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Check the connectors between the PWBA MCU and TNR (Y/M/
C/K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY DISP).
Are P/J18, P/J19, P/J181, P/J182, P/J191 and P/J192 connected
correctly? Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J18,
P/J19, P/J181, P/
14 Go to step 16.
J182, P/J191 and/or
P/J192 surly, then
go to step 15.

Disconnect J18 and J19 from the PWBA MCU.
Disconnect J181, J182, J191 and J192 from the TNR (Y/M/C/K) Replace the HARN
16 Go to step 17.
MOT. ASSY TNR MOT.
Is each cable of J18 <=> J181 and J182 continuous?
Is each cable of J19 <=> J191 and J192 continuous?
Checking the power to TNR (Y/M/C/K) MOT (MOTOR ASSY Replace the
DISP) MOTOR ASSY
Replace the PWBA
Disconnect J18 and J19 from the PWBA MCU. DISP or FRAME
17 MCU. (Refer to
Is the voltage across P18-3pin, P18-8pin, P19-4pin and P19-9pin ASSY MOT. (Refer
REP8.11)
<= > ground on PWBA MCU, about +24 VDC when the interlock to REP5.3 or
switch (HARN ASSY INTERLOCK) is pushed. REP5.2)
Checking the ROS ASSY for connection
Check the connections between the ROS ASSY and PWBA
MCU.
Are P/J40, P/J 41, P/J411 and P/J 412 connected correctly?
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 19.

3-17
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
24 Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) End of work Go to step 25.
Checking after replacing the ROS ASSY Replace the PWB
26 Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) End of work ESS. (Refer to
3-18
FIP-1.P3 Solid black
Trouble substance
The entire paper is printed jet-black.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

zPWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19)
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Printing data is
incorrect, then
check the printing
data.
2 Is the image printed correctly? Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Checked by printing the [Gradation] in [Test Print] in diagnosis.
Checking the test printing Replace the PWB
3 Is the image printed correctly? ESS. (Refer to Go to step 4.
Checked by printing the [Pattern IOT] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. REP8.3)
Checking after reseating the ROS ASSY
8 Reseat the ROS ASSY. End of work Go to step 9.
3-19
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 10.

Checking after replacing the PWB ESS
12 Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) End of work Go to step 13.
Checking after replacing the PWBA HVPS
13 Replace the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3) End of work Go to step 14.
14 Replace the ROS ASSY. (Refer to REP4.7) End of work MCU. (Refer to
3-20
FIP-1.P4 Vertical blank lines (White stripes in paper feeding direction)
Trouble substance
There are some extremely faint or completely non-printed parts. Those nonprinted
parts cover a wide area vertically, along the paper feeding direction.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Printing data is
incorrect, then
check the printing
data.
Checking the defective parts
Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis.
When the vertical blank lines of periodicity are observed, check Replace the
2 Go to step 3.
the defective parts by comparing the printed vertical blank lines corresponding parts.
with the Pitch Chart.
Are there any vertical blank lines matching the chart?
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
then go to step 4.
Checking the foreign substances on the paper transfer path Remove the foreign
5 Are there any foreign substances on the paper transfer path substances, then go Go to step 7.
between the TRANSFER ASSY and FUSER ASSY? to step 6.
Checking the belt surfaces of the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the
7 Are there any damages on the belt surface of the TRANSFER TRANSFER ASSY. Go to step 8.
ASSY? (Refer to REP6.3)
3-21
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Are four HV terminals on the TRANSFER ASSY, and four
deformed?

8 TRANSFER ASSY Go to step 9.
or SPRING(s).

PHD ASSY?
Remove the foreign

9 Go to step 10.
substances.


SPRING(s).

3-22
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
12 Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has cooled End of work Go to step 13.
down.
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 20.

3-23
FIP-1.P5 Horizontal band cross out (White stripes in horizontal

direction)
Trouble substance
There are some extremely faint or completely non-printed parts. Those nonprinted
parts cover a wide area horizontally, perpendicular to the paper feeding direction.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

zPWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19)
ABCDEabcde12345
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Printing data is
incorrect, then
check the printing
data.
Replace the
2 Check the defective parts by comparing the printed horizontal Go to step 3.
corresponding parts
band cross out with Pitch Chart.
Are there any horizontal band cross out matching the chart?
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
then go to step 4.
Checking the belt surface of the TRANSFER ASSY Replace the
3-24
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
deformed?

or SPRING(s).

Remove the foreign
7 Are there any foreign substances between the ROS ASSY and Go to step 8.
substances.
PHD ASSY?

SPRING(s).

10 Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has End of work Go to step 11.
cooled down.
3-25
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking after replacing the TONER CARTRIDGEs
15 Replace the TONER CARTRIDGE(s). (Refer to REP5.7) End of work Go to step 16.
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 19.

Checking after replacing the PWBA HVPS
20 Replace the PWBA HVPS. (Refer to REP4.3) End of work Go to step 21.
3-26
FIP-1.P6 Vertical stripes
Trouble substance
There are vertical black stripes along the paper.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

zFUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1)
ABCDEabcde12345
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Printing data is
incorrect, then
check the printing
data.
When the vertical stripes of periodicity are observed, check the Replace the
2 Go to step 3.
defective parts by comparing the printed vertical stripes with the corresponding parts.
Pitch Chart.
Are there any vertical stripes matching the chart?
deformed?

or SPRING(s).
3-27
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No

SPRING(s).

6 cooled down. End of work Go to step 7.
3-28
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 12.

3-29
FIP-1.P7 Horizontal stripes
Trouble substance
There are horizontal black stripes (perpendicular to the paper path direction) along
the paper.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Printing data is
incorrect, then
check the printing
data.
Replace the
2 Check the defective parts by comparing the printed horizontal Go to step 3.
corresponding parts.
stripes with Pitch Chart.
Are there any horizontal stripes matching the chart?
deformed?

or SPRING(s).
Checking the paper path Clean the paper

4 Go to step 5.
Are there any contaminations of the toner on the paper path? path.
3-30
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No

SPRING(s).

Replace a new
TONER
Checking the TONER CARTRIDGE (Y/M/C/K)
CARTRIDGE (Y/
8 Are the TONER CARTRIDGEs that meet the specification Go to step 9.
M/C/K) meets the
installed to the correct position?
specification. (Refer
to REP5.7)
3-31
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 14.

3-32
FIP-1.P8 Partial lack
Trouble substance
There are some extremely faint or completely missing parts in a limited area on the
paper.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Turn on the power
of the air
Checking dew condensation conditioner and
1 Was the printer installed in the room where the air conditioner Go to step 3. replace a new dray
well works? and recommended
paper, then go to
step 2.
Check the printing
data.
When the partial lacks of periodicity are observed, check the Replace the
4 Go to step 5.
defective parts by comparing the printed partial lacks with the corresponding parts.
Pitch Chart.
Are there any partial lacks matching the chart?
Checking after replacing a new paper
5 Replace the paper with a new dry and recommended one. End of work Go to step 6.
3-33
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
deformed?

or SPRING(s).


SPRING(s).

Checking after reseating TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K)
Reseat the TONER CARTRIDGEs (Y/M/C/K), and check that
their lock keys are in the lock positions.
3-34
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 16.

3-35
FIP-1.P9 Spots
Trouble substance
There are toner spots all over the paper disorderedly.
zROS ASSY (PL4.1.1)

ABCDEabcde12345
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Clean the
contaminations with
Checking the contaminations on the paper transfer path
1 soft cloth or cotton Go to step 3.
Are there any contaminations on the paper transfer path?
swab, then go to
step 2.
Replace the
3 Check the defective parts by comparing the printed spots with Go to step 4.
corresponding parts.
Pitch Chart.
Are there any spots matching the chart?
Use the paper that
4 Go to step 6.
go to step 5.
3-36
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
deformed?

or SPRING(s).


SPRING(s).

3-37
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 17.

3-38
FIP-1.P10 Afterimage
Trouble substance
The ghost appears on the paper. The ghost may be the image of the previous page,
or a part of the page currently printing.
zLED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

ABCDEabcde12345 zPHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
zHARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Did the client print the same image of large volume?
Check the printing
data.
3 Print the [Stain Check] of [Test Print] in diagnosis. End of work Go to step 4.
Checking the erase lamps
Open the COVER ASSY FRONT, and remove the PHD ASSY.
Cheat the safety interlock switch.
Does the four erase LEDs light correctly?
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and LED ASSY
ERASE.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J141
5 Go to step 6.
and/or P/J14 surely,
then go to step 6.
3-39
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
6 Go to step 7.
Disconnect J141 from the LED ASSY ERASE. ASSY LVPS.
Checking the power to LED ASSY ERASE
Replace the LED Replace the PWBA
Disconnect the connector of J14 from the LED ASSY ERASE.
7 ASSY ERASE. MCU. (Refer to
(REP4.2) REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?

SPRING(s).

deformed?

or SPRING(s).

3-40
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU Replace the PWB
17 Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) End of work ESS. (Refer to
3-41
FIP-1.P11 Background (Fog)
Trouble substance
There is toner stain all over or a part of the page. The stain appears as very bright
gray stain.
zLED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)

ABCDEabcde12345
zPWB ESS (PL8.1.9)
zHARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3)
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Printing data is
incorrect, then
check the printing
data.
Clean the
contaminations with
Checking the contaminations on the paper transfer path
2 soft cloth or cotton Go to step 4.
Are there any contaminations on the paper transfer path?
swab, then go to
step 3.
Print the Windows test page after printing the color photograph or
4 picture. (If the color photograph or picture printing is impossible, End of work Go to step 5.
print the [Toner Palette] of [Test Print] in diagnosis.
Checking the erase lamps
Open the COVER ASSY FRONT, and remove the PHD ASSY.
Cheat the safety interlock switch.
Does the four erase LEDs light correctly?
3-42
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Check the connections between the PWBA MCU and LED ASSY
ERASE.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J141
6 Go to step 7.
and/or P/J14 surely,
then go to step 7.

7 Go to step 8.
Disconnect J141 from the LED ASSY ERASE. ASSY LVPS.
Checking the power to LED ASSY ERASE
Replace the LED Replace the PWBA
Disconnect the connector of J14 from the LED ASSY ERASE.
8 ASSY ERASE. MCU. (Refer to
(REP4.2) REP8.11)
about +3.3 VDC?
deformed?

or SPRING(s).
3-43
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No

SPRING(s).

MCU.
Reconnect the
connector(s) P/J40,
P/J412 surely, then
go to step 14.

3-44
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking after replacing the PWB ESS Replace the PWBA
20 Replace the PWB ESS. (Refer to REP8.3) End of work MCU. (Refer to
3-45
FIP-1.P12 Skew
Trouble substance
The printed image is not paralleled with both sides of the paper.
zHOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5)

zROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)
ABCDE zROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9)
abcde1
2345 zROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)
Note
Tray is recommended for paper feeding because sheets fed via SSI is prone to skew depending on how the
sheet is placed on SSI.
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Use the paper that
1 Go to step 3.
go to step 2.
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
then go to step 4.
Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Replace the
5 Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. End of work defective parts, then
Is the image printed correctly? go to step 6.
Checking the paper feeding tray
Is the skewed paper fed from the SSI?
3-46
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the side guides setting of SSI
10 Reset the side guides. End of work Go to step 11.
Remove the foreign
Checking the paper path
11 substances, then go Go to step 13.
Are there any foreign substances on the paper path?
to step 12.
Checking the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL ASSY METAL for
rotation
Enter the [Motor Test] - [Main Motor FULL2] in diagnosis, and Replace the ROLL
13 then enter the [Regi Clutch]. End of work ASSY REGI. (Refer
Does the Roll Assy Regi and Roll Regi Metal rotate? to REP3.9)
INTERLOCK).
Checking after reseating the Paper Cassette
14 Reseat the Paper Cassette. End of work Go to step 15.
Checking after reseating the paper
15 Reseat the paper in the Paper Cassette. End of work Go to step 16.
Checking the side guides of the Paper Cassette
Remove the foreign
to step 18.
Checking after reseating the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
19 Reseat the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. End of work Go to step 20.
Checking after replacing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
20 Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) End of work Go to step 21.
Checking after replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED
21 Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8) End of work Go to step 22.
rotation
Does the ROLL ASSY REGI and ROLL REGI METAL rotate? to REP3.9)
INTERLOCK).
3-47
FIP-1.P13 Paper damage
Trouble substance
The paper comes out from the printer wrinkled, folded or worn-out.
zHOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5)

zROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)
zROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9)
zROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10)
Note
Tray is recommended for paper feeding because sheets fed via SSI is prone to skew depending on how the
sheet is placed on SSI.
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Turn on the power
of the air
Checking dew condensation conditioner, and
1 Was the printer installed in the room where the air conditioner Go to step 3. replace a new dray
well works? and recommended
paper, then go to
step 2.
Use the paper that
3 Go to step 5.
go to step 4.
Replace the paper
5 Go to step 7.
then go to step 6.
Checking the COVER ASSY FRONT for latching Replace the
7 Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT. End of work defective parts, then
Is the image printed correctly? go to step 8.
3-48
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking the paper feeding tray
Is the damaged paper fed from the SSI?
Checking the side guides setting of SSI
Remove the foreign
to step 15.
rotation
INTERLOCK).
Checking after reseating the Paper Cassette
17 Reseat the Paper Cassette. End of work Go to step 18.
Checking the side guides of the Paper Cassette
Checking after reseating a new paper
19 Reseat a new paper in the Paper Cassette. End of work Go to step 20.
Remove the foreign
to step 21.
Checking after reseating the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
22 Reseat the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. End of work Go to step 23.
Checking after replacing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD
23 Replace the HOLDER ASSY RETARD. (Refer to REP2.3) End of work Go to step 24.
3-49
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Checking after replacing the ROLL ASSY FEED
24 Replace the ROLL ASSY FEED. (Refer to REP3.8) End of work Go to step 25.
rotation
INTERLOCK).
3-50
FIP-1.P14 No fix
Trouble substance
The printed image is not fixed on the paper properly. The image easily comes off
when rubbed.

ABCDEabcde12345
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Use the paper that
1 Go to step 3.
go to step 2.
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
then go to step 4.
Replace the toner
Checking the Toner Type
5 Go to step 7. with Xerox Toner,
Is the Xerox Toner seated?
then go to step 6.
Checking the power cord for connection
Connect the power cord with other wall outlet. (Never connect the
power cord into other connector of the same wall outlet.)
Warning: Start the operation after the FUSER ASSY has Replace the PWBA
9 cooled down. MCU. (Refer to End of work
Replace the FUSER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.1) REP8.11)
3-51
FIP-1.P15 Color registration (Color shift)
Trouble substance
A yellow or black image printed is not overlapped on a cyan or magenta image

correctly.

ABCDEabcde12345
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Turn OFF/ON the power.
1 Does the color registration (color shift) appear on the printed Go to step 2. End of work
material when printing?
Printing data is
incorrect, then
check the printing
data.
Replace the paper
3 Go to step 5.
then go to step 4.
Does the color registration appear on the printed material when
printing?
Open and close the COVER ASSY FRONT.
printing?
Does the banding error appear on the printed material when
printing?
7 Go to step 8. End of work.
Does the banding error appear on the printed material when
printing?
3-52
Remedy
Step Check
Yes No
Adjusting the color registration automatically
Checked by [Adjust Color Regi] of [Adjust Color Regi] in
8 [Maintenance Mode] of [Admin Menu]. Go to step 9. End of work
printing?
Adjusting the color registration manually
Checked by [Enter Number] of [Adjust Color Regi] in
[Maintenance Mode] of [Admin Menu].
(Refer to user's Manual.)
printing?
Does the error appear on the printed material when printing?
11 Replace the TRANSFER ASSY. (Refer to REP6.3) Go to step 12. End of work
Checking after replacing the PWBA MCU
12 Replace the PWBA MCU. (Refer to REP8.11) Replace the printer. End of work
3-53
Blank page
3-54
CONTENTS
4.1 Preface .......................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Before starting service procedure ................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 General notes ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP) ..........................................................4-5
PL1 COVERS .......................................................................................................................................... 4-5
REP1.1 (SCC) COVER TOP (PL1.1.1)............................................................................................... 4-5
REP1.2 TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2) ............................................................................................................. 4-8
REP1.3 (SCC) COVER REAR (PL1.1.3) .......................................................................................... 4-10
REP1.4 COVER CST (PL1.1.4)........................................................................................................ 4-12
REP1.5 COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5) ............................................................................ 4-13
REP1.6 COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6) ................................................................................................... 4-15
REP1.7 COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) ........................................................................................ 4-17
REP1.8 LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8).................................................................................................... 4-20
REP1.9 HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17), KIT COVER FRONT (PL1.1.97, 98, 99) .................... 4-22
REP1.10 SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) ................................................................................................. 4-25
REP1.11 CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19)................................................................................ 4-26
REP1.12 (SCC) COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20)..................................................................................... 4-29
REP1.13 KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95) ........................................................................................ 4-31
REP1.14 KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96)............................................................................................. 4-33
PL2 PAPER CASSETTE ....................................................................................................................... 4-35
REP2.1 CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) ........................................................................................ 4-35
REP2.2 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2) ...................................................................................... 4-36
REP2.3 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5) ................................................................................... 4-38
REP2.4 LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16).......................................... 4-40
REP2.5 LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) ......................................... 4-41
REP2.6 TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17)................................................................................. 4-42
REP2.7 GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23) ............................................................................................ 4-43
REP2.8 KIT SIDE GUIDE (PL2.1.99) ............................................................................................... 4-44
PL3 PAPER FEEDER............................................................................................................................ 4-47
REP3.1 (SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) ................................................................................ 4-47
REP3.2 BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2)................................................................................................... 4-50
REP3.3 UPPER UNIT (REFERENCE ONLY) .................................................................................. 4-51
REP3.4 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3) ..................................................................................... 4-57
REP3.5 STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7) ................................................................................................... 4-58
REP3.6 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20)............................................................................... 4-59
REP3.7 KIT SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.99) ....................................................................................... 4-61
REP3.8 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4) .............................................................................................. 4-65
REP3.9 ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9) ............................................................................................... 4-68
REP3.10 SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) ................................................................ 4-71
REP3.11 SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) ............................................................... 4-73
REP3.12 SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13) ................................................................................. 4-74
REP3.13 ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11), SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12) ................................... 4-76
REP3.14 ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14), SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15).............................................. 4-77
REP3.15 SPRING STP (PL3.2.16), ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32) ............................. 4-80
PL4 XEROGRAPHICS........................................................................................................................... 4-81
REP4.1 HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3), HARN ASSY PHD XPRE (PL9.1.11) ...................................... 4-81
REP4.2 LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8) .............................................................................................. 4-84
REP4.3 (SCC) PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) .......................................................................................... 4-86
REP4.4 PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)......................................................................................................... 4-88
REP4.5 KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (PL4.1.97) ................................................................................... 4-90
REP4.6 KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (PL4.1.98)...................................................................................... 4-93
REP4.7 KIT ROS (PL4.1.99) ............................................................................................................ 4-96
PL5 DISPENSER................................................................................................................................. 4-103
REP5.1 DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1) ........................................................................................... 4-103
REP5.2 FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)........................................................................................... 4-111
REP5.3 (SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) .............................................................................. 4-113
REP5.4 SWITCH (PL5.1.9)............................................................................................................. 4-114
REP5.5 HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10)................................................................................ 4-116
REP5.6 CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14)...................................................................................... 4-117
REP5.7 TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.21~24) ..................................................... 4-118
REP5.8 KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.96~99) ....................................................... 4-121
PL6 TRANSFER & FUSER.................................................................................................................. 4-123
REP6.1 FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1) .................................................................................................... 4-123
REP6.2 STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5), SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6)......... 4-125
REP6.3 TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)............................................................................................. 4-130
PL7 DRIVE........................................................................................................................................... 4-133
REP7.1 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).................................................................................. 4-133
REP7.2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2) ................................................................................ 4-136
REP7.3 GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3) ........................................................................................................... 4-138
REP7.4 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4) .................................................................................... 4-140
REP7.5 SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7) ............................. 4-144
PL8 ELECTRICAL ............................................................................................................................... 4-146
REP8.1 (SCC) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)............................................................................................... 4-146
REP8.2 DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2)......................................................................................................... 4-148
REP8.3 (ISC) (SCC) PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).................................................................................... 4-152
REP8.4 MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11).............................................................................. 4-159
REP8.5 MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12) ............................................................................................. 4-161
REP8.6 (SCC) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1) ........................................................................................... 4-164
REP8.7 HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) ................................................................................ 4-167
REP8.8 SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) .................................................................................................. 4-169
REP8.9 (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9)........................................................................... 4-171
REP8.10 BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11)............................................................................................... 4-175
REP8.11 (SCC) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13) ........................................................................................ 4-178
REP8.12 PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16) .............................................................................. 4-182
REP8.13 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL8.2.22)........................................................................... 4-184
4.3 Adjustments............................................................................................................4-186
ADJ4.3.1 Firmware .............................................................................................................................. 4-186
ADJ4.3.1.1 ESS F/W ...................................................................................................................... 4-186
ADJ4.3.1.2 MCU F/W ..................................................................................................................... 4-189
ADJ4.3.2 Directions for Replacing Important Information Stored Component..................................... 4-192
4.1 Preface
4.1 Preface
Parts removal and replacement procedures are described in major 8 items which correspond to classification of parts list.
z REP 1 COVERS
z REP 2 PAPER CASSETTE
z REP 3 PAPER FEEDER
z REP 4 XEROGRAPHICS
z REP 5 DISPENSER
z REP 6 TRANSFER & FUSER
z REP 7 DRIVE
z REP 8 ELECTRICAL
Note
When working on an item which is controlled as a spare part but the procedure therefore is not described,
observe carefully how the part is attached before removing the item.
Note
As a general rule, optional items are assumed to be removed from the equipment. However, you may work
with optional items attached if it does not disturb your work.
Safety Critical Component (SCC)
Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to Fuji Xerox Co. Ltd-
stipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components.
Important Information Stored Components store customers' important information they have entered after machine
installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must replace and discard them, following
the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care never to let customer information leak out.
4-1
4.1 Preface
4.1.1 Before starting service procedure
z Start the procedure after turning off the power and removing the power cord from the outlet.
z When performing the service operation around the FUSER ASSY, ensure that FUSER ASSY and its
surrounding area have cooled down sufficiently.
z Pay sufficient attention to the parts during the procedure because they may be broken or may not perform their
functions properly if unreasonable force is applied.
z Since various types of screws are used, ensure that the right screws are used in their right positions. Use
special caution not to confuse the screws for plastic and the ones for sheet metal, because using the wrong type
of screw may result in damage to the screw threads or other troubles.
Major appli-
How to Points to be
No. Type Application Shape cation
distinguish noted
locations
Plastic
Oblique screwing
•Silver-colored damages the
Screw for •Thread is coarser thread because
1 plastic than that of the this screw cuts -
Silver, tap Coarse sheet metal type. female threads in
•Screw tip is thin. the base material
Parts etc Plastic
as it goes in.
Sheet metal
•Silver-colored
Screw for
•Diameter of the
2 metal sheet -
thread section is
Silver
uniform.
Parts etc Sheet metal
Sheet metal •Silver-colored

Screw for
•Provided with an
metal sheet •Mounting
external tooth
Silver, with positions of
3 washer.
an external the ground
•Diameter of the
tooth wires.
Parts etc Sheet metal thread section is
washer
uniform.
4-2
4.1 Preface
z Wear a wristband or the like as far as possible to remove static electricity of the human body.
z Keep the front cover closed. Buzzer goes off when the machine is left powered on with the front cover open
for five minutes or longer to prevent the drum deterioration due to exposure to light.
z When opening the front door in a removal/replacement operation, cover the drum to keep it from being
exposed to light.
z Remove PAPER CASSETTE, PHD ASSY, TONER CARTRIDGE and FUSER ASSY, and put them in a place
where they do not affect the procedure. (Note that the service procedures can be performed with those parts in
place depending on the target section of removal/replacement.)
FUSER ASSY
PHD ASSY
TONER CARTRIDGE (K)
PAPER CASSETTE
TONER CARTRIDGE (C)
TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Wsb03001GA
4-3
4.1 Preface
4.1.2 General notes
z The string “(PL X.Y.Z)” suffixed to the part name in the procedure denotes that the part corresponds to the
plate (PL) “X.Y”, item “Z” of [Engineering Parts list], and its shape and fitting position can be checked in
[Engineering Parts list].
z Directional descriptions used in the procedures are defined as follows:
-Front: Direction toward you when facing the front of the printer.
-Rear: Direction opposite to the front when facing the front of the printer.
-Left: Left-hand direction when facing the front of the printer.
-Right: Right-hand direction when facing the front of the printer
Wsb03002GA
Figure: Definitions of Printer Orientation
z The string “(REP X.Y)” that appears in or at the end of the procedure denotes that the related service
procedure is described in [REP X.Y].
z Screws shown in the illustrations are to be unscrewed and removed using a Phillips head (cross-slot)
screwdriver, unless otherwise specified.
z Black arrows shown in the illustrations denote moving directions. When numbers are assigned to these
arrows, they refer to the order in the procedure.
z Refer to Chapter 7 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)] for the positions of connectors (P/J).
4-4
4.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures (REP)

PL1 COVERS
REP1.1 (SCC) COVER TOP (PL1.1.1)
[Removal]
1 Open the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7).
Note
Cover the drum of the PHD ASSY to avoid exposure to light.
2 Remove the PHD ASSY. (REP4.4)
Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service
operation.
3 Remove the FUSER ASSY. (REP6.1)
4 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER TOP (PL1.1.1) to the printer.
4-5
5 Lift up the front side of the COVER TOP to release the COVER TOP from the two pegs on the printer.
6 Slide the COVER TOP to backward and lift up it to release the COVER TOP from the hooks.
Note
Release the left and right sides of the COVER TOP in order.
4-6
7 Remove the COVER TOP from the printer.
4-7
REP1.2 TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2)
[Removal]
1 Open the TRAY EXT (PL1.1.2).
2 Press the right side of the TRAY EXT to the left, to release the hole of the TRAY EXT from the boss of the
printer.
4-8
3 Remove the TRAY EXT.
4-9
REP1.3 (SCC) COVER REAR (PL1.1.3)
[Removal]
1 Remove the CASSETTE ASSY 250. (REP2.1)
Note
4 Remove the COVER CST. (REP1.4)
5 Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR. (REP1.5)
Note
operation.
7 Remove the COVER TOP. (REP1.1)
8 Remove the COVER SIDE L. (REP1.12)
9 Remove the COVER SIDE R. (REP1.6)
10 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER REAR (PL1.1.3) to the printer.
4-10
11 Remove the COVER REAR from the printer.
4-11
REP1.4 COVER CST (PL1.1.4)
[Removal]
2 Press the left and right sides of the COVER CST (PL1.1.4) to release the two hooks from the holes of the
printer, remove it.
4-12
REP1.5 COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5)
[Removal]
1 Open the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5).
2 Press the upper hinge of the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR to release the boss on the hinge from the hole
of the printer, move the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR to arrow direction.
4-13
3 Remove the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR.
4-14
REP1.6 COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
Accesses Position (The 7) shows the procedure number.)
4-15
6 Remove the seven screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER SIDE R (PL1.1.6) to the printer.
7 Release the front hook of the COVER SIDE R.
8 Remove the COVER SIDE R from the printer.
4-16
REP1.7 COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
9 Remove the SHAFT PIVOT. (REP1.10)
Accesses Position (The 10), 11) and 12) show the procedure number.)
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the COVER
ASSY FRONT side.
4-17
10 Release the harness of the HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17) from the rib of the printer, disengage the
connector (P/J2900) of the HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12).
11 Release the HARNESS ASSY A-OP from the hooks of the printer.
12 Insert the right side under part of the COVER ASSY FRONT (PL1.1.7) into the inside of the printer.
4-18
13 Tilt the COVER ASSY FRONT, release the left side boss of the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) from the
COVER ASSY FRONT.
14 Release the right side boss of the TRANSFER ASSY from the COVER ASSY FRONT, remove the
COVER ASSY FRONT from the printer.
4-19
REP1.8 LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
10 Remove the COVER ASSY FRONT. (REP1.7)
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the left and right LATCH FRONTs.
11 Release the hook of the LATCH FRONT (PL1.1.8), rotate the LATCH FRONT by 90 degrees.
4-20
12 Lift up the LATCH FRONT.
4-21
REP1.9 HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17), KIT COVER FRONT

(PL1.1.97, 98, 99)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
11 Remove the LATCH FRONT. (REP1.8)
12 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL. (REP1.11)
13 Remove the KIT CVR HARNESS. (REP1.13)
14 Remove the KIT GUIDE BELT. (REP1.14)
4-22
15 Remove the SPRING LATCH OUT (PL1.1.10) from the PLATE LATCH (PL1.1.9).
16 Move the PLATE LATCH to the left.
17 Remove the PLATE LATCH from the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4-23
18 Release the HARNESS ASSY A-OP (PL1.1.17) from the hooks of the COVER ASSY FRONT.
19 Pull the HARNESS ASSY A-OP out from the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL side, remove it.
4-24
REP1.10 SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18)
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the left and right SHAFT PIVOTs (PL1.1.18).
[Removal]
2 Release the hook of the SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) to pull out the SHAFT PIVOT.
4-25
REP1.11 CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19)
[Removal]
Note
Note
Take care not to move the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL away from the COVER ASSY FRONT too far
because the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL is secured to the HARNESS ASSY A-OP.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the CONSOLE ASSY
PANEL.
3 Release the six hooks of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL (PL1.1.19), using a miniature screwdriver.
4-26
4 Remove the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL from the COVER ASSY FRONT.
5 Disengage the connector (P/J220) of the CONSOLE ASSY PANEL, and then remove the CONSOLE
ASSY PANEL.
4-27
Note
Set the core of the HARNESS ASSY A-OP to the space of the COVER ASSY FRONT when
attaching the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4-28
REP1.12 (SCC) COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
5 Remove the three screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the COVER SIDE L (PL1.1.20) to the printer.
4-29
6 Release the front hook of the COVER SIDE L.
7 Swing the COVER SIDE L to backward, to release the two notches of the COVER SIDE L from the two
hooks of the COVER REAR (PL1.1.3). Remove the COVER SIDE L from the printer.
4-30
REP1.13 KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
11 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the KIT CVR HARNESS (PL1.1.95) to the COVER
ASSY FRONT.
4-31
12 Remove the KIT CVR HARNESS from the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Note
When attaching the KIT CVR HARNESS, mate the tabs of the KIT CVR HARNESS with the notch
and the hole of the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4-32
REP1.14 KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
11 Remove the three screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the KIT GUIDE BELT (PL1.1.96) to the COVER
ASSY FRONT.
4-33
12 Remove the KIT GUIDE BELT from the COVER ASSY FRONT.
Note
When attaching the KIT GUIDE BELT, mate the tabs of the KIT GUIDE BELT with the notch and hole
of the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4-34
PL2 PAPER CASSETTE

REP2.1 CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1)
[Removal]
1 Pull out the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) from the printer.
4-35
REP2.2 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2)
[Removal]
2 Push the LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14) and the LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), lift the PLATE
ASSY BOTTOM (PL2.1.2) up.
3 Release the left and right bosses of the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM by pressing the left and right of the
HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18) to outside direction.
4 Push the left and right hooks of the HOUSING CST 250 to release the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, remove
the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1).
Note
When attaching the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM, make sure that the bosses on the under side of the
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM were attached to the SPRING N/F L (PL2.1.3) and the SPRING N/F R
(PL2.1.4).
LATCH BOTTOM R
LATCH BOTTOM L
Wsb04001FA
4-36
PLATE ASSY BOTTOM
SPRING N/F R SPRING N/F L
Wsb04002FA
4-37
REP2.3 HOLDER ASSY RETARD (PL2.1.5)
[Removal]
2 Hold the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) and pinch the left and right hooks of the HOLDER ASSY
RETARD (PL2.1.5). Swing the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to release the two hooks.
3 Pull up the HOLDER ASSY RETARD to remove the HOLDER ASSY RETARD from the CASSETTE
ASSY 250.
4-38
Note
Mate the under tab of the HOLDER ASSY RETARD with the hole of the CASSETTE ASSY 250 when
attaching the HOLDER ASSY RETARD.
4-39
REP2.4 LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16)
[Removal]
2 Remove the PLATE ASSY BOTTOM. (REP2.2)
3 Remove the SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) from the bosses of the LATCH BOTTOM L (PL2.1.14) and
the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18)
4 Shift the LATCH BOTTOM L to inside, remove the LATCH BOTTOM L from the groove of the
HOUSING CST 250.
Note
When the LATCH BOTTOM L and the LATCH BOTTOM R are removed at same time, use caution
not to confuse their securing positions.
LATCH BOTTOM L
SPRING LATCH B
Wsb04003FA
4-40
REP2.5 LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15), SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16)
[Removal]
3 Remove the SPRING LATCH B (PL2.1.16) from the bosses of the LATCH BOTTOM R (PL2.1.15) and
the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18).
4 Shift the LATCH BOTTOM R to inside, remove the LATCH BOTTOM R from the groove of the
HOUSING CST 250.
Note
When the LATCH BOTTOM L and the LATCH BOTTOM R are removed at same time, use caution
not to confuse their securing positions.
LATCH BOTTOM R
SPRING LATCH B
Wsb04004FA
4-41
REP2.6 TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17)
[Removal]
2 Shift the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17) to backward until it stops.
3 Push the back center of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18) to release the stopper of the TRAY ASSY
EXTENSION.
4 Remove the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) by depressing the
latch lever of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION.
TRAY ASSY EXTENSION
Wsb04005FA
4-42
REP2.7 GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23)
[Removal]
2 Shift the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION (PL2.1.17) to backward until it stops.
3 Shift the GUIDE ASSY END (PL2.1.23) to frontward until it stops.
4 Push the front center of the TRAY ASSY EXTENSION to release the stopper of the GUIDE ASSY END.
5 Remove the GUIDE ASSY END from the CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1) by depressing the latch lever
of the GUIDE ASSY END.
GUIDE ASSY END
Wsb04006FA
4-43
REP2.8 KIT SIDE GUIDE (PL2.1.99)
[Removal]
3 Release the hook that fixes the GEAR PINION (PL2.1.7), remove the GEAR PINION from the
CASSETTE ASSY 250 (PL2.1.1).
4 Shift the GUIDE SIDE L (PL2.1.6) to inside to mate the two under hooks on the GUIDE SIDE L with
holes of the HOUSING CST 250 (PL2.1.18).
5 Remove GUIDE SIDE L from CASETTTE ASSY 250 by sliding GUIDE SIDE L so that the three hooks
(left, center, right) on the bottom are released from the holes on HOUSING CST 250. Ensure that the
hooks are released one by one from left to right.
6 Shift the GUIDE SIDE ASSY R (PL2.1.8) to inside to mate the two under hooks on the GUIDE SIDE
ASSY R with the holes of the HOUSING CST 250.
7 Remove GUIDE SIDE R from CASETTTE ASSY 250 by sliding GUIDE SIDE L so that the three hooks
(right, center, left) on the bottom are released from the holes on HOUSING CST 250. Ensure that the
hooks are released one by one from right to left.
Note
Shift the GUIDE SIDE L and GUIDE SIDE ASSY R to outside before attaching the GEAR PINION.
GEAR PINION
Wsb04007FA
4-44
hook
GUIDE SIDE L
Wsb04008FA
4-45
hook
GUIDE SIDE R
Wsb04009FA
4-46
PL3 PAPER FEEDER

REP3.1 (SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
7 Release the harness of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV (PL3.1.1) from the hook of the DRIVE ASSY PH
(PL7.1.4).
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the printer
harness side.
4-47
8 Disengage the connector (P/J262) of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.
9 Remove the E-ring that fixes the CLUTCH ASSY DRV to the shaft, using a miniature screwdriver,
remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV.
4-48
Note
When attaching the CLUTCH ASSY DRV, mate the notch of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV with the rib of
the DRIVE ASSY PH.
4-49
REP3.2 BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
7 Remove the CLUTCH ASSY DRV. (REP3.1)
8 Release the two hooks of the BEARING REGI (PL3.1.2), remove the BEARING REGI from the shaft.
4-50
REP3.3 UPPER UNIT (REFERENCE ONLY)
[Removal]
Note
4 Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.7)
Note
operation.
11 Remove the COVER REAR. (REP1.3)
13 Remove the BEARING REGI. (REP3.2)
14 Remove the FAN MAIN. (REP8.1)
15 Remove the DUCT FAN. (REP8.2)
16 Remove the PWBA ESS. (REP8.3)
17 Remove the PWBA MCU. (REP8.11)
18 Remove the BREAKER GFI. (REP8.10)
21 Remove the STOPPER PIVOT, GEAR T4 and SHAFT ASSY PIVOT. (REP6.2)
22 Remove the TRANSFER ASSY. (REP6.3)
4-51
Accesses Position (All the numbers show the procedure number.)
23 Remove the one screw (silver, with washer, 6mm) that fixes the grounding terminal of the HARN ASSY
GFI GND (PL8.2.10).
24 Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1),
release the hook of the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).
4-52
25 Remove the GUIDE HARNESS AC from the printer together with the HARN ASSY SW PWR.
26 Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the BRACKET MCU R (PL8.2.15) to the printer.
27 Remove the BRACKET MCU R from the printer.
4-53
28 Remove the two screws that fix the front side of the printer frame.
29 Remove the two screws that fix the under part of the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).
30 Open the HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), and (Y), remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the
right side of the printer frame.
4-54
31 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the rear side of the DISPENSER ASSY and the one
screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the MCU L (PL8.2.18).
32 Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the left side of the printer frame and the one screw
(silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the BRACKET MCU L.
33 Remove the UPPER UNIT.
4-55
Note
When attaching the UPPER UNIT, route the connection harness of the TRANSFER ASSY through
the notch of the UPPER UNIT.
Note
When attaching the UPPER UNIT, mate the two holes of the UPPER UNIT with the bosses of the
FEEDER ASSY V.
4-56
REP3.4 (SCC) FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3)
[Removal]
1 Remove the UPPER UNIT. (REP3.3)
2 Remove the eight screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME HVPS (PL4.1.20) to the FEEDER ASSY
V (PL3.1.3).
3 Remove the FRAME HVPS from the FEEDER ASSY V together with the PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19),
remove the FEEDER ASSY V.
4-57
REP3.5 STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7)
[Removal]
Note
3 Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the STOPPER CST (PL3.1.7) to the printer.
4 Remove the STOPPER CST from the printer.
4-58
REP3.6 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
7 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the PLATE EARTH FDR (PL3.1.19) and PLATE
EARTH CST (PL3.1.21) to the printer.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, do not bend the PLATE EARTH FDR and the
PLATE EARTH CST
4-59
8 Move the ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL3.1.20) from between the PLATEs and the frame, remove it.
ARRESTER ENE112D-10A
Wsb04010FA
4-60
REP3.7 KIT SOLENOID FEED (PL3.1.99)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
13 Remove the SPRING FEED OUT (PL3.1.13) from the printer.
4-61
14 Release the hook of the GEAR ASSY FEED (PL3.1.14), remove the GEAR ASSY FEED from the
SHAFT ASSY FEED (PL3.2.2).
15 Remove the SPRING LEVER (PL3.1.10) from the printer.
16 Release the hook of the LEVER FEED (PL3.1.11), remove the LEVER FEED from the printer.
4-62
17 Release the harness of the SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL3.1.9) from the hooks of the printer.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the printer
harness side.
18 Release the relay connector from the rib of the printer, disengage the connecter (P/J231) of the
SOLENOID FEED MSI.
4-63
19 Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SOLENOID FEED MSI to the printer, remove the
SOLENOID FEED MSI.
Note
When attaching the GEAR ASSY FEED, it is easier to put the D-cut surface of the SHAFT ASSY
FEED on the front.
Note
When attaching the SPRING FEED OUT, make sure that the SPRING FEED OUT position is correct.
4-64
REP3.8 ROLL ASSY FEED (PL3.2.4)
[Removal]
Note
4 Release the hook of the ROLL CORE MSI (PL3.2.3) on the left of the ROLL ASSY FEED (PL 3.2.4),
and move the ROLL CORE MSI to left until it stops.
5 Release the groove on the ROLL ASSY FEED from the vertical pin mounted on the SHAFT ASSY FEED
(PL3.2.2) by sliding the ROLL ASSY FEED to the left.
6 Close the COVER ASSY FRONT.
4-65
7 Remove the ROLL ASSY FEED from the SHAFT ASSY FEED by rotating the ROLL ASSY FEED 180
degrees.
ROLL CORE MSI
ROLL ASSY FEED
Wsb04011FA
4-66
ROLL ASSY FEED
Wsb04012FA
4-67
REP3.9 ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9)
[Removal]
2 Release the hook of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT (PL3.2.6), shift the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL
(PL3.2.8) to right side.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the SPRING
REGI OUT (PL3.2.7).
3 Release the ACTUATOR REGI OUT from the hook on the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26), open the
ACTUATOR REGI OUT.
4-68
4 Remove the left and right E-rings that fix the shaft of the ROLL ASSY REGI (PL3.2.9).
Note
When carrying out work shown below, it is easier to push the ROLL REGI METAL (PL3.2.10) to
frontward.
5 Remove the GEAR REGI R (PL3.2.22), the BEARING EARTH REGI (PL3.2.21) and the BEARING R
(PL3.2.31) from the ROLL ASSY REGI.
6 Move the ACTUATOR REGI OUT to right until it stops.
7 Shift the ROLL ASSY REGI to left to remove the right shaft of the ROLL ASSY REGI, remove the ROLL
ASSY REGI from the FEEDER ASSY V (PL3.1.3) together with the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the
ACTUATOR REGI ROLL.
8 Remove the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL from the ROLL ASSY REGI.
4-69
Note
After attaching the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL, check the movement
of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI IN.
ACTUATOR REGI OUT
BEARING R
NOTE
GEAR REGI R
BEARING EARTH REGI
ROLL REGI METAL

Wsb04013FA
ACTUATOR REGI OUT

ACTUATOR REGI ROLL
ROLL ASSY REGI

Wsb04014FA
4-70
REP3.10 SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13)
[Removal]
Note
4 Before working, put the paper on the transfer belt to protect from the damage.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to move the BRACKET SNS
from the printer too far because they are connected with the harness.
4-71
5 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SNS (PL3.2.28) to the printer, remove
the BRACKET SNS.
6 Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) to the BRACKET
SNS, and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER.
7 Disengage the connector (P/J233) of the SENSOR PHOTO: SSI NO PAPER.
4-72
REP3.11 SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13)
[Removal]
2 Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER (PL3.2.13) to the FEEDER
ASSY V (PL3.1.3), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER.
3 Disengage the connector (P/J234) of the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER.
4-73
REP3.12 SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13)
[Removal]
2 Release the hook of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT (PL3.2.6), shift the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL
(PL3.2.8) to right side.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the SPRING
REGI OUT (PL3.2.7).
3 Release the ACTUATOR REGI OUT from the hook on the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26), open the
ACTUATOR REGI OUT.
Note
When carrying out the work this procedure, it is easier to push the ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11)
to downward.
4-74
4 Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI (PL3.2.13) to the FEEDER ASSY V
(PL3.1.3), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI.
5 Disengage the connector (P/J232) of the SENSOR PHOTO: REGI.
Note
After attaching the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL, check the movement
of the ACTUATOR REGI OUT and the ACTUATOR REGI IN.
4-75
REP3.13 ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11), SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12)
[Removal]
2 Remove the ROLL ASSY REGI. (REP3.9)
3 Release the left shaft of the ACTUATOR REGI IN (PL3.2.11) from the hook of the CHUTE UP
(PL3.2.26).
4 Remove the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the SPRING ACT REGI (PL3.2.12) by releasing the right shaft of
the ACTUATOR REGI IN from the hole of the CHUTE UP.
5 Remove the SPRING ACT REGI from the ACTUATOR REGI IN.
Note
When attaching the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the SPRING ACT REGI, ensure that the SPRING ACT
REGI is hung to ACTUATOR REGI IN and the CHUTE UP correctly.
NOTE
ACTUATOR REGI IN
SPRING ACT REGI
Wsb04025FA
4-76
REP3.14 ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14), SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15)
[Removal]
Note
4 Before working, put the paper on the transfer belt to protect from the damage.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to move the BRACKET SNS
from the printer too far because they are connected with the harness.
4-77
5 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SNS (PL3.2.28) to the printer, remove
the BRACKET SNS.
6 Release the left shaft of the ACTUATOR SSI (PL3.2.14) from the hook of the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26).
7 Remove the ACTUATOR SSI and the SPRING ACT SSI (PL3.2.15) by releasing the right shaft of the
ACTUATOR SSI from the hole of the CHUTE UP.
8 Remove the SPRING ACT SSI from the ACTUATOR SSI.
4-78
Note
When attaching the ACTUATOR SSI and the SPRING ACT SSI, ensure that the SPRING ACT SSI is
hung to ACTUATOR SSI and the CHUTE UP correctly.
NOTE
SPRING ACT SSI
ACTUATOR SSI
Wsb04026FA
4-79
REP3.15 SPRING STP (PL3.2.16), ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER

(PL3.2.32)
[Removal]
2 Remove the FEEDER ASSY V. (REP3.4)
3 Remove the SENSOR PHOTO: CST NO PAPER. (REP3.11)
4 Release the left and right shafts of the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (PL3.2.32) from the hole of the
CHUTE UP by pushing the CHUTE UP (PL3.2.26). Remove the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER and
the SPRING STP (PL3.2.16).
5 Remove the SPRING STP from the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER.
Note
When attaching the ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER and the SPRING STP, ensure that the SPRING
STP is hung to ACTUATOR NO PAPER and the CHUTE UP correctly.
SPRING STP
NOTE
ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER
Wsb04027FA
4-80
PL4 XEROGRAPHICS
REP4.1 HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3), HARN ASSY PHD XPRE (PL9.1.11)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
16 Remove the KIT ROS. (REP4.7)
17 Release the three hooks that fix the HOLDER CRUM (PL4.1.3) to the printer, and remove the HOLDER
CRUM.
18 Remove the CONNECTOR CRUM of the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (PL9.1.11) from the printer.
19 Disengage the connector (P/J144) of the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16).
4-81
20 Release the HARN ASSY PHD XPRO from the hook of the printer and the GUIDE HARNESS MCU
(PL8.2.19), remove it.
HOLDER CRUM
Wsb04015FA
4-82
CONNECT CRUM
HARN ASSY PHD XPRO
Wsb04016FA
4-83
REP4.2 LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
7 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the LED ASSY ERASE (PL4.1.8) to the printer.
4-84
8 Remove the LED ASSY ERASE from the printer.
9 Disengage the connector (P/J141) of the LED ASSY ERASE.
4-85
REP4.3 (SCC) PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19)
[Removal]
Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the PWB from the electrostatic.
2 Remove the seven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA HVPS (PL4.1.19) to the FRAME HVPS
(PL4.1.20).
3 Remove the PWBA HVPS from the FRAME HVPS.
4-86
Note
When attaching the PWBA HVPS, mate the notch and hole of the PWBA HVPS with the tabs of the
FRAME HVPS.
4-87
REP4.4 PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21)
[Removal]
Note
Note
When carrying out the work this procedure, take care not to cover the left and right of the belt guards
with the paper.
2 Put the paper on the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7) to protect the belt.
3 Rotate the four stoppers of the PHD ASSY (PL4.1.21) to the counter clockwise direction, to release the
lock.
4-88
4 Remove the PHD ASSY toward you by pulling it by the left and right handles.
5 Lift up the PHD ASSY from the printer.
Note
When attaching the PHD ASSY, do not break the belt of the TRANSFER ASSY.
4-89
REP4.5 KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (PL4.1.97)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
7 Remove the LED ASSY ERASE. (REP4.2)
Accesses Position (The 8), 9), 10) and 11) show the procedure number.)
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the upper and lower BLOCK STOPPER
PHD ADs (PL4.1.7).
4-90
8 Release the hook of the BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD (PL4.1.7), using a miniature screwdriver.
9 Remove the BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD from the printer.
10 Remove the SPRING PHD (PL4.1.4) from the printer.
4-91
11 Rotate the LEVER PHD (PL4.1.5) slightly, remove the LEVER PHD from the printer.
4-92
REP4.6 KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (PL4.1.98)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
14 Remove the GEAR P2. (REP7.3)
15 Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (REP7.2)
4-93
Accesses Position (The 16), 17), 18) and 19) show the procedure number.)
Note
Described next procedure is the removal procedure common among the upper and lower BLOCK
STOPPER PDH Ds (PL4.1.6).
16 Release the hook of the BLOCK STOPPER PHD D (PL4.1.6), using a miniature screwdriver.
17 Remove the BLOCK STOPPER PHD D from the printer.
4-94
18 Remove the SPRING PHD (PL4.1.4) from the printer.
19 Rotate the LEVER PHD (PL4.1.5) slightly, remove the LEVER PHD from the printer.
4-95
REP4.7 KIT ROS (PL4.1.99)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
4-96
GFI GND (PL8.2.10).
4-97
4-98
21 Remove all the connectors on the PWBA LVPS, release the harness of the HARN ASSY FUSER
(PL6.1.2) from the GUIDE HARNESS FSR (PL8.2.2).
22 Release the hooks of the GUIDE HARNESS FSR, move the GUIDE HARNESS FSR to remove it from
the FRAME ASSY LVPS (PL8.2.3).
4-99
23 Remove the two screws (silver, M4, 6mm) and the six screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME
ASSY LVPS to the printer.
24 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) to the FRAME
ASSY LVPS, remove the FRAME ASSY LVPS from the printer together with the PWBA LVPS.
25 Disengage the two connectors (P/J411, 412) of the ROS ASSY (PL4.1.1).
4-100
26 Remove the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the left and right sides of the SPRING ROSs (PL4.1.2)
to the printer. Remove the SPRING ROSs from the printer.
27 Lift up the ROS ASSY slowly from the printer.
4-101
Note
When attaching the ROS ASSY, Mate the under side boss of the ROS ASSY with the hole of the
printer.
Note
When attaching the ROS ASSY, ensure that the SPRING ROS is oriented to the direction.
Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the FRAME ASSY LVPS, ensure that the right
screws are used at their right securing positions.
The securing positions for tap screws are marked with [T].
The securing positions for metal screws are marked with [M].
4-102
PL5 DISPENSER
REP5.1 DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
17 Remove the KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y). (REP5.8)
4-103
GFI GND (PL8.2.10).
4-104
4-105
23 Remove all the connectors on the PWBA LVPS, release the harness of the HARN ASSY FUSER
(PL6.1.2) from the GUIDE HARNESS FSR (PL8.2.2).
24 Release the hooks of the GUIDE HARNESS FSR, move the GUIDE HARNESS FSR to remove it from
the FRAME ASSY LVPS (PL8.2.3).
4-106
25 Remove the two screws (silver, M4, 6mm) and the six screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME
ASSY LVPS to the printer.
26 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1) to the FRAME
ASSY LVPS, remove the FRAME ASSY LVPS from the printer together with the PWBA LVPS.
4-107
27 Release the hook of the connector of the HARN ASSY TEST RL (PL5.1.28), using pliers, and then
remove it from the DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1).
28 Remove the HARN ASSY FUSER (PL6.1.2), HARN ASSY LVPS (PL9.1.3), HARN ASSY 24V
(PL9.1.4), HARN ASSY ESS POWER (PL9.1.10) and HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12) from the hooks of
the DISPENSER ASSY.
4-108
29 Remove the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DISPENSER ASSY to the printer.
30 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) that fixes the rear side of the DISPENSER ASSY to the printer.
31 Release the hole of the DISPENSER ASSY from the boss of the printer, move the DISPENSER ASSY to
backward. Remove the DISPENSER ASSY from the printer.
4-109
Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the FRAME ASSY LVPS, ensure that the right
4-110
REP5.2 FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2)
[Removal]
1 Remove the DISPENSER ASSY. (REP5.1)
2 Disengage all the connectors of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3), release all the harness from the hooks
of the FRAME ASSY MOT (PL5.1.2).
3 Remove the five screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the FRAME ASSY MOT to the DISPENSER ASSY
(PL5.1.1).
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop and lose the GEARs.
4 Release the notch of the CONDUCTOR MOTOR (PL5.1.4) from the hook of the FRAME DISP
(PL5.1.12), remove the FRAME ASSY MOT from the DISPENSER ASSY.
4-111
Note
Ensure that the notch of the CONDUCTOR MOTOR is attached to the hook of the FRAME DISP.
FRAME ASSY MOT
Wsb04017FA
4-112
REP5.3 (SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3)
[Removal]
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four MOTOR ASSY DISPs.
2 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the MOTOR ASSY DISP (PL5.1.3) to the
DISPENSER ASSY (PL5.1.1), remove the MOTOR ASSY DISP.
3 Disengage the connector of the MOTOR ASSY DISP.

MOTOR ASSY DISP
Wsb04018FA
4-113
REP5.4 SWITCH (PL5.1.9)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
7 Release the hooks of the SWITCH (PL5.1.9) by using the miniature screwdriver, remove the SWITCH
from the printer.
4-114
8 Disengage the connector (P/J291) of the SWITCH.
4-115
REP5.5 HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10)
[Removal]
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four HOUSING ASSY AUGERs.
2 Remove the FRAME ASSY MOT. (REP5.2)
3 Release the six hooks that fix the HOUSING ASSY AUGER (PL5.1.10) to the DISPENSER ASSY
(PL5.1.1), and remove the HOUSING ASSY AUGER.
HOUSING ASSY AUGER
Wsb04019FA
4-116
REP5.6 CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14)
[Removal]
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four CONNECTOR CRUMs.
2 Release the two hooks that fix the CONNECTOR CRUM (PL5.1.14) to the DISPENSER ASSY
(PL5.1.1), and remove the CONNECTOR CRUM.
3 Disengage the connector of the CONNECTOR CRUM.
CONNECTOR CRUM
Wsb04020FA
4-117
REP5.7 TONER CARTRIDGE (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.21~24)
[Removal]
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four TONER CARTRIDGEs.
1 Open the COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR (PL1.1.5).
2 Move the handle of the TONER CARTRIDGE to backward, to release the lock.
3 Open the HOLDER TCRU.
4-118
4 Remove the TONER CARTRIDGE from the HOLDER TCRU.
Note
Shake the TONER CARTRIDGE five or six times for the distributing toner evenly when new toner
cartridge.
4-119
Note
When attaching the TONER CARTRIDGE, mate the delta mark of the Handle with the lock mark on
the cartridge holder.
4-120
REP5.8 KIT HOLDER TCRU (K), (C), (M), (Y) (PL5.1.96~99)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
Note
Described below is the removal procedure common among the four KIT HOLDER TCRUs.
4-121
12 Press the central part of the KIT HOLDER TCRU to release the hole of the KIT HOLDER TCRU from the
boss of the FRAME DISP (PL5.1.12). Open the KIT HOLDER TCRU by 90 degrees.
13 Press the boss part of the KIT HOLDER TCRU, remove the KIT HOLDER TCRU from the printer.
4-122
PL6 TRANSFER & FUSER

REP6.1 FUSER ASSY (PL6.1.1)
[Removal]
Note
The FUSER part is very hot. Take added care not to get burned when performing the service operation.
2 Pull the LEVER to release the lock.
3 Disengage the connector of the FUSER ASSY by pulling the right side of the FUSER ASSY toward you
with the LEVER released.
4-123
4 Lift up the FUSER ASSY, move the FUSER ASSY to the right side.
4-124
REP6.2 STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5), SHAFT ASSY

PIVOT (PL6.1.6)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
4-125
11 Rotate the STOPPER PIVOT (PL6.1.3), mate the tabs of the STOPPER PIVOT with the notches of the
DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2).
12 Remove the STOPPER PIVOT from the printer.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the GEAR T4.
4-126
13 Pull out the PIVOT TRANS L (PL6.1.4), remove the GEAR T4 (PL6.1.5) from the printer.
14 Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SHAFT ASSY PIVOT (PL6.1.6) to the printer.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, keep the TRANSFER ASSY slightly lifted for
ease of work.
4-127
15 Pull out the SHAFT ASSY PIVOT from the printer.
Note
Ensure that the GEAR T4 is oriented to the direction.
4-128
Note
When attaching the STOPPER PIVOT ensure that the flat face of the PIVOT TRANS L is oriented to
the direction shown in the right.
4-129
REP6.3 TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
11 Insert the SHAFT PIVOT (PL1.1.18) to the hole of the frame, to fix the TRANSFER ASSY (PL6.1.7).
4-130
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to scratch the belt surface of the
TRANSFER ASSY.
12 Release the hook of the COVER HARNESS 2 (PL6.1.8), using a miniature screwdriver, and then remove
the COVER HARNESS 2.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, leave the relay connector on the TRANSFER
ASSY harness side.
13 Release the harness from the pegs of the TRANSFER ASSY, disengage the connector (P/J281) of the
TRANSFER ASSY.
4-131
14 Release the harness coming from printer from hook of the TRANSFER ASSY.
15 Tilt the TRANSFER ASSY slowly.
16 Remove the STOPPER PIVOT, GEAR T4 and SHAFT ASSY PIVOT. (REP6.2)
17 Remove the TRANSFER ASSY from the printer.
4-132
PL7 DRIVE
REP7.1 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
15 Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN. (REP7.2)
16 Remove the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK. (REP8.7)
4-133
17 Disengage the connector (P/J221) of the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).
18 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) and the four screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY
SUB to the printer.
19 Remove the DRIVE ASSY SUB from the printer.
4-134
Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY SUB, ensure that the right screws
are used at their right securing positions.
4-135
REP7.2 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
4-136
15 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm) and the five screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY
MAIN (PL7.1.2) to the printer.
16 Remove the DRIVE ASSY MAIN from the printer.
Note
Since two types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY MAIN, ensure that the right
4-137
REP7.3 GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
13 Remove the GEAR P2 (PL7.1.3) from the shaft of the DRIVE ASSY SUB (PL7.1.1).
4-138
Note
Ensure that the GEAR P2 is oriented to the direction.
4-139
REP7.4 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
4-140
12 Disengage the two connectors (P/J24, 26) on the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13), release the harness from the
GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).
13 Disengage the connector (P/J211) of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN (PL7.1.2), release all the harness from the
hooks of the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4).
4-141
14 Remove the one screw (silver, M4, 6mm), the one screw (silver, M3, 6mm) and the one screw (silver, tap,
8mm) that fix the DRIVE ASSY PH to the printer.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, take care not to drop the coupling gear to
inside.
4-142
15 Remove the DRIVE ASSY PH from the printer.
16 Disengage the connector (P/J261) of the color mode sensor on the DRIVE ASSY PH, release the HARN
ASSY KSNR REGCL (PL9.1.9) from the hook of the DRIVE ASSY PH.
Note
Since three types of screws are used for securing the DRIVE ASSY PH, ensure that the right screws
are used at their right securing positions.
4-143
REP7.5 SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR

(PL7.1.7)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
13 Lift the lever of the SOLENOID FEED MSI (PL7.1.11) up, rotate the gear to release the cam on the gear
from the sensor.
4-144
14 Release the three hooks that fix the SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR (PL7.1.7)
to the DRIVE ASSY PH (PL7.1.4), and remove the SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING
SENSOR.
cam
Wsb04021FA
SENSOR PHOTO: COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR
Wsb04022FA
4-145
PL8 ELECTRICAL
REP8.1 (SCC) FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
11 Disengage the FAN MAIN (PL8.1.1) connector (P/J503) on the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1), release the
harness of the FAN MAIN from the hooks of the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).
4-146
12 Release the four hooks of the DUCT FAN, remove the FAN MAIN from the printer.
Note
Attach the FAN so that the labeled surface faces front.
4-147
REP8.2 DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
12 Loosen the SCREW KNURLING (PL8.1.5) and then open the PLATE ESS (PL8.1.4).
4-148
13 Swing the PLATE ESS to upward slightly, to release the upper tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the
SHIELD ASSY ESS after releasing the lower tab of the PLATE ESS from the slit of the SHIELD ASSY
ESS (PL8.1.3). Remove the PLATE ESS from the printer.
14 Remove the eleven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the SHIELD ASSY ESS to the printer.
4-149
15 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS from the printer.
16 Disengage the two connectors (P/J101, 111) on the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9), release the harness from the
hooks of the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).
17 Remove the one screw (silver, 6mm) that fixes the DUCT FAN to the printer.
4-150
18 Release the two hooks of the DUCT FAN, using a miniature screwdriver, and then remove the DUCT
FAN from the printer.
4-151
REP8.3 (ISC) (SCC) PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9)
[Removal]
Note
Note
Note
operation.
4-152
4-153
14 Remove the eleven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the SHIELD ASSY ESS to the printer.
15 Remove the SHIELD ASSY ESS from the printer.
4-154
16 Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).
17 Pull out the connector (J401) of the HANESS ASSY ESS POWER (PL9.1.10) and the connector (J29) of
the HARNESS ASSY B (PL9.1.12) through the hole of the FRAME ESS (PL8.1.7).
18 Remove the six screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA ESS and the PLATE IF (PL8.1.8) to the printer,
remove the PWBA ESS from the printer together with the PLATE IF.
4-155
19 Remove the one screw (silver, 4mm) that fixes the USB connector of the PWBA ESS to the PLATE IF.
20 Remove the two screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA ESS to the PLATE IF, remove the PWBA ESS
from the PLATE IF.
Note
When replacing to new PWBA ESS, attach the NVM ROM of old PWBA ESS to new PWBA ESS.
Note
Do not use the NVM ROM removed from new PWBA ESS.
Note
Do not press the PWBA ESS when removing the NVM ROM.
Note
Take care not to bend the terminal section of the NVM ROM when replacing the NVM ROM.
4-156
Note
There are two NVM ROMs on the PWBA ESS, do not attach the NVM ROM to the wrong position.
Note
When attaching the NVM ROM, Mate the notch of the NVM ROM with the notch the IC socket.
4-157
Note
Insert the tab of the FRAME ESS into the hole of the PLATE IF, when attaching the PWBA ESS and
PLATE IF.
4-158
REP8.4 MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11)
[Removal]
Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the electrostatic.
2 Remove the two SCREW KNURLINGs that fix the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (PL8.1.11) to the
printer.
4-159
3 Disengage the connector (P/J3) of the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).
4 Remove the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD from the printer.
4-160
REP8.5 MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12)
[Removal]
Note
Use the wrist strap to protect the MEMORY CARD from the electrostatic.
Note
Remove the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD if the MULTI PROTOCOL CARD attached. (REP8.4)
4-161
3 Gently open the two hooks on the connector holding the MEMORY CARD (PL8.1.12) until the
MEMORY CARD pops up slightly.
4 Remove the MEMORY CARD from the PWBA ESS (PL8.1.9).
4-162
Note
When attaching the MEMORY CARD, Mate the notch of the MEMORY CARD with the boss on the
socket.
4-163
REP8.6 (SCC) PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1)
[Removal]
Note
Note
Note
operation.
5 Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA LVPS (PL8.2.1).
4-164
6 Remove the seven screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA LVPS to the printer.
7 Remove the PWBA LVPS from the printer.
4-165
Note
When attaching the PWBA LVPS, mate the two notches of the PWBA LVPS with the tabs of the
FRAME ASSY LVPS.
4-166
REP8.7 HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
6 Disengage the connector (P/J44) of the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (PL8.2.5) on the PWBA LVPS
(PL8.2.1).
4-167
7 Release the clamps that fix the harness of the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK, remove the harness.
8 Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 16mm) that fixes the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK to the printer,
remove the HARN ASSY INTERLOCK.
4-168
REP8.8 SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
6 Remove the one screw (silver, tap, 8mm) that fixes the SENSOR HUM (PL8.2.7) to the printer, remove
the SENSOR HUM.
4-169
7 Disengage the connector (P/J201) of the SENSOR HUM.
4-170
REP8.9 (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
12 Disengage the five connectors (P/J20, 23, 24, 26 and 28) on the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13), release the
harness from the GUIDE HARNESS AC (PL8.2.6).
4-171
GFI GND (PL8.2.10), release the HARN ASSY GFI GND from the GUIDE HARNESS AC.
14 Disengage the connector (P/J48) of the HARN ASSY SW PWR (PL8.2.9) from the PWBA LVPS
(PL8.2.1).
4-172
15 Release the HARN ASSY SW PWR from the GUIDE HARNESS AC, remove the HARN ASSY SW
PWR from the printer together with the BRACKET SW (PL8.2.8).
16 Release the hooks of the SWITCH POWER, remove the BRACKET SW from the HARN ASSY SW
PWR.
4-173
Note
When attaching the BRACKET SW to the HARN ASSY SW PWR, match the ON/OFF mark of the
POWER SWITCH with the mark on the BRACKET SW.
4-174
REP8.10 BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
11 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the BRACKET SW (PL8.2.8) to the printer.
4-175
Note
The MAIN SWITCH and the printer are connected with the harness, so they should not be far apart
when carrying out the work described next procedure.
12 Release the BRAKET SW from the hook together with the MAIN SW.
13 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 12mm) that fix the BREAKER GFI (PL8.2.11) to the printer.
4-176
14 Pull out the BREAKER GFI, disengage the three connectors (P/J482, 483, 484). Remove the BREAKER
GFI from the printer.
Note
Take care not to engage the connectors to wrong position.
4-177
REP8.11 (SCC) PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13)
[Removal]
Note
Never fail to perform the diagnostic operation. Otherwise the data will be lost in the worst case.
Note
1 Perform the diagnostic of NVM Save to evacuate MCU data.
2 Turn off the power to exit.
3 Remove the POWER CORD from outlet.
Note
Note
operation.
4-178
16 Remove the five screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the FRAME ESS (PL8.1.7) to the printer.
17 Swing the FRAME ESS slightly up and back as if it were hinged at the top.
18 Remove the hook of the PWBA ESS from the printer by lifting the FRAME ESS slightly. Remove the
FRAME ESS from the printer together with the DUCT FAN (PL8.1.2).
4-179
19 Disengage all the connectors of the PWBA MCU (PL8.2.13).
20 Remove the six screws (silver, 6mm) that fix the PWBA MCU to the printer.
4-180
21 Remove the PWBA MCU from the printer.
Note
When attaching the PWBA MCU, mate the holes of the PWBA MCU with the tabs of the printer,
Note
Execute the diagnostic operation of NVM Load, and write the data into the PWBA MCU.
4-181
REP8.12 PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16)
[Removal]
Note
Note
operation.
16 Remove the KIT ROS. (REP4.7)
4-182
17 Disengage the connector (P/J144) of the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) (PL8.2.16).
18 Remove the one screw (silver, 6mm) that fixes the PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) to the printer, remove the
PWBA EEPROM (XPRO).
4-183
REP8.13 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A (PL8.2.22)
[Removal]
Note
Note
Note
operation.
5 Remove the two screws (silver, tap, 8mm) that fix the PLATE EARTH DRUM (PL8.2.20) and PLATE
EARTH FSR (PL8.2.21) to the printer.
Note
When carrying out the work described next procedure, do not bend the PLATE EARTH DRUM and
the PLATE EARTH FSR.
4-184
6 Move the ARRESTER ENE112D-10A from between the PLATEs and the frame, remove it.
ARRESTER ENE112D-10A
Wsb04024FA
4-185
4.3 Adjustments
4.3 Adjustments
ADJ4.3.1 Firmware
Upgrade the firmware by downloading it from the PC to the Printer.

Network (DocuPrint C1110 Only), USB port and parallel port are supported as communication interfaces. In this
document, an example using a USB port will be described.
When a USB port or parallel port is to be used, check that "Enable bi-directional support" is disabled (not ticked)
in the Printer Port Settings on a PC.
ADJ4.3.1.1 ESS F/W
Work time: Approximately 5 minutes.
1 When "Ready to Print" is displayed in the Control Panel on a printer, activate FWDLMgr.exe.
4-186
4.3 Adjustments
2 Click on the [Agree] button.
3 Click the [Next] button.
4 Specify [USB Port] and click the [Next] button.
4-187
4.3 Adjustments
5 Click on the [Finish] button.
6 After ESS F/W has been downloaded, the printer is automatically rebooted.
Note
Print out the "Printer Settings" and check that the "Firmware Version" has been updated.
4-188
4.3 Adjustments
ADJ4.3.1.2 MCU F/W
Work time: Approximately 5 minutes.
1 When "Ready to Print" is displayed in the Control Panel on the printer, activate FWDLMgr.exe.
2 Click on the [Agree] button.
4-189
4.3 Adjustments
3 Click the [Next] button.
4 Specify [USB Port] and click the [Next] button.
5 Click on the [Finish] button.
4-190
4.3 Adjustments
6 When "Completed. Reboot printer" is displayed a few minutes later, turn the printer OFF and then ON for
rebooting.
Note
Print out the "Printer Settings" and check that the "Engine Version" has been updated.
4-191
4.3 Adjustments
ADJ4.3.2 Directions for Replacing Important Information Stored Component
[Purpose]
To get a full understanding of how to handle Important Information Stored Components. Data that the customer
has entered after machine installation is so important that nobody can be forgiven for a loss or leak of the data.
Besides, from the perspective of earning the confidence of the customer, it is indispensable for the CE to be able
to realize the components that store such data. The CE should also take great care in replacing such components.
[Procedure]
This product has the components below store important information. Perform the following procedure.
IBG: Collect/discard components, following the way specified separately.
Work before
Component Name Stored Information Work after replacement
replacement/abolition
NVRAM on Parameters that can be set by - Initial Action - Handling the removed PWB
Controller Board users (IP address, etc.) Back up data by printing
reports and using tools, in Be sure to initialize the PWB
- Job log order to set the data again. and then take it back to your
base. If the PWB cannot be
- Error log (Fault History, Execute “Installation Clear initialized at the customer
Counter) All NVMs”in Clear All CE site, tell the customer the
Mode. PWB will be initialized at the
- DV log/Auditron setting/ FX recycling location and
Total PV Information/ JBA that no security problem will
Information Manipulation occur.
Log
- Network Settings - Final Action

Information Restore the data, using tools.
Return settings to their
original values, using reports.
4-192
Chapter 5 Parts List CONTENTS
1. Parts List.....................................................................................................................5 - 1
1.1 Caution for use of spare parts illustration ........................................................................................ 5 - 1
1.2 Caution for use of engineering parts list .......................................................................................... 5 - 1
PL1.1 Cover [Illustration]........................................................................................................................ 5 - 3
PL1.1 Cover [List] .................................................................................................................................. 5 - 4
PL2.1 Paper Cassette [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 5
PL2.1 Paper Cassette [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 6
PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [Illustration]................................................................................................... 5 - 7
PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [List].............................................................................................................. 5 - 8
PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [Illustration]................................................................................................... 5 - 9
PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [List]............................................................................................................ 5 - 10
PL4.1 Xerographics [Illustration] .......................................................................................................... 5 - 11
PL4.1 Xerographics [List]..................................................................................................................... 5 - 12
PL5.1 Dispenser [Illustration] ............................................................................................................... 5 - 13
PL5.1 Dispenser [List]........................................................................................................................... 5 - 14
PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [Illustration] .................................................................................................... 5 - 15
PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [List] ............................................................................................................... 5 - 16
PL7.1 Drive [Illustration]....................................................................................................................... 5 - 17
PL7.1 Drive [List].................................................................................................................................. 5 - 18
PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 19
PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 20
PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [Illustration] ........................................................................................................ 5 - 21
PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [List] ................................................................................................................... 5 - 22
PL9.1 Harness [Illustration].................................................................................................................. 5 - 23
PL9.1 Harness [List]............................................................................................................................. 5 - 24
Chapter 5 Parts List CONTENTS

1. Parts List
1.1 Caution for use of spare parts illustration
- Available spare parts are shown in the illustration by name.
- [Ref PL X.Y.Z] shown below the part name denotes the item is "Z" in the plate "PL X.Y" of the
engineering part list.
- For the detailed composition of the KIT parts, check with the engineering part list.
1.2 Caution for use of engineering parts list
- The figures indicating the illustrations are the item No. in the list and present correspondence
between the illustrations and parts.
- The notation of PL "X.Y.Z" is composed of the plate (PL), item "X.Y", and parts "Z".
- The alphabet characters in the illustrations represent screws and clips as follows:
"S": screw, "E": E-ring, "KL": KL clip, "C": C-ring, and "N": nut
- " " mark in the illustrations are attached to items indicating assembly parts in the illustrations.
- Encircled alphabetical figures in the illustrations indicate interrupted leader lines. Same characters in
the illustrations represent lines to be connected.
- The mark "(with 2-5)" attached to assembly parts on the illustrations and lists represents that the
items "2, 3, 4, and 5" of that plate are contained and the mark "(with 2-5, PL6.1.1) represent that the
item "2, 3, 4, and 5" of that plate and the item "1" of the plate "6.1" are contained.
- The mark "[Ref PLX.Y.Z]" attached to parts in the illustrations and lists resents that the parts is the
same as the parts of the item "Z" of the plate "X.Y".
- The mark "∗" attached to parts in the list represents "Note" or "Reference" about that parts is con-
tained in the same page.
For the connector (P/J), parts such as harness, wire, etc. in the list, refer to
"Chapter 7, Electric wiring"
Safety Critical Component (SCC)

Control of the safety of components that are designated Safety Critical Components shall conform to
Fuji Xerox Co. Ltd-stipulated rules and regulations on Safety Critical Components.

Important Information Stored Components store customers' important information they have entered
after machine installation. When replacing Important Information Stored Components, you must
replace and discard them, following the procedure described in Chapter 4 Adjustments. Take care
never to let customer information leak out.
5–1
5–2
PL1.1 Cover [Illustration]
1
3
20
19
8
9 10 8
(P220)
97,98,99 11
12
96
13 5
14 6
16
7 (with 8-17,19)
15
14
15 95
(J220)
21
18
18 17
(P/J2200-P2900)
Wsb05001GA
5–3
PL1.1 Cover [List]
ITEM PARTS No. DESCRIPTION A.C

1 848E 20100 (SCC) COVER TOP 32B1
2 050E 24202 TRAY EXT 32B2
3 848E 20072 (SCC) COVER REAR 32B3
4 848E 20121 COVER CST 32B4
5 848K 10662 COVER ASSY WINDOW TNR 32B5
6 848E 20092 COVER SIDE R 32B6
848K 11425 COVER ASSY FRONT FX (with 8-17,19) 32B7
7 848K 11415 COVER ASSY FRONT IBG H (with 8-17,19) 32B7
848K 13735 COVER ASSY FRONT IBG L (with 8-17,19) 32B7
8 003E 73361 LATCH FRONT 32B8
9 -- PLATE LATCH 32B9
10 809E 58520 SPRING LATCH OUT 32BB
11 003E 78561 BUTTON LATCH 32BC
-- (SCC) COVER FRONT FX 32BD
12 -- (SCC) COVER FRONT IBG H 32BE
-- (SCC) COVER FRONT IBG L 32BF
13 -- GUIDE BELT 32BG
14 -- DAMPER FRONT L 32BH
15 -- DAMPER FRONT S 32BJ
16 -- COVER HARNESS 32BK
17 962K 60030 HARNESS ASSY A-OP (J220-P/J2200-P2900) 71B1
18 806E 20160 SHAFT PIVOT 32BL
848K 09883 CONSOLE ASSY PANEL FX 7510
19
848K 09893 CONSOLE ASSY PANEL IBG 7510
20 848E 20082 (SCC) COVER SIDE L 32BM
21 -- BADGE X 32BN
95 675K 63130 KIT CVR HARNESS (with 14-16) 32BP

96 675K 63140 KIT GUIDE BELT (with 13-15) 32BQ
97 675K 63110 KIT COVER FRONT (IBG) H (with 12,21) 32BR
98 675K 63120 KIT COVER FRONT (IBG) L (with 12,21) 32BS
99 675K 63100 KIT COVER FRONT (FX) (with 12,21) 32BT
5–4
PL2.1 Paper Cassette [Illustration]
1 (with 2-25)
2
22
20
3
21
4
5 6
7
8
9
11
10
7 23
12
17
14
16 13
15
16
24
25
18
19 Wsb05002GA
5–5
PL2.1 Paper Cassette [List]

050K 61260 CASSETTE ASSY 250 FX(with 2-19) 5012
1
050K 61430 CASSETTE ASSY 250 IBG(with 2-19) 5012
2 015K 75520 PLATE ASSY BOTTOM 50B1
3 809E 72190 SPRING N/F L 50B2
4 809E 72200 SPRING N/F R 50B3
5 019K 09470 HOLDER ASSY RETARD 5233
6 038E 36920 GUIDE SIDE L 50B4
7 007E 75020 GEAR PINION 50B5
8 038K 18430 GUIDE SIDE ASSY R 50B6
9 848E 19100 COVER SSI 51B1
10 038E 36940 GUIDE SIDE SSI L 51B2
11 807E 22360 RACK GUIDE SIDE SSI L 51B3
12 807E 22370 RACK GUIDE SIDE SSI R 51B4
13 038E 36950 GUIDE SIDE SSI R 51B5
14 003E 73390 LATCH BOTTOM L 50B7
15 003E 73930 LATCH BOTTOM R 50B8
16 809E 82580 SPRING LATCH B 50B9
17 050K 61170 TRAY ASSY EXTENSION 50BB
18 -- HOUSING CST 250 50BC
19 003E 76710 HANDLE CST 50BD
20 032E 26410 GUIDE BOTTOM L 50BE
21 032E 26420 GUIDE BOTTOM R 50BF
22 019K 09240 PAD ASSY BOTTOM 50BG
23 038K 18440 GUIDE ASSY END 50BH
24 003E 76750 LATCH HSG END 50BJ
25 809E 72211 SPRING LATCH 50BK
896E 53160 LABEL INSTRUCTION FX 50BL
26
896E 57850 LABEL INSTRUCTION IBG 50BL
99
Deleted 675K 62840 KIT GUIDE SIDE (with 6-8) 50BM
5–6
PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [Illustration]
99 (with 1,2)
Deleted
(J262)
1
2
99 (with 9-14
98 (with 9-14)
(J23)
14 (with 15,16)
(J28)
13
15
16 18
17
(J281)
(P231)
12 11
(J234)
10
(J231) (J232)
7
(J233)
4
9 5
8
[Ref PL3.2.1]
19
5
3 (with 4,5,7-13,16-21,PL3.2.1,PL8.2.7,PL9.1.6) 20
21
Wsb05003GA
5–7
PL3.1 Paper Feeder (1/2) [List]

1 121K 42520 (SCC) CLUTCH ASSY DRV 50C1
2 013E 30830 BEARING REGI 50C2
(SCC) FEEDER ASSY V
3 059K 56391 50C3
(with 4,5,7-13,16-21,PL3.2.1,PL8.2.7,PL9.1.6)
4 -- CHASSIS FDR R 50C4
5 -- FOOT 50C5
6 -- -- 50C6
7 003E 73341 STOPPER CST 50C7
8 -- CHASSIS FDR L 50C8
9 -- SOLENOID FEED MSI 50C9
10 -- SPRING LEVER 50CB
11 -- LEVER FEED 50CC
12 -- SPRING FEED IN 50CD
13 -- SPRING FEED OUT 50CE
14 -- GEAR ASSY FEED (with 15,16) 50CF
15 -- GEAR FEED OUT 50CG
16 -- GEAR FEED IN 50CH
17 -- BEARING 50CJ
(SCC) HARN ASSY L SIDE
18 962K 57541 71C1
(J23,J28-P231,J232,J233,J234,J281)
19 -- PLATE EARTH FDR 50CK
20 -- ARRESTER ENE112D-10A 50CL
21 -- PALTE EARTH CST 50CM
99 675K 54150 KIT SOLENOID FEED (with 9-14) 5092
5–8
PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [Illustration]
1 (with 2-16,20-33)
3
4
2
3
6 5
8
7 9
33
10 11
12 32 (with 17-19)
(P232) 16
17
18
31 19
13
REGI
SENSOR 14 15
13
CST NO PAPER
(P234) SENSOR
30 20
29 21
22
26
28
24 23
(P233)
13 25
SSI NO PAPER
SENSOR
27
Wsb05004KA
5–9
PL3.2 Paper Feeder (2/2) [List]

1 -- CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI (with 2-16,20-33) 50D1
2 -- SHAF ASSY FEED 50D2
3 059E 03110 ROLL CORE MSI 50D3
4 059K 50731 ROLL ASSY FEED 5033
5 -- BEARING EARTH 50D4
6 120E 27831 ACTUATOR REGI OUT 50D5
7 809E 71020 SPRING REGI OUT 50D6
8 120E 27931 ACTUATOR REGI ROLL 50D7
9 059K 47041 ROLL ASSY REGI 50D8
10 -- ROLL REGI METAL 50D9
11 120E 27820 ACTUATOR REGI IN 50DB
12 809E 70960 SPRING ACT REGI 50DC
13 930W 00113 SENSOR PHOTO 50DD
14 120E 27850 ACTUATOR SSI 50DE
15 809E 71030 SPRING ACT SSI 50DF
16 809E 70981 SPRING STP 50DG
17 -- STOPPER ACT 50DH
18 -- SPRING ACT NP 50DJ
19 -- ACTUATOR NO PAPER 50DK
20 -- BEARING M EARTH 50DL
21 -- BEARING EARTH REGI 50DM
22 -- GEAR REGI R 50DN
23 -- GEAR REGI M 50DP
24 -- SPRING REGI R M 50DQ
25 -- PLATE EARTH REGI 50DR
26 -- CHUTE UP 50DS
27 -- CHUTE LOW 50DT
28 674E 00991 BRACKET SNS 50DV
29 -- SPRING REGI L M 50DW
30 -- BEARING M 50DX
31 -- BEARING R 50DY
32 120K 92294 ACTUATOR ASSY NO PAPER (with 17-19) 50E1
33 -- PLATE WEIGHT 50E2
5 – 10
PL4.1 Xerographics [Illustration]
99 (with 1,2x2pcs)
2
22
(J41)
(J40) 2
23 (J411)
(J412)
1
98 (with 4,5,6x2pcs)
6
3
4
97 (with 4,5,7x2pcs)
5
(P141)
6 7 4
9
9
8
9
9 5
10 11 15 7
12 16
13 17
18
14
21 (P161)
19
20
Wsb05005GA
5 – 11
PL4.1 Xerographics [List]

1 -- (SCC) ROS ASSY 1310
2 -- SPRING ROS 13B1
3 019E 66470 HOLDER CRUM 4533
4 -- SPRING PHD 31B1
5 -- LEVER PHD 31B2
6 -- BLOCK STOPPER PHD D 31B3
7 -- BLOCK STOPPER PHD AD 31B4
8 122K 94041 LED ASSY ERASE 4421
9 -- SPRING TRACKING 71D1
10 -- SPRING CF 71D2
11 -- SPRING TR4 71D3
15 -- SPRING D4 71D7
18 -- SPRING D1 71DB
19 105K 22661 (SCC) PWBA HVPS 7320
20 -- FRAME HVPS 31B5
21 -- PHD ASSY 4510
22 962K 52060 (SCC) HARN ASSY ROS RE (J40-J411) 13B2
23 962K 52070 HARN ASSY ROS VIDEO (J41-J412) 13B3
97 675K 54241 KIT BLOCK PHD RIGHT (with 4,5,7x2pcs) 31B6

98 675K 54251 KIT BLOCK PHD LEFT (with 4,5,6x2pcs) 31B7
99 604K 43050 KIT ROS (with 1,2x2pcs) 1310
5 – 12
PL5.1 Dispenser [Illustration]
1 (with 2,9-11,14-16,25-27)
2 (with 3-8)
5 7
8
4 7
3 6
8
(J192) (P192) 6 7
3 8
6 7
(J191) (P191)
6 8 27
3
(J182) (P182)
25 3
(J181) (P181) (J291)
9
30
11 (with 12,13) (P291)
(J19) 10
(J18) 12 28
26 10
10 (J29) (P5041)
(J504)
10 13
(J314) 14 13
(P314) 15
(J313) 14 13
13 15 16 17
(P313)
(J31) (J312) 14 13
13 15 16 18
(P312)
(J311) 14 13
(P311)
13 15 16 19
16
20
21 29
22
23
24
96 (with 17,29)
97 (with 18,29)
98 (with 19,29)
99 (with 20,29)
Wsb05006GA
5 – 13
PL5.1 Dispenser [List]

1 094K 92290 DISPENSER ASSY (with 2,9-11,14-16,25-27) 4020
2 801K 28430 FRAME ASSY MOT (with 3-8) 4030
3 127K 51010 (SCC) MOTOR ASSY DISP 4031
4 -- CONDUCTOR MOTOR 40B1
5 -- FRAME MOTOR 40B2
6 -- GEAR IDLER 40B3
7 -- GEAR IDLER AUG 40B4
8 -- GEAR IDLER AGI 40B5
9 110E 10200 SWITCH 71E1
10 848K 02570 HOUSING ASSY AUGER 40B6
11 -- FRAME ASSY DISP (with 12,13) 40B7
12 -- FRAME DISP 40B8
13 -- SEAL DISP AUG 40B9
14 113E 45540 CONNECTOR CRUM 71E2
15 -- SPRING DISP 40BB
16 -- JOINT ASSY DISP 40BC
17 -- HOLDER TCRU K 401K
18 -- HOLDER TCRU C 401C
19 -- HOLDER TCRU M 401M
20 -- HOLDER TCRU Y 401Y
21 -- TONER CARTRIDGE (K) 409K
22 -- TONER CARTRIDGE (C) 409C
23 -- TONER CARTRIDGE (M) 409M
24 -- TONER CARTRIDGE (Y) 409Y
(SCC) HARN ASSY TNR MOT
25 962K 52050 71E3
(J18,J19-J181,J182,J191,J192)
26 962K 51990 HARN ASSY TONER CRUM (J31-J311,J312,J313,J314) 71E4
27 962K 52150 HARN ASSY SIDE SW (J29-J291) 71E5
28 962K 57560 HARN ASSY TEST RL (J504-P5041) 71E6
29 -- LABEL HOLDER 40BD
30 809E 71190 SPRING-SHUTTER 40BE
96 604K 46340 KIT HOLDER TCRU K (with 17,29) 401K

97 604K 46350 KIT HOLDER TCRU C (with 18,29) 401C
98 604K 46360 KIT HOLDER TCRU M (with 19,29) 401M
99 604K 46370 KIT HOLDER TCRU Y (with 20,29) 401Y
5 – 14
PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [Illustration]
1
2
(P171)
(J171)
(J17)
(J47)
99 (with 3-6)
3
4
5
6
(P281)
8 7
Wsb05007GA
5 – 15
PL6.1 Transfer & Fuser [List]

126K 25041 FUSER ASSY (FX) 43AA
1 -- FUSER ASSY 115V (IBG) 43AA
-- FUSER ASSY 220V (IBG) 43AA
962K 52020 HARN ASSY FUSER 100V (J17,J47-P171) 71F1
2
962K 57490 HARN ASSY FUSER 200V (J17,J47-P171) 71F1
3 003E 73241 STOPPER PIVOT 50F1
4 -- PIVOT TRANS L 50F2
5 807E 15192 GEAR T4 50F3
6 006K 25551 SHAFT ASSY PIVOT 50F4
7 848K 03270 TRANSFER ASSY 50F5
8 848E 09620 COVER HARNESS 2 50F6
5 – 16
PL7.1 Drive [Illustration]
(P221)
6
(P211)
10
(P261)
COLOR MODE 7
SWITCHING SENSOR
(J24)
4
9
Wsb05008KA
5 – 17
PL7.1 Drive [List]

1 007K 94691 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY SUB (with6) 4523
2 007K 94685 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY MAIN (with5) 4521
3 807E 15100 GEAR P2 50G1
4 007K 94705 (SCC) DRIVE ASSY PH (with7-9) 5093
5 -- (SCC) MOTOR ASSY MAIN 4521
6 -- (SCC) MOTOR ASSY SUB 4523
930W 00113 SENSOR PHOTO 50G2
7
130E 87090 SENSOR PHOTO (ALTERNATE PARTS) 50G3
8 809E 70900 SPRING D3 50G4
9 809E 78840 SPRING C 50G5
10 013E 30830 BEARING REGI 50G6
5 – 18
PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [Illustration]
(J503)
8
5
10
10 7
5
11
9 (with 10)
(P101)
(P111)
12
(P401) (P3)
(P29)
Wsb05009GA
5 – 19
PL8.1 Electrical (1/2) [List]

1 127E 85360 (SCC) FAN MAIN 3301
2 054E 31592 DUCT FAN 31C1
3 -- SHIELD ASSY ESS 31C2
4 -- PLATE ESS 31C3
5 -- SCREW KNURLING 31C4
6 -- WASHER 31C5
7 -- FRAME ESS 31C6
8 -- PLATE IF 31C7
960K 37040 (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS FX (with 10) 7630
9 960K 36925 (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS IBG H (with 10) 7630
960K 36943 (ISC)(SCC) PWB ESS IBG L (with 10) 7630
10 -- NVM ROM 76B1
11 960K 36690 MULTI PROTOCOL CARD (IBG-H OPTION) 72B1
133K 25240 MEMORY CARD 256MB (IBG-H OPTION) 72B2
12
133K 25250 MEMORY CARD 512MB (IBG-H OPTION) 72B3
5 – 20
PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [Illustration]
(P501)
(P502) (P504)
(P503) (P47)
(P44)
1
(P40)
(P48)
2
3 5
(J44)
20
21
(P40)
(P41)
(P10) 22 6
(P15) (P11)
(P14) (P42)
(P17) (P22)
(P101) (P21)
(P31) (P24)
(P19) (P26)
(P18) (P23)
(P29) (P28)
(P16) (P20)
15
16 (J48)
(P144)
(P201) (T484)
14 7
(J482)
(J483)
17 9
8
19
18
(J484)
10
13 11
12
Wsb05010GA
5 – 21
PL8.2 Electrical (2/2) [List]

105K 22382 (SCC) PWBA LVPS 100V 7310
1
105K 22721 (SCC) PWBA LVPS 220V 7310
2 -- GUIDE HARNESS FSR 31D1
3 -- FRAME ASSY LVPS 31D2
4 -- --
5 962K 52120 HARN ASSY INTERLOCK (SW-J44) 32C1
6 -- GUIDE HARNESS AC 31D3
7 130E 93460 SENSOR HUM 72C1
8 -- BRACKET SW 31D4
962K 62110 (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR 100V (SW-J48,J482,J483) 7121
9
962K 62120 (SCC) HARN ASSY SW PWR 200V (SW-J48,J482,J483) 7121
962K 52160 (SCC) HARN ASSY GFI GND 100V (J484-T484) 71G1
10
962K 59630 (SCC) HARN ASSY GFI GND 200V (J484-T484) 71G1
11 908W 01201 BREAKER GFI 71G2
117K 34750 POWER CORD -JPN 7122
117E 26280 POWER CORD-AP-TW 7122
917W 03106 POWER CORD-FXA/FANZ 7122
917W 03110 POWER CORD-FXCL 7122
12
917W 03111 POWER CORD-FXK 7122
917W 03109 POWER CORD-FXP 7122
917W 03108 POWER CORD-AG/THFX/ICO 7122
917W 03107 POWER CORD-FXS/FXM/FXHK 7122
13 960K 37262 (SCC) PWBA MCU 7210
14 -- EDGING SADDLE 31D5
15 -- BRACKET MCU R 31D6
16 960K 32640 PWBA EEPROM (XPRO) 71G3
17 -- CLAMP 31D7
18 -- BRACKET MCU L 31D8
19 -- GUIDE HARNESS MCU 31D9
20 -- PLATE EARTH DRUM 31DB
21 -- PLATE EARTH FSR 31DC
22 108E 98760 ARRESTER ENE112D-10A 71G4
5 – 22
PL9.1 Harness [Illustration]
(J10) (J21)
1 7
(J11)
(J22)
(J101)
(J211)
2 8
(J14) (J221)
(J111) (J26)
3 9
(J261)
(J501)
(J40)
(J15)
(P262)
(J141)
10
4
(J42)
(J401)
(J502)
11
(J16)
5
(J161) (P422)
(J20) (J29)
(J144)
6 12
(J201)
(J2900)
Wsb05011GA
5 – 23
PL9.1 Harness [List]

1 962K 52080 HARN ASSY ESS (J10-J101) 71H1
2 962K 52090 HARN ASSY ESS VIDEO (J11-J111) 71H2
3 962K 52110 (SCC) HARN ASSY LVPS (J14-J141,J501) 71H3
4 962K 52100 (SCC) HARN ASSY 24V (J15-J502) 71H4
5 962K 51950 (SCC) HARN ASSY HVPS (J16-J161) 71H5
6 962K 51960 HARN ASSY HUM (J20-J201) 71H6
962K 52030 (SCC) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT FX (J21-J211) 71H7
7
962K 61720 (SCC) HARN ASSY MAIN MOT IBG (J21-J211) 71H8
8 962K 52040 (SCC) HARN ASSY SUB MOT (J22-J221) 71H9
9 962K 51980 (SCC) HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL (J26-J261,P262) 71HB
10 962K 52130 HARN ASSY ESS POWER (J40-J401) 71HC
11 962K 52000 HARN ASSY PHD XPRO (J42-J144,P422) 71HD
12 962K 52190 HARNESS ASSY B (J29-J2900) 71HE
5 – 24
Chapter 6 General
Chapter 6 General
Chapter 6 General CONTENTS
6.1 Configuration of Printer.............................................................................................6 - 1

6.1.1 Product Name ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.1.2 Basic Configuration....................................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.1.3 Functional Configuration ............................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.2 Electrical Properties..................................................................................................6 - 2
6.2.1 Power Source ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
6.2.2 Power Consumption...................................................................................................................... 6 - 2
6.2.3 Rush Current................................................................................................................................. 6 - 2
6.3 Mechanical Properties ..............................................................................................6 - 3
6.3.1 Dimensions/Mass of Printer .......................................................................................................... 6 - 3
6.3.2 Dimensions/Mass of Consumables and CRUs ............................................................................. 6 - 3
6.3.2.1 PHD Unit .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 3
6.3.2.2 FUSER CRU ........................................................................................................................ 6 - 3
6.3.2.3 Black toner cartridge ............................................................................................................ 6 - 4
6.3.2.4 Cyan toner cartridge ............................................................................................................ 6 - 4
6.3.2.5 Magenta toner cartridge ....................................................................................................... 6 - 4
6.3.2.6 Yellow toner cartridge .......................................................................................................... 6 - 4
6.3.3 Installation Space (min. installation space)................................................................................... 6 - 5
6.4 Functions ..................................................................................................................6 - 6
6.4.1 Recording System......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.4.2 Exposure System.......................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.4.3 Development System.................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.4.4 Fixing System ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.4.5 Resolution ..................................................................................................................................... 6 - 6
6.4.6 Operation Mode ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 6
6.4.7 Warm-up Time .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 7
6.4.8 FPOT (First Print Output Time)*1 ................................................................................................. 6 - 7
6.4.9 Continuous Printing Speed ........................................................................................................... 6 - 7
6.4.10 Input Properties........................................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.4.10.1 Paper pick-up system ......................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.4.10.2 Paper pick-up capacity........................................................................................................ 6 - 8
6.4.11 Output Properties........................................................................................................................ 6 - 8
6.4.11.1 Paper delivery system......................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.4.11.2 Paper delivery capacity....................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.4.11.3 Delivery paper size/mass.................................................................................................... 6 - 8
6.4.11.4 Full stack detection ............................................................................................................. 6 - 8
6.4.12 Manual Duplex ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 8
6.4.13 Paper .......................................................................................................................................... 6 - 9
6.4.13.1 Paper type .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 9
6.4.13.2 Paper size ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 9
6.5 Consumables..........................................................................................................6 - 11
6.5.1 Items of Consumables ................................................................................................................ 6 - 11
6.5.2 Consumable Life ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 11
6.5.3 Periodic Replacing Parts (Reference)......................................................................................... 6 - 11
Chapter 6 General
6.6 Operating Environment...........................................................................................6 - 13

6.6.1 Installation Temperature / Humidity ............................................................................................ 6 - 13
6.6.2 Installation Altitude...................................................................................................................... 6 - 13
6.6.3 Installation Horizontality .............................................................................................................. 6 - 13
6.6.4 Ambient Lighting ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 13
6.6.5 Storage Temperature of a Toner Cartridge................................................................................. 6 - 13
6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions ............................................................................6 - 14
6.7.1 Safety Standard .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 14
6.7.2 Laser Safety Standard ................................................................................................................ 6 - 14
6.7.3 EMI.............................................................................................................................................. 6 - 14
6.7.4 Noise........................................................................................................................................... 6 - 14
6.8 Print image Quality .................................................................................................6 - 15
6.8.1 Image Quality Guarantee Conditions.......................................................................................... 6 - 15
6.8.1.1 Environmental conditions.................................................................................................... 6 - 15
6.8.1.2 Guaranteed paper............................................................................................................... 6 - 15
6.8.1.3 Paper condition ................................................................................................................... 6 - 15
6.8.1.4 Printer condition .................................................................................................................. 6 - 15
6.8.1.5 Image quality guaranteed area .......................................................................................... 6 - 15
6.8.1.6 Criterion .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 15
6.9 Option .....................................................................................................................6 - 16
6.9.1 Option to be Installed by Users................................................................................................... 6 - 16
6.10 ESS Specification .................................................................................................6 - 17
6.10.1 External Interface...................................................................................................................... 6 - 17
6.10.1.1 USB .................................................................................................................................. 6 - 17
6.10.1.2 Ethernet ............................................................................................................................ 6 - 17
6.10.2 Network Protocol....................................................................................................................... 6 - 18
6.10.2.1 Printing Protocol................................................................................................................ 6 - 18
6.10.2.2 Other Protocols ................................................................................................................. 6 - 19
6.10.3 Decomposer.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 20
6.10.3.1 PDL ................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20
6.10.3.2 Font................................................................................................................................... 6 - 20
6.10.3.3 Image Area ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 20
6.10.3.4 PostScript 3 Fonts............................................................................................................. 6 - 20
6.10.4 Job Control................................................................................................................................ 6 - 21
6.10.4.1 Cancel Print ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.10.4.2 Job Recovery .................................................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.10.4.3 Job Time Out .................................................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.10.4.4 Printer Auditron (DPC1110 only) ...................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.10.4.5 RAM DISK......................................................................................................................... 6 - 21
6.10.4.6 IP Filter.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 21
6.10.5 Logging ..................................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.10.5.1 Job Logging ...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.10.5.2 Error Logging .................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.10.5.3 Billing Count...................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
6.10.6 Non-Genuine Mode................................................................................................................... 6 - 22
Chapter 6 General

6.10.7 Utility Print................................................................................................................................. 6 - 23
6.10.7.1 Printer Settings List........................................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.10.7.2 Font List Print.................................................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.10.7.3 Job Log Print..................................................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.10.7.4 PCL Macro List Print ......................................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.10.7.5 Print Meter Print ................................................................................................................ 6 - 23
6.10.7.6 Stored Document List Print ............................................................................................... 6 - 23
6.10.7.7 Error Log Print................................................................................................................... 6 - 24
6.10.7.8 Supported Language ........................................................................................................ 6 - 24
6.10.7.9 Demonstration Print .......................................................................................................... 6 - 24
6.10.7.10 PCL Macro List Print ....................................................................................................... 6 - 24
6.10.7.11 Print Meter Print .............................................................................................................. 6 - 24
6.10.8 Software Specifications............................................................................................................. 6 - 25
6.10.8.1 Firmware Update Tool ...................................................................................................... 6 - 25
6.10.8.2 Linux Driver (FX-PDF Driver)............................................................................................ 6 - 25
6.10.8.3 Mac Driver (FX-PDF Driver).............................................................................................. 6 - 25
6.10.8.4 Utility Software .................................................................................................................. 6 - 26
6.10.8.5 3rd Party Software Support............................................................................................... 6 - 26
6.10.8.6 Linkage with FX Brand Software....................................................................................... 6 - 26
6.10.8.7 Linkage with Other Brand Software .................................................................................. 6 - 27
6.11 Tools and Service Consumables..........................................................................6 - 29
6.11.1 Tools ......................................................................................................................................... 6 - 29
6.11.2 Service Consumable................................................................................................................. 6 - 29
6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110 ..............................................................6 - 30
6.12.1 Check the Contents .................................................................................................................. 6 - 30
6.12.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes..................................................................................................... 6 - 31
6.12.3 Set the Toner Cartridges........................................................................................................... 6 - 31
6.12.4 Set the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................. 6 - 32
6.12.5 Connect the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 6 - 34
6.12.6 Switch On the Power ................................................................................................................ 6 - 35
6.12.7 Connect the Network Cable ...................................................................................................... 6 - 36
6.12.8 Set the IP Address .................................................................................................................... 6 - 36
6.12.9 Install the Print Driver................................................................................................................ 6 - 39
6.12.10 Connect the USB Cable.......................................................................................................... 6 - 40
6.12.11 Load the Paper ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 40
6.12.12 View the User Guide (PDF) .................................................................................................... 6 - 42
6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B ............................................................6 - 43
6.13.1 Check the Contents .................................................................................................................. 6 - 43
6.13.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes..................................................................................................... 6 - 44
6.13.3 Set the Toner Cartridges........................................................................................................... 6 - 44
6.13.4 Set the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................. 6 - 45
6.13.5 Install the Print Driver................................................................................................................ 6 - 48
6.13.6 Connect the USB Cable............................................................................................................ 6 - 49
6.13.7 Connect the Power Cord........................................................................................................... 6 - 49
6.13.8 Switch On the Power ................................................................................................................ 6 - 49
Chapter 6 General
6.13.9 Load the Paper ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 50
6.13.10 View the User Guide (PDF) .................................................................................................... 6 - 52
6.14 Printer Environment Settings................................................................................6 - 53
6.14.1 Supported Operating Environments.......................................................................................... 6 - 53
6.14.2 Setting the Network Environment (DocuPrint C1110 only) ....................................................... 6 - 55
6.14.3 Installing a Printer Driver........................................................................................................... 6 - 63
6.15 Control Panel Manu Tree ....................................................................................6 - 64
Chapter 6 General
6.1 Configuration of Printer

6.1.1 Product Name
Product Name Destination XJ Code Product Code Serial No.

DocuPrint C1110 Taiwan XJ-TNJ TL300451 100001~199999
AP/Korea XJ-TNK TL300452 200001~299999
China XJ-TNL TL300453 300001~399999
DocuPrint C1110B Taiwan XJ-TNM TL300454 500001~599999
AP/Korea XJ-TNN TL300455 600001~699999
China XJ-TNP TL300456 700001~799999
6.1.2 Basic Configuration

The printer has the following basic configurations depending on the destination.
• print engine main unit (SSI and 250 feeder unit as the standard paper feeding)
• consumables (CRU)
Wsb08001GA
6.1.3 Functional Configuration

Functional configuration of this printer is shown below.
Wsb08002GA
6–1
Chapter 6 General
6.2 Electrical Properties

6.2.1 Power Source
Two types of power source as follows are available for this printer, which are selected according to the
specifications.
- 100V/120V printer:............. voltage: 100-127VAC ±10% (90 - 140V), frequency: 50/60Hz ± 3Hz
current: 11A or less
phase: Single-phase two-wire system
- 220/240V printer: ............... voltage: 220-240VAC ±10% (198 - 264V), frequency: 50/60Hz ± 3Hz
current: 5A or less (230V printer)
phase: Single-phase two-wire system
6.2.2 Power Consumption

Power consumption in each operation mode at rated voltage input
Operation mode Power Consumption

Running mode (F/C) 420W or less
Running mode (B/W) 420W or less
Standby mode 95W or less
110V: 7W or less
Sleep mode
220V: 9W or less
Low Power mode* 18W or less
* The power consumption meets International Energy Star Program.
6.2.3 Rush Current

When the power switch is turned on, the inrush current shall be maximum 50A (Cold start) / 135A (Hot
start) at first 2.5ms, and 80A (120V/220V/240V) / 85A (100V) within 10ms.
6–2
Chapter 6 General
6.3 Mechanical Properties

6.3.1 Dimensions/Mass of Printer
Width(mm) Depth(mm) Height(mm) Mass(kg)

400 370 380 18 (with CRU)
* Depth of M/C is without paper tray.
Wsb08003GA
6.3.2 Dimensions/Mass of Consumables and CRUs

6.3.2.1 PHD Unit
Width: 332mm
Depth: 138mm
Height: 196mm
Mass: 3.4kg
Reference: The PHD Unit has CRUM (CRU
memory) to record
information.
Wsb08006KA
6.3.2.2 FUSER CRU

Width: 393mm
Depth: 121mm
Height: 130mm
Mass: 1.5kg
Wsb08004KA
6–3
Chapter 6 General
6.3.2.3 Black toner cartridge
Width: 185.8mm
Depth: 63mm
Height: 40.5mm
Mass: 0.1kg
Reference:The Black toner cartridge has
CRUM (CRU memory) to record
information.
Wsb08005KA
6.3.2.4 Cyan toner cartridge

Width: 185.8mm
Depth: 63mm
Height: 40.5mm
Mass: 0.1kg
Reference:The Cyan toner cartridge has
information.
Wsb08005KA
6.3.2.5 Magenta toner cartridge

Width: 185.8mm
Depth: 63mm
Height: 40.5mm
Mass: 0.1kg
Reference:The Magenta toner cartridge
has CRUM (CRU memory) to record
information.
Wsb08005KA
6.3.2.6 Yellow toner cartridge

Width: 185.8mm
Depth: 63mm
Height: 40.5mm
Mass: 0.1kg
Reference:The Yellow toner cartridge has
information.
Wsb08005KA
6–4
Chapter 6 General
6.3.3 Installation Space (min. installation space)

Minimum space as shown below is required to install the printer when it is used for normal objects.
(Space occupied by the operator is not included.)
Top view
100mm
100mm 250mm
600mm
Wsb08007GA
Front view
100mm 400mm 250mm

Wsb08008GA
Side view
Front Cover
600mm 100mm
Wsb08009GA
6–5
Chapter 6 General
6.4 Functions
6.4.1 Recording System
Tandem electro-photographic system employing OPC drum and direct transfer by the transport belt
6.4.2 Exposure System

Four laser beams semiconductor laser beam scanning system
6.4.3 Development System

Double components trickle development
6.4.4 Fixing System

Free belt NIP Quick thermal fusing system
6.4.5 Resolution
600 dots/25.4mm (fixed)
6.4.6 Operation Mode

The printer can be operated in either of 4 operation modes. The modes are switched over by command
from the printer controller or change of printer operation, etc.
Proceeding from power ON, low power mode or sleep mode to standby mode will take place after going
through a warm up stage.
- Running mode
State in running or recording operation.
Fixing system: Held at operating temperature.
Exposure system: Operating status
Recording system: Operating status
- Standby mode
Ready state
Fixing system: Held at ready temperature.
Exposure system: Stop status
Recording system: Stop status
- Low Power mode
Complete resting state. Compatible to E-Star and BAM requirement.
Fixing system: Stop status
-Sleep mode
Resting state from the sleep state.
Fixing system: Stop status
6–6
Chapter 6 General
6.4.7 Warm-up Time

When nominal voltage (100V, 115V, 220V) is applied, the printer will proceed to standby mode from
POWER-ON within 16 seconds.
Reference: Measured at 22°C, 55% RH, nominal voltage, plain paper mode.
6.4.8 FPOT (First Print Output Time)*1

21.5 sec*2 (when loading A4 SEF in the tray 1)
*1 The time from when the printer receives a print job until the first page is delivered in the output tray.
*2 The values are measured based on the test pattern of Fuji Xerox.
6.4.9 Continuous Printing Speed

The continuous printing speed is shown in the below.
Test Paper Paper Paper Color/

OS PDL Average Print Speed
Chart Size Type Tray BW
XP PCL6 J11E A4 SEF Plain Tray Color 78.0s, or less
PCL6 J11E A4 SEF Plain Tray BW 61.5s, or less
OS X PS J11E A4 SEF Plain Tray Color 645s (Buckeye) x 12/20, or less
PS J11E A4 SEF Plain Tray BW 390s (Buckeye) x 16/25, or less
NOTE Measurement is conducted five times. Print speed is caluculated as average

of the three values after the maximum and minimum values are excluded.
Color: 12 sheets/min*
BW: 16 sheets/min*
*When continuously printing a single document of A4 size loaded in SEF.
6–7
Chapter 6 General
6.4.10 Input Properties

6.4.10.1 Paper pick-up system
- Paper pick-up with paper tray

Feeding method of this printer is ARRF method.
6.4.10.2 Paper pick-up capacity
- Paper pick-up with paper tray

• 250 sheet Paper Tray : 250 sheets or below 27.6mm of standard paper
- SSI paper pick-up

1 sheet
6.4.11 Output Properties

6.4.11.1 Paper delivery system
Paper can be delivered by the following method.
- FACE DOWN delivery
6.4.11.2 Paper delivery capacity

250 sheets (Letter/A4 standard paper)
6.4.11.3 Delivery paper size/mass

All paper sizes applicable to this printer
6.4.11.4 Full stack detection

non
6.4.12 Manual Duplex

The printer supports manual duplex function. The user operation is as follows.
- The user chooses manual duplex function on the printer driver and starts printing.
- After job submission, the help window instructs duplex operation comes up on the PC screen.
- When side-1 printing is completed, Continue lamp on the operation panel starts blinking.
- The user picks up side-1-printed paper on the output tray and set them back to the input tray.
- The user presses Continue button on the operation panel.
- The printer starts printing side-2.
NOTE This function is available only for PCL6.

Mixed paper size job can not be duplex.
6–8
Chapter 6 General
6.4.13 Paper
6.4.13.1 Paper type
- Standard:
Manual feeder:
Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2),
Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Labels,
Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2),
Coated 3 (164 - 216 g/m2), Envelope, Recycled
Tray 1:
Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Labels,
Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2), Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2),
Coated 3 (164 - 216 g/m2), Envelope, Recycled
- Manual 2-sided printing:

Manual feeder:
Heavyweight 2 (164 - 216 g/m2), Coated 1 (60 - 105 g/m2),
Coated 2 (106 - 163 g/m2), Recycled
Tray 1:
Plain, Bond, Heavyweight 1 (106 - 163 g/m2), Recycled
Important
* Use only the recommended paper. Using paper other than that recommended for the printer can
cause printing problems. Do not use ink jet paper or postcards made out of recycled paper. Print-
ing on used paper or on its reverse side may impair print quality.
* For information about the recommended paper, contact our Customer Support Center or your
dealers.
6.4.13.2 Paper size

- Manual feeder:
A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5",
COM-10 (4.1 x 9.5"), Monarch (3.9 x 7.5"),
DL (110 x 220 mm), C5 (162 x 229 mm),
custom size paper (width: 76.2 - 215.9 mm; length: 127 - 355.6 mm)
- Tray 1:
A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5",
COM-10 (4.1 x 9.5"), Monarch (3.9 x 7.5"),
DL (110 x 220 mm), C5 (162 x 229 mm),
- Manual 2-sided printing:

A4, B5, A5, 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11", 7.25 x 10.5",
6–9
Chapter 6 General
- Image loss: 4 mm from the top, bottom, left, and right edges
6 – 10
Chapter 6 General
6.5 Consumables
Consumables are usually replaced by costumers. In the event of recovery of failure attributable to
consumables or isolation of failure, you may replace them.
6.5.1 Items of Consumables

- Black toner cartridge
Cartridge to supply black toner to the development unit.
Black toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.
- Yellow toner cartridge
Cartridge to supply yellow toner to the development unit.
Yellow toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.
- Magenta toner cartridge
Cartridge to supply magenta toner to the development unit.
Magenta toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.
- Cyan toner cartridge
Cartridge to supply cyan toner to the development unit.
Cyan toner cartridge has CRUM (CRU memory) to record information.
6.5.2 Consumable Life

- Black toner cartridge: 2kPV
- Yellow toner cartridge: 2kPV
- Magenta toner cartridge: 2kPV
- Cyan toner cartridge: 2kPV
6.5.3 Periodic Replacing Parts (Reference)

- PHD (Drum Cartridge) 20kPV
- FUSER Unit 50kPV
- Feed Roller Unit 50kPV
6 – 11
Chapter 6 General
PL6.1.1
FUSER ASSY
PL4.1.21
PHD ASSY
PL5.1.21
TONER CARTRIDGE (K)
PL2.1.5
SEPARATOR ROLLER ASSY
PL5.1.22
TONER CARTRIDGE (C)
PL5.1.23
TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
PL5.1.24
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Wsb08010GA
6 – 12
Chapter 6 General
6.6 Operating Environment

6.6.1 Installation Temperature / Humidity
Installation temperature and humidity on the condition without condensation is as follows.
At operating: 5-32 °C, 15-85%RH (No condensation)
At standby: minus 20-40 °C, 5-85%RH (No condensation)
6.6.2 Installation Altitude

0 to 3,500m
6.6.3 Installation Horizontality

Longitudinal levelness of table surface on which the printer is installed:1 degree or under
Lateral levelness of table surface on which the printer is installed :1 degree or under
6.6.4 Ambient Lighting

3,000 Lux or less (without no direct sun beams)
6.6.5 Storage Temperature of a Toner Cartridge

The guaranteed period of the print cartridge before unpacked is as follows:
Normal conditions: 24 months under 0 to 35°C, 15 to 80% RH.
Harsh conditions: Up to one month under -20 to 0°C and 35 to 40°C, 5 to 15% RH and 80 to 95% RH.
The storage altitude shall be 0 to 3,500m. Can be extended to 0 to 15,000m when shipped by air.
(Provided that the cargo bay is pressurized to 70.9275Kpa or higher.)
6 – 13
Chapter 6 General
6.7 Safety / Environment Conditions

6.7.1 Safety Standard
- 110V system
UL60950 3rd Edition
CSA C22.2 No.60950-00
- 200V system
IEC60950 3rd Edition / EN60950 2000
6.7.2 Laser Safety Standard

- 110V system
FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchapter J, Section 1010, 1040
- 200V system
IEC60825-1 Amendment 1 + Amendment 2 / EN60825-1 Amendment 1 + Amendment 2 Class 1
Laser Product, CE Directive, Nordic Agency Approvals
6.7.3 EMI
- 110V system (US)
FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B
- 200V system (EC)
EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22), Class B
6.7.4 Noise
Noise of priting is as follows.
Noise Sound power

Sound pressure (dBA)
Printer level (B)
During printing 6.3 55
During stand-by 4.0 26
*Measured according to ISO7779 and declared according to ISO9296.
Unit B: acoustic power level (LwAd)
Unit (dBA): radiated sound pressure (by stander point ) (LpAm)
6 – 14
Chapter 6 General
6.8 Print image Quality

6.8.1 Image Quality Guarantee Conditions
The image quality is specified and guaranteed under the following conditions.
6.8.1.1 Environmental conditions

Environment condition for evaluating image quality
Temperature: 10-32 °C
Humidity: 15-85%RH
6.8.1.2 Guaranteed paper

The print image quality specified here is guaranteed with standard paper fed from the paper tray.
Evaluation is performed with the maximum size of each standard paper.
- Black and White printing: FX paper A4
- Color printing: FX C2 paper A4
6.8.1.3 Paper condition

The paper used is fresh paper immediately after unpacked, which has been left in the operating
environment for 12 hours before unpacking.
6.8.1.4 Printer condition

The print image quality specified in this section is guaranteed with the printer in normal condition.
6.8.1.5 Image quality guaranteed area

The print image quality specified in this section is guaranteed in the guaranteed image quality area
specified in this manual. (Refer to Chapter 3)
6.8.1.6 Criterion
The print image quality is guaranteed with the Spec. In rate = 90% (γ = 90%).
6 – 15
Chapter 6 General
6.9 Option
6.9.1 Option to be Installed by Users
Users can install the following units.
- Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)
- Network Expansion Card
6 – 16
Chapter 6 General
6.10 ESS Specification

6.10.1 External Interface
6.10.1.1 USB
Item Specification
Connector Type-B x 1
Protocol USB2.0, HighSpeed
Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP (32/64bit)/Server 2003 (32/64bit)/Vista
Supported Client Mac OSX
Linux
6.10.1.2 Ethernet
Item Specification
Connection 10 Base-T/100Base-T
Protocol See “10.2 Network Protocol” for details
Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP (32/64bit)/Server 2003 (32/64bit)/Vista
Supported Client Mac OSX
Linux
6 – 17
Chapter 6 General
6.10.2 Network Protocol

6.10.2.1 Printing Protocol
Maximum
Protocol Transport Supported Client
Session*2
Windows 98SE, Me, 2000, XP (32/64), Server 2003
(32/64), VISTA
LPR TCP/IP 1
Linux*4
Mac OS X*4
Port9100 TCP/IP 1 (32/64), VISTA
Linux*4
IPP *1 TCP/IP 5 (32/64), VISTA
Mac OS 10.3,10.4*4
TCP/IP 5
SMB*1 (32/64), VISTA
NetBEUI 5 Windows 98SE, Me, 2000
NetWare
TCP/IP*5 1 NetWare5, 6,6.5*3
(DS-PServer)*1
EtherTalk*1 ATP/DDP 1 Mac OS X*4
FTP TCP/IP 1
(32/64), VISTA
*1: Optional multi-protocol processor card is required
*2: Maximum session is defined as the number of print request acceptable at the same time.
*3: NetWare 6.5 is required to apply support pack 1.1 or later provided by Novell.
*4: Supported PS Driver.
*5: Available for versions later than NetWare5. BS-Pserver mode is not supported. Only DS-Pserver
mode is available.
6 – 18
Chapter 6 General
6.10.2.2 Other Protocols
Protocol Transport Support

Supported MIB]
MIB-II (RFC1213)
SNMP UDP/IP HostResources MIB (RFC1514)
PrinterMIB (RFC1759)
XCMI2.4
[Client]
(Windows 2000/XP, x64)
Netscape Communicator 7.x or later
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
HTTP / HTTPS*1 TCP/IP Firefox 1.5 or later
(CWIS) (Mac OS X 10.2 or later)
Firefox 1.5 or later
Safari 2.0 or later
JavaScript must be set/ready to operate on the above browsers.
[Supported Server OS]
Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server
DHCP UDP/IP
2003
Linux (RedHat8/9, SuSE9), Unix(Solaris 9)
[Supported Server OS]
Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server
BOOTP UDP/IP
2003
Unix(Solaris 9)
[Supported OS]
RARP TCP/IP
Unix (Solaris 9)
AutoIP TCP/IP -
[Supported OS]
WINS*1 TCP/IP Windows NT 4.0 Server, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server
2003
E-Mail Alert
SMTP/POP3 TCP/IP [Supported Mail Server]
Lotus Notes, MS-Exchange, Eudora
FTP TCP/IP Firmware Update
Supported OS]
Bonjour UDP/IP
Mac OS 10.2 or later
[Supported OS]
DDNS*1 TCP/IP
Windows 2000 Server, Windows 2003 Server, Unix
*1: Optional Multi-Protocol Card is required
6 – 19
Chapter 6 General
6.10.3 Decomposer
6.10.3.1 PDL
PDL/Emulation
Interface/Protocol
PCL5c PCL6 PS3
USB Yes Yes Yes
LPR Yes Yes Yes
Port9100 Yes Yes Yes
IPP Yes Yes Yes
SMB Yes Yes Yes
NetWare (P-Server) Yes Yes Yes
EtherTalk (A-PAP) No No Yes
FTP No No Yes
Yes: Supported, No: Not supported
6.10.3.2 Font
81 fonts and 36 symbols for PCL, 137 fonts for PS3 are available as built in font.
6.10.3.3 Image Area
Usable Area Size Maximum : 215.9mm (8.5 in.) x 355.6mm (14 in.)
4.1 mm each from four edges (left, right, top and bottom) of
Unprintable Area
paper
Printable Area Maximum : 207.9mm (8.18 in.) x 347.6mm (13.68 in.)
Print Image Quality Guaranteed
Same as Printable Area
Area
6.10.3.4 PostScript 3 Fonts

137 fonts for PS3 are available as built-in fonts.
6 – 20
Chapter 6 General
6.10.4 Job Control

6.10.4.1 Cancel Print
A print job in process can be cancelled at the operation panel.
6.10.4.2 Job Recovery

When a job fails due to recoverable error like a paper jam, the printer automatically restarts the job
after the jammed paper is removed.
6.10.4.3 Job Time Out

When job transmission is interrupted for a certain period of time (Time can be changed at the oper-
ation panel and unlimited time can be selected), the print data is deleted as an error.
6.10.4.4 Printer Auditron (DPC1110 only)

Auditron is a function to specify the availability of color print and to limit print volume per user. Only
administrators are allowed to make limitation settings from the CWIS.
User name and password is embedded in the print job in order to identify who the job is sent from.
User name and password are entered by user from the printer driver.
The printer can support maximum 5 accounts.
6.10.4.5 RAM DISK

RAM DISK functions when memory is expanded, realizing Collation, Secure Print, Proof Print, Form
Overlay, and Font Download.
6.10.4.6 IP Filter
The user can select to accept or reject jobs for the specified IP address. Up to 5 IP addresses can
be specified.
IP filter is available only to LPR and Port 9100.
6 – 21
Chapter 6 General
6.10.5 Logging
6.10.5.1 Job Logging
The printer can retain up to 20 job logs. Job log can be printed instantly according to the user's
request or automatically printed when the number of the retained job logs has reached 10. Job log
includes the following information:
• Job sent date and time
• Input interface (USB, Lpd, Port9100)
• Document name (File name)
• Output color
• User name/Host name
• Number of printed pages (Color, B/W)
• Number of printed impressions (Color, B/W)
• Paper size
• Result (Successful, Error, etc.)
6.10.5.2 Error Logging

The printer can retain up to 42 jam errors and up to 42 fatal errors.
The user can pirnt error log by the panel operation.
Jam error log includes the following information:
• PV counter when jam has occurred
• Name of Jam
Fatal error log includes the following information:

• PV counter when error has occurred
• Error code
6.10.5.3 Billing Count
NOTE The same data is stored in two or more addresses in one IC. Datacheck
(checksum etc.) is conducted.
NOTE When ESS is replaced, IC can be transferred. (IC is mounted on socket)
Counter Description
Color Print Counter Count the number of paper printed in color
B/W Print Counter Count the number of paper printed in B/W
Total Print Counter Count the total number of paper printed in color and B/W
6.10.6 Non-Genuine Mode

When life of toner cartridge has ended, the printer stops accepting print request (life of toner car-
tridge is counted by the counter in CRUM). Taking into consideration that some users use refilled
toner cartridges, the printer can accept print request by the user’s panel operation even if life of
toner cartridge has ended. When the mode has changed so that the printer does not stop even after
life of toner cartridge ends, the printer displays a message on the operation panel to inform the user
of the mode change. When the printer operates in this mode, print image quality is not guaranteed.
Also, remaining toner level is not displayed (as CRUM data can not be guaranteed).
6 – 22
Chapter 6 General
6.10.7 Utility Print

6.10.7.1 Printer Settings List
Printer Settings List can be printed according to the user's request.
Printer Settings List is printed in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper
tray.
Printer Settings List includes the following information:
[Title]
[Product name logo]
[General]
Total Impressions, Total Color Impressions, Total Black Impressions, Memory
Capacity, Printer language, Number of Fonts Available, PostScript Version,
PostScript Serial Number, Firmware Version, Boot Version, Engine Version,
PostScript CRD Version, Default Paper, Default Plain, Default Label, Default
Language
[Network]
Firmware Version, MAC Address, Ethernet Settings, TCP/IP, LPR, Port9100, IPP*,
FTP, Netware*, Bonjour, HTTPS-SSL/TLS*, EtherTalk*, SNMP, E-Mail Alert, Internet
Services, IP Filter
*: Optional Multi-Protocol Card is required.
[Print Volume]
Print volume for each paper size
6.10.7.2 Font List Print

Font List can be printed by the user's request.
Font List is printed in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray.
PCL or PS Font List can be printed using the control panel.
Font List is printed on A4 or Letter paper in the automatically selected paper tray.
YMCK color patterns are printed on the Font List. (PCL Printer Driver Only)
6.10.7.3 Job Log Print

The printer can store a record of recently printed jobs and print Job Log. Job Log can be instantly
printed or automatically printed when the number of print jobs processed has reached the specified
number. Job Log is printed in B/W on A4 paper in the tray.
6.10.7.4 PCL Macro List Print

PCL Macro List can be printed by the user's operation. PCL Macro List is printed on A4 or Letter size
paper in the automatically selected paper tray.
6.10.7.5 Print Meter Print

Print Meter Print can be printed by the user's operation. Print Meter is printed on A4 or Letter size
paper in the automatically selected paper tray.
6.10.7.6 Stored Document List Print

The list of documents stored in the printer by Secure Print/Proof Print can be printed by the user's
operation.
The list is printed on A4 or Letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray.
6 – 23
Chapter 6 General
6.10.7.7 Error Log Print
Error History Report can be printed according to the user's request.
Error History Report in B/W on A4 or letter size paper in the automatically selected paper tray.
6.10.7.8 Supported Language

The user can switch language on the operation panel or EWS (Language used in the EWS is
switched in conjunction with the language used in the PC Browser.
NOTE The PC Browser must be able to indicate that language.
6.10.7.9 Demonstration Print

The following three types are under consideration for “Demonstration Print” menus.
Demo Print
|-A4 Sample Demonstration Print (A4)
6.10.7.10 PCL Macro List Print

PCL Macro List can be printed by the user's operation. PCL Macro List is printed on A4 size paper
in the automatically selected paper tray.
6.10.7.11 Print Meter Print

Print Meter Print can be printed by the user's operation. Print Meter is printed on A4 size paper in the
automatically selected paper tray.
6 – 24
Chapter 6 General
6.10.8 Software Specifications

6.10.8.1 Firmware Update Tool
By using firmware update tool, firmware update is easy operation once update data is acquired until
it is completed.
This tool runs under the Windows environment.
This tool runs under the USB and network environment.
Language: English
6.10.8.2 Linux Driver (FX-PDF Driver)

The PDF driver that prints using the FX-PDF function of the device is provided.
For distribution, operation check is performed in the following environments (but, no guarantee of
proper operation).
- ERed Hat Enterprise Linux v.4 WS
- ENovell SUSE Linux desktop 10.
For printing system, depends on CUPS (Common Unix Printing System).
Tcl/Tk 8.3.5 or above is necessary to be installed.
For language, supports English
The RPM format installer is provided (including un-installation function)
The following print functions are available.

- Number of copies, Collate, Paper size*, Output color, Print mode, 2-sided print, Layout, Paper
type, Paper tray,
Job type
*: Custom size is not supported.
The following functions are displayed on the UI because this driver is common between the
models. But, it is
disabled on this printer due to device limitation.
- Stapler, Punch
The Linux driver is provided on the Web.

Language: English
6.10.8.3 Mac Driver (FX-PDF Driver)

The PDF driver that prints using the FX-PDF function of the device is provided.
Supports Mac OS X 10.3 and 10.4
(When 10.3 is custom-installed, "BSD system" also needs to be installed)
(For 10.4, Macintosh with Intel CPU is included)
Depends on CUPS, the OS-standard printing system.
For language, supports English only.
The installer is provided.

The uninstaller is not provided.
The following print functions are available.

- Number of copies, Collate, Paper size, Paper orientation, N-up, Page order specification,
Output color, Print mode, Paper type, Paper tray, Job type, Authentication settings
6 – 25
Chapter 6 General
*: Custom size is not supported.
The Mac driver is provided on the Web and Driver CD KIT.
Language: English
6.10.8.4 Utility Software

- Network Setting Tool (Wired LANÅFIP Setup Utility)(Product H only)
Network setting is available.
Network Setting Tool is included in the Software Pack CD-ROM.
- DPU (Direct Print Utility)

For Windows 98/Me
- FX USB
For Windows 98/Me
Font Download Tool

PCL5 forms and fonts can be downloaded to RAM DISK.
6.10.8.5 3rd Party Software Support

The following 3rd Party Softwares are supported:
- Mail Client Software (for StatusMessenger)
- Microsoft Outlook Express (6 or later)
- Microsoft Outlook2003
- Netscape (Mail) (7 or later)
- Ftp Client Software

- Console command of Windows Me/2000/XP/x64 XP
- Console command of Mac OSX, Linux (Red Hat Enterprise Linux v.4 WS,Novell SUSE
Linux desktop 10. )*1
*1: Support only FTP user command from command line
6.10.8.6 Linkage with FX Brand Software

The printer links up with the following softwares provided by FX
- DocuHouse
Linkage with printer management software "DocuHouse" is possible.
DocuHouse history service is supported.
Features and performance: Comply with the acceptance criteria of DocuHouse program
Support timing: Post Launch (Comply with the support schedule of DocuHouse program)
Table below shows the Language and Supported DocuHouse.
English OS KO/TC/SC OS
*1
DocuHouse Supported Supported*2
*1: Support with Windows2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, Vista(include x64).
*2: Using English UI
6 – 26
Chapter 6 General
- PrintXchange
PrintXchange is not supported
- ARC-opl
ARC-opl is not supported (currently Japanese version only)
- CentreWare Flow Services

CentreWare Flow Services is not supported
- TrustMark Basic
TrustMark Basic is not supported (currently domestic ART-EX version only)
6.10.8.7 Linkage with Other Brand Software

The printer links up with the following softwares provided by other companies (except for FX).
- Citrix MetaFrame and Presentation Server
- SAP SAP R/3
- Print Utility for MetaFrame (Linkage with Citrix MetaFrame)

Citrix MetaFrame and Presentation Server are supported.
Develop basic linkage software, “Print Utility for MetaFrame” for linkage.
Features and performance: Comply with the standard of basic distribution output program.
Support timing: PostLaunch (Comply with the support schedule of the basic linkage program.
About within one month after product launch)
- Interstage (Advance Certified)

The printer does not link up with Fujitsu Interstage.
- SAP R/3
FX device type file (V1.x.x.) is provided. (See Table Language & Device Type Name)
Test script of FX device type file (English and Japanese prepared) must be output properly.
The development division performs the test. (CPF)
Support timing: At Launch
Reference URL http://www.fujixerox.co.jp/solution/kikanbunsan/sap/

Language & Device Type Name (V1.xx)
Language Device name (PCL) Device type name (PS)
English ZFXPCL ZFXPST
Korean ZKPFXPCL -
Chinese (simplified) ZCNFXPCL -
Chinese (Traditional) ZTWFXPCL -
Language & Device Type Name (V2.xx)

Language Device name (PCL) Device type name (PS)
English - ZFXPST
Korean - -
Chinese (simplified) - -
Chinese (Traditional) - -
6 – 27
Chapter 6 General
- IBM AS400 (IBM Printing Utility for Personal Communication)
Japan only. Not supported.
- JP1(Drop all model support) from SRD)

Not supported.
6 – 28
Chapter 6 General
6.11 Tools and Service Consumables

6.11.1 Tools
There are no tools that are specific to this machine.
Basic Tool
6.11.2 Service Consumable

There are no service consumables that are specific to this machine.
6 – 29
Chapter 6 General
6.12 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110

6.12.1 Check the Contents
- Printer
- Control panel label (Can be placed on the control panel as necessary)
- Setup Guide
- Safety Notes
- Power cord
- Driver CD Kit - PS Driver Library CD
NOTE Interface cables and paper must be purchased separately.

When you purchase additional memory, install it following the User Guide
(PDF) provided with the Driver CD Kit.
When you purchase the optional network expansion card, install it following
the installation guide.
6 – 30
Chapter 6 General
6.12.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes

Shipping Tapes
Do not remove
these tapes in
this step.
6.12.3 Set the Toner Cartridges
Press and slide the orange latches of the four toner cartridges towards the front of the printer.
6 – 31
Chapter 6 General
6.12.4 Set the Drum Cartridge
Remove the Drum Cartridge
3 Drum cartridge
Belt unit
NOTE Do not force the lock levers past 90 degrees.
Pull the cartridge

frontward and out,
securely holding
the tabs on both
sides.
4
NOTE Hold the Drum Cartridge firmly so as not to drop it.
6 – 32
Chapter 6 General
Remove the 8 Pieces of Yellow Tapes
Do not remove the

protective sheet in
this step.
Insert the Drum Cartridge and Remove the Sheet
Insert the cartridge

until the line on the
gray tab meets the
white line on the
printer.
7
6 – 33
Chapter 6 General
10
6.12.5 Connect the Power Cord
6 – 34
Chapter 6 General
6.12.6 Switch On the Power
To use a network connection, go to 6.12.7.
To use a USB connection, go to 6.12.9.
6 – 35
Chapter 6 General
6.12.7 Connect the Network Cable
6.12.8 Set the IP Address

The following explains the how to set the IP address using the control panel.
For a details on the procedure and other network settings, refer to the User Guide.
1 1
Menu
Report / List
2 2
Menu
2 times
Admin Menu
3 3
Admin Menu
Wired Network
4 4
Wired Network
Ethernet
5 5
Wired Network
TCP/IP
6 6
TCP/IP
IPv4
or
6 – 36
Chapter 6 General
7 7
IPv4
Get IP Address
8 8
Get IP Address
DHCP/Autonet *
9 9
Get IP Address
4 times
Panel
10 10
Reboot to apply
settings
Get IP Address
Panel *
11 11
IPv4
Get IP Address
12 12
IPv4
IP Address
13 13
IP Address
000.000.000.000*
14 14
IP Address
192.000.000.000
Ex. 192.168.1.100
15 15
IP Address
192.000.000.000
16 16
Repeat steps 14 and 15 to set the
IP address.
IP Address
192.168.001.100
6 – 37
Chapter 6 General
17 17
Reboot to apply
settings
IP Address
192.168.001.100*
18 18
IPv4
Subnet Mask
19 19
Subnet Mask
000.000.000.000*
20 20
Set the subnet mask in the same
way as the IP address.
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.000*
21 21
IPv4
Gateway Address
22 22
Gateway Address
000.000.000.000*
23 23
Set the gateway address in the
same way as the IP address.
Gateway Address
192.168.001.254*
24
Switch the printer off and then on
again.
Refer to 6.14.2 setting the Network Environment.
6 – 38
Chapter 6 General
6.12.9 Install the Print Driver
1
Driver CD Kit
Click here for

[Documentation
(HTML)] that explains
the procedure in detail.
2
To Use a
Network
3a Connection
To Use a
USB
3b
Connection
4
Install the print driver following the on-screen instructions.
6 – 39
Chapter 6 General
6.12.10 Connect the USB Cable
NOTE Be sure to switch off the printer before connecting the USB cable.
6.12.11 Load the Paper
2a
When loading A5/B5/A4/8.5 x 11"/7.25 x 10.5" paper
Adjust the guides

to the size of the
paper.
6 – 40
Chapter 6 General
2b
When loading 8.5 x 13"/8.5 x 14" paper
Slide the length guide to the edge of the tray.
Extend the tray.
Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.
6 – 41
Chapter 6 General
6.12.12 View the User Guide (PDF)
1
Driver CD Kit
NOTE To view the User Guide, You must have Adobe Reader installed on your
computer.
4
Select your printer's User Guide following the on-screen instructions.
Finish
6 – 42
Chapter 6 General
6.13 Installation Procedure DocuPrint C1110B

6.13.1 Check the Contents
- Printer
- Control panel label (Can be placed on the control panel as necessary)
- Setup Guide
- Safety Notes
- Power cord
- Driver CD Kit
NOTE Interface cables and paper must be purchased separately.

When you purchase additional memory, install it following the User Guide
(PDF) provided with the Driver CD Kit.
6 – 43
Chapter 6 General
6.13.2 Remove the Shipping Tapes

Shipping Tapes
Do not remove
these tapes in
this step.
6.13.3 Set the Toner Cartridges
Press and slide the orange latches of the four toner cartridges towards the front of the printer.
6 – 44
Chapter 6 General
6.13.4 Set the Drum Cartridge
Remove the Drum Cartridge
3 Drum cartridge
Belt unit
Pull the cartridge

frontward and out,
securely holding
the tabs on both
sides.
4
NOTE Hold the Drum Cartridge firmly so as not to drop it.
6 – 45
Chapter 6 General
Remove the 8 Pieces of Yellow Tapes
Do not remove the

protective sheet in
this step.
Insert the Drum Cartridge and Remove the Sheet
Insert the cartridge

until the line on the
gray tab meets the
white line on the
printer.
7
6 – 46
Chapter 6 General
10
6 – 47
Chapter 6 General
6.13.5 Install the Print Driver
1
Driver CD Kit
Click here for

[Documentation
(HTML)] that explains
the procedure in detail.
2
4
Install the print driver following the on-screen instructions.
6 – 48
Chapter 6 General
6.13.6 Connect the USB Cable
6.13.7 Connect the Power Cord
6.13.8 Switch On the Power
6 – 49
Chapter 6 General
6.13.9 Load the Paper
2a
When loading A5/B5/A4/8.5 x 11"/7.25 x 10.5" paper
Adjust the guides

to the size of the
paper.
2b
When loading 8.5 x 13"/8.5 x 14" paper
Slide the length guide to the edge of the tray.
Extend the tray.
Adjust the guides to the size of the paper.
6 – 50
Chapter 6 General
6 – 51
Chapter 6 General
6.13.10 View the User Guide (PDF)
1
Driver CD Kit
NOTE To view the User Guide, You must have Adobe Reader installed on your
computer.
4
Select your printer's User Guide following the on-screen instructions.
Finish
6 – 52
Chapter 6 General
6.14 Printer Environment Settings

This chapter describes the supported operating environments and necessary settings to use the
printer.
6.14.1 Supported Operating Environments
The DocuPrint C1110 can be used as both a local and a network printer, while the DocuPrint C1110
B can be used only as a local printer. When used as a local printer, the printer is connected directly
to a computer. When used as a network printer, the printer is connected to a computer over a net-
work.
To use the printer as a network printer, set all ports you want to use to [Enable] on the control panel.
(default: [Enable])
DocuPrint C1110
Internet
IPP
DocuPrint C1110
Local Connection
USB
Network Connection
LPD/SMB/Port9100/EtherTalk/FTP
Network Connection DocuPrint C1110 B

NetWare/Windows Shared Printer
Server
Local Connection
USB
6 – 53
Chapter 6 General
Supported Operating Systems and Operating Environments
NOTE The supported operating systems are subject to change without prior notice.
Visit our web site for the latest information.
indicates the items that can be configured only on the DocuPrint
C1110.
Connection
Local Network (DocuPrint C1110 only)
Method
USB*2 Port Ether

Port Name LPD NetWare*1 SMB*1 IPP*1 FTP WSD*1
9100 Talk*1
TCP/ TCP/ IPX/ Net TCP/ TCP/ Apple TCP/ TCP/

Protocol - TCP/IP
IP IP SPX BEUI IP IP Talk IP IP
Windows® 2000 O O O O O O O O O
Windows® XP O O O O O O O O
(x32/x64)
Windows O O O O O O O O
Server® 2003
(x32/x64)
Windows Vista™ O O O O O O O
(x32/x64)
Mac OS X O O O*3 O
10.2.8/
10.3.9/10.4
*1: The network expansion card (optional) must be installed.

*2: USB port must be set on the computer connected to the printer.
*3: Supported on Mac OS X 10.3.9 or 10.4.
Note
(DocuPrint C1110 only)
• When printing from Macintosh, refer to the ‘User Guide’ on the PostScript Driver Library CD-ROM.
6 – 54
Chapter 6 General
6.14.2 Setting the Network Environment (DocuPrint C1110 only)

This section explains how to install your printer in a TCP/IP environment.
When installing the printer in a different environment, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)'
on the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.
Setting IP Address
To use TCP/IP protocol, you must configure an IP address for the printer.
If your printer has the network expansion card (optional) installed, the printer can print using the
IPv6 communication as well as the IPv4 communication.
The following explains how to set the IP address in IPv4 mode. When using the IP address in IPv6
mode, refer to " Using the Printer in an IPv6 Environment".
Setting the IP Address in IPv4 Mode

By default, the printer is set to obtain its IP address (via the [Get IP Address] setting on the
control panel) using [DHCP/Autonet]. Thus, when the printer is connected to a network that has a
DHCP server, the printer automatically obtains its IP address from the server.
Print the [Printer Settings] list to see if the printer already has an IP address.
If the printer does not have an IP address, set [Get IP Address] to [Panel] and configure the
address.
NOTE The printer can obtain its IP address also by using a BOOTP or RARP server.
If using a BOOTP or RARP server, set [Get IP Address] to [BOOTP] or
[RARP].
If using a DHCP server, the printer's IP address may change without notice.
Make sure to check the IP address periodically.
To use DHCP in a WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) environment, the
network expansion card (optional) must be installed.
Printing the [Printer Settings] List

Use the following procedure to print the [Printer Settings] list.
1
Press the <Menu> button to display Menu
the menu screen. Report / List
2
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> Report / List
button to accept the selection. Printer Settings
[Printer Settings] is displayed.
3
Press the <Eject/Set> button to
print the report.
The report is printed.
6 – 55
Chapter 6 General
Example of the [Printer Settings] list
NOTE The following example uses the printer with the network expansion card
(optional) not installed. If the network expansion card is installed to your
printer, some items to be listed may differ.
If an IP address is listed, skip the

following procedure.
If an IP address is not listed, or if

you want to change the current IP
address, configure the setting using
the following procedure.
To Set the IP Address on the Control Panel

Use the following procedure to configure the printer's IP address on the control panel.
Depending on your network environment, your printer also needs a subnet mask and gateway
address. Consult your network administrator for the settings required for your printer.
-To Set the IP Address
1
2
Press the < > button until [Admin Menu
Menu] is displayed. Admin Menu
Note
If you went past the desired item, return to
the item by pressing the < > button.
3
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button Admin Menu
to accept the selection. Wired Network
[Wired Network] is displayed.
Note
If you pressed the < > button on the wrong
item, return to the previous screen by
pressing the < > button.
To start over from the beginning, press the
<Menu> button.
4
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button Wired Network
to accept the selection. Ethernet
[Ethernet] is displayed.
5
Press the < > button until [TCP/IP] Wired Network
is displayed. TCP/IP
6 – 56
Chapter 6 General
6
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button TCP/IP
to accept the selection. IPv4
[IPv4] or [IP Mode] is displayed.
If [IP Mode] is displayed, press the
< > button to display [IPv4].
7
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button IPv4
to accept the selection. Get IP Address
[Get IP Address] is displayed.
8
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button Get IP Address
to accept the selection. DHCP/Autonet*
The current setting is displayed.
9
Press the < > button until [Panel] is Get IP Address
displayed. Panel
10
Confirm your selection by pressing Get IP Address
the <Eject/Set> button. Panel*
The display shows [Reboot to apply
settings] for 3 seconds and returns to
the setting screen.
You will reboot the printer after
setting the gateway address. Go on
to the next step.
11
Press the < > button to return to IPv4
[Get IP Address]. Get IP Address
12
Press the < > button to display [IP IPv4
Address]. IP Address
13
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button IP Address
to accept the selection. 000.000.000.000*
The current IP address is displayed.
14
Enter the value in the first field using IP Address
the < > or < > button, and press 192.000.000.000
the < > button.
Note
If you do not need to change the setting,
press the < > button to advance to the
next field.
Pressing and holding down the < > or
< > button increments the value by 10.
To return to the previous field, press the
< > button.
6 – 57
Chapter 6 General
15
Enter the rest of the fields in the same IP Address
manner. After entering the last (4th) 192.168.001.100*
field, press the <Eject/Set> button to
confirm your entry.
16
If you want to set a subnet mask and
gateway address, press the < >
button and proceed to Step 17.
If you want to finish the setting,
proceed to Step 24.
To Set the Subnet Mask/Gateway Addressl

17
Press the < > button until [Subnet IPv4
Mask] is displayed. Subnet Mask
18
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button Subnet Mask
The current subnet mask is
displayed.
19
Enter the subnet mask in the same Subnet Mask
way you entered the IP address, and 255.255.255.000*
press the <Eject/Set> button to
confirm your entry.
20
Press the < > button to return to IPv4
[Subnet Mask]. Subnet Mask
21
Press the < > button to display IPv4
[Gateway Address]. Gateway Address
22
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button Gateway Address
The current gateway address is
displayed.
23
Enter the gateway address in the Gateway Address
same way you entered the IP 192.168.001.254*
address, and press the <Eject/Set>
button to confirm your entry.
24
The setting is now complete.
Reboot the printer by switching the
power off and then on again.
25
Print the [Printer Settings] list to verify
your settings.
6 – 58
Chapter 6 General
Using the Printer in an IPv6 Environment
If the printer is connected to a network with an IPv6 router that advertises network prefixes, the
printer automatically configures the IPv6 stateless address. For details, consult your system
administrator.
You can check the IPv6 link-local address and IPv6 stateless address by printing out the [Printer
Settings] list.
Printing the [Printer Settings] List

Use the following procedure to print the [Printer Settings] list and check the addresses.
1
2
Press the < > or <Eject/Set> button Report / List
to accept the selection. Printer Settings
[Printer Settings] is displayed.
3
Press the <Eject/Set> button to print
the report.
The report is printed.
Example of the [Printer Settings] list
IPv6 link-local address
IPv6 stateless addresses are

listed here if they are
automatically configured.
NOTE To set an IP address manually, set the IP address under the [Properties] tab
> [TCP/IP] on CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to access CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "
Configuring the Printer Using CentreWare Internet Services".
To specify an IPv6 address, enter the address and then "64" after a slash (/)
under the [Properties] tab > [Protocol Settings] > [TCP/IP] on CentreWare
Internet Services. For details, consult your system administrator.
6 – 59
Chapter 6 General
Configuring the Printer Using CentreWare Internet Services

CentreWare Internet Services is a service that allows you to monitor or remotely configure the
printer using a web browser when the printer is on a TCP/IP network.
Some of the control panel settings can be set also on the service's [Properties] tab.
NOTE CentreWare Internet Services cannot be used when your printer is a local
printer.
Supported Operating Environments

CentreWare Internet Services has been tested to work on the following web browsers.
On Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Vista
- Microsoft® Internet Explorer 6/7
- Mozilla Firefox 2
On Mac OS X 10.4
- Mozilla Firefox 2
- Safari 2
Setting Up a Web Browser

When accessing CentreWare Internet Services, we recommend you to set your web browser:
- not to use a proxy server when specifying the printer’s IP address.
- to enable JavaScript.
NOTE If you access CentreWare Internet Services using a proxy server, the
response from the service may be slow or the window of the service may not
be displayed.
Some buttons on the service do not appear when JavaScript is not running or
disabled. In such case, the buttons are displayed as URL links.
For information on how to set up your web browser, refer to the online help
for the web browser.
If you want to change the display language of CentreWare Internet Services, change the dis-
play language of your web browser.
NOTE For information on how to change the display language of your web browser,
refer to the online help for the web browser.
6 – 60
Chapter 6 General
Setting Up the Printer

To use CentreWare Internet Services, you must configure the printer's IP address and enable
[InternetServices] (default: [Enable]). When [InternetServices] is set to [Disable], change it to
[Enable] on the control panel.
Refer to “Protocol” (User Guide p.88)
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items

The followings are the main features on each tab of CentreWare Internet Services.
Tab Name Feature
Status • General
Displays the printer's product name, IP address, and status.
• Printer Status
Displays the sizes and remaining volumes of the paper loaded in the paper trays, the
status of the output tray, and the remaining life of consumables.
• Fault Status
Displays the status of the control panel and error information (error location and
details).
Jobs • Displays the job status list and job history list.
Properties • Description
Displays the printer's product name and serial number. It also sets the printer's name*,
installation location*, contact person*, and administrator's e-mail address*.
• Configuration
Displays the specifications of the print features, page description languages, and
memory information.
• Usage Counters
Displays the total number of color and monochrome pages printed to date.
• Initialization
Initializes the NV memory or reboots the printer.
• Security*
Sets the settings for IPsec. It also creates/manages/deletes self-signed certificates and
enables SSL/TLS communication.
This item appears only when the network expansion card (optional) is installed.
• StatusMessenger*
The printer can notify its status via e-mail to users who have been registered through
this feature. You can set the e-mail addresses of the users and the items or events that
the users will be notified of.
• Internet Services Settings*
Sets whether or not to automatically update the window of CentreWare Internet
Services and the interval at which the window is updated (in seconds). This also
enables or disables the Administrator Mode and sets the administrator's ID and
password, if the Administrator Mode is enabled.
The default system administrator ID and password are "11111" and "x-admin",
respectively. Make sure to change the password before using the Administrator Mode.
• Port Status
Enables or disables each port.
• Port Settings
Sets the settings for Ethernet.
• Protocol Settings*
Sets the details of each protocol.
Print • Print Auditron*

This feature allows you to control user access to the printer. If enabling this feature,
register users who are granted access to the printer.
Support • Displays a link to customer support.
* These items can be configured only on CentreWare Internet Services and not on the control panel.
The security features are not supported on the model available in China.
6 – 61
Chapter 6 General
Using CentreWare Internet Services

Follow these steps when accessing CentreWare Internet Services.
1. Start your computer and launch a web browser.
2. In the URL field, enter the IP address or URL of the printer, and press the <Enter> key.
The top page of CentreWare Internet Services is displayed
• Example - IP address • Example - URL
• Example - IPv6 address
Note
• When specifying a port number, enter ":" (colon) and then "80" (the factory default port number) after the
address. To find out the printer’s port number, print the [Printer Settings] list from the printer.
• The port number can be changed under the [Properties] tab > [Protocol Settings] > [HTTP]. If you change
the port number, you must enter ":" (colon) and then the port number after the address.
• When SSL/TLS server communication is enabled, enter "https" before the address instead of "http". This
feature is not supported on the model available in China.
• For information about the Authentication/Auditron Administration and data encryption features, refer to "7.7
Security Features" (User Guide P. 146) and "7.8 Authentication and Auditron Administration Features
(DocuPrint C1110 only)" (User Guide P. 155).
Using the Online Help

For details on each setting item, refer to the online help for CentreWare Internet Services. You
can browse the online help by clicking the [Help] button on the service.
6 – 62
Chapter 6 General
6.14.3 Installing a Printer Driver

To print from your computer, install a PCL print driver using the CD-ROM of the Driver CD Kit.
The installation procedure varies depending on how your computer is connected to the printer.
For installation instructions, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CD-ROM.
Note
• Refer to the ‘CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)’ also when installing ContentsBridge Utility or other software.
Uninstalling a Print Driver and Other Software

To Uninstall a Print Driver
Your print driver can be uninstalled using the uninstallation tool contained on the CD-ROM of the
Driver CD Kit. For more information, refer to the `CD-ROM Documentation (HTML)' on the CD-
ROM.
To Uninstall Other Software
When uninstalling other software installed from the Driver CD Kit, refer to the "Readme" file
provided for each software. The "Readme" files can be viewed under the `Product Information
(HTML)' in the Driver CD Kit.
6 – 63
Chapter 6 General
6.15 Control Panel Manu Tree

Control Panel Menu Tree
Basic Control Panel Functions
To move up and down the menus: < > or < > button
To select a menu or move to the right: < > or <Eject/Set> button
To cancel a selection or return to the left: < > button
To confirm an entry: <Eject/Set> button
To exit the menu screen: <Menu> button
Character/Number Entry Functions
To increase or decrease a value: < > or < > button

To move between digits or fields: < > or < > button
To reset a value to the default: < > and < > buttons
Print Menus The print menus appear on the display only when additional memory of 256 MB or above
is installed.
Ready to Print
< > button
Print Menu Select User ID Password+SET key Select Document All Documents Enter Quantity
Secure Print User01 [xxxxxxxxxxxx] All Documents Print and Delete Use PC Settings
All Documents Enter Quantity
Print and Save xxx Set(s)
All Documents
Delete
Secure Print Select Document document1 Enter Quantity

No Jobs document1 Print and Delete xxx Set(s)
document1
Print and Save
document1
Delete
Print Menu Select User ID Select Document All Documents Enter Quantity
Sample Print User01 All Documents Print and Delete Use PC settings
All Documents Enter Quantity
Print and Save xxx Set(s)
All Documents
Delete
Proof Print Select Document document1 Enter Quantity

No Jobs document1 Print and Delete xxx Set(s)
document1
Print and Save
document1
Delete
6 – 64
Chapter 6 General
Conventions for the Administrator Menus

: Main menus
: Items that appear/do not appear depending on the options

installed in the printer.
* : Default
Administrator Menus
Ready to Print
Password If the control panel is locked with a password,

<Menu> [0000] enter the password here.
button
Report / List Printer Settings, Panel Settings, PCL Font List, PCL Macro List, PS Font List,
PDF Font List, Job History, Error History, Print Meter, Demo Print, Stored Documents
Meter Readings Meter 1, Meter 2,

Meter 3, Meter 4
Wired Network
*1 Continued on the next page To A
USB Settings
*1 Continued on the next page To B
System Settings
Continued on the next page To C
Maintenance Mode
Continued on the next page To D
Admin Menu
PDF
Continued on the next page To F
PCL
Continued on the next page To G
PostScript
*1
Continued on the next page To H
Panel Settings
Continued on the next page To I
*1 : This item appears only on the DocuPrint C1110.
Tray Settings Tray 1 Paper Type

PS Error Report *, Paper*, Recycled Paper,
Plain
On
Off Paper, Heavyweight 1,
Bond
Heavyweight 2, Labels, Coated 1,
Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope
Paper Size A4 Portrait*, A5 Portrait, B5 Portrait,

8.5 x 11" P, 8.5 x 13" P, 8.5 x 14" P,
7.25 x 10.5" P, Env3.9 x 7.5" P,
Env3.9 x 7.5" L, Env 110x220mm P,
Env 110x220mm L, Env 162x229mm P,
Env4.1 x 9.5" P
Custom Size Length Y xxxmm*
Width X xxxmm*
Display Screen On*,

Off
6 – 65
Chapter 6 General
A (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.)

Wired Network Ethernet Auto*, 10BASE-T Half, 10BASE-T Full,
100BASE-TX Half, 100BASE-TX Full
TCP/IP IP Mode Dual Stack*, IPv4, IPv6

DHCP / Autonet*,
IPv4 Get IP Address BOOTP, RARP,
DHCP, Panel
IP Address, Subnet Mask, 000.000.000.000*
Gateway Address
IPsec Disable
These items do not appear on the model available in China.
Protocol LPD, Port 9100, IPP, SMB (TCP/IP), SMB (NetBEUI), Enable*,
FTP, WSD, E-mail Printing, StatusMessenger, Disable
InternetServices, EtherTalk Compat, Bonjour (mDNS)
HTTP - SSL/TLS Disable*,

Enable
This item appears only when a certificate is registered in the printer.
NetWare NetWare IP Enable*,

Disable
NetWare IPX
SNMP SNMP (UDP/IP) Enable*,

Disable
SNMP (IPX)
IPX/SPX Auto*, Ethernet II, Ethernet 802.3,

Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet SNAP
IP Filter No.n / Address 000.000.000.000*

No.n / Mask
No.n / Mode Off*, Accept,
Reject
n: 1-5
Initialize NVM Ready to Init
Adobe Protocol Auto*, Standard,

BCP, TBCP, Binary
B (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.)

USB Settings Adobe Protocol TBCP*, Binary, Auto, Standard, BCP
6 – 66
Chapter 6 General
C
System Settings Low Power Timer 3 Minutes* 3 - 60 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)
Sleep Mode Enable*,

Disable
Sleep Mode Timer 2 Minutes* 2 - 120 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)
Audio Tones Control Panel, Invalid Key, Machine Ready, Off,

Job Completed, Fault Tone, Alert Tone, On*
Out of Paper, Low Toner Alert, Base Tone
Job Time-out 30 Seconds* Off or 5 - 300 Seconds (increment: 1 sec.)
Auto Job History Off*,

On
Print ID Off*, Top Left, Top Right,

Bottom Left, Bottom Right
Print Text Off*,

On
RAM Disk Off*,

On
Substitute Tray Off*, Larger Size,

Closest Size
mm / inch Millimeters(mm)*,
Inches (")
Interrupt Print On*,

Off
Print Priority Off*,

On
DefaultPaperSize A4*,
8.5 x 11"
D
Maintenance Mode Adjust PaperType
Paper Type Plain Paper Lightweight,
Heavyweight*
Labels
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond Paper,

Adjust BTR Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2, Labels, 0*
Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope
-6 - +6 (unit: 1)
Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Bond Paper,
Adjust Fuser Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2, Labels, 0*
Coated 1, Coated 2, Coated 3, Envelope
-2 - +2 (unit: 1)
Auto Adjust Regi On*,
Off
To E (next page)
6 – 67
Chapter 6 General
From E (previous page) ([Maintenance Mode] continued)
Adjust ColorRegi
Paper Type PlainAdjust
Auto Paper Ready to Adjust
Color Regi Chart
Enter Adjustment Fast Scan Y=0 M=0 C=0
Slow Scan -9 - +9 (unit: 1)
Adjust Altitude 0m*, 1000m,

2000m, 3000m
Clean Developer Are you sure?
Toner Refresh Yellow, Magenta, Are you sure?

Cyan, Black
Drum Refresh Are you sure?
Print Meter Reset?
Initialize NVM Ready to Init
Storage Disk Ready to Init
F
PDF Adjust Paper Type
Quantity Plain
1 Set(s) *
Paper 1 - 999 sets
Print Mode Normal*, High Quality,

High Speed
Password [1234567890123] 32 characters

Code 0x20 - 0x7d
Collated Off*,
On
When [DefaultPaperSize]
is [A4]
Output Size Auto, Auto,
A4* 8.5x11"* When [DefaultPaperSize]
is [8.5 x 11"]
Layout Auto %*, 100% (No Zoom),

Booklet, 2 Pages Up, 4 Pages Up
Output Color Color (Auto)*,

Black
6 – 68
Chapter 6 General
G
PCL Adjust Size
Output Paper Type A4*, A5, B5, 8.5 x 11", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 14", 7.25 x 10.5",
Env 3.9 x 7.5", Env 110 x 220mm, Env 162 x 229mm, Env 4.1 x 9.5"
Custom Size Length Y xxxmm*
Width X xxxmm*
Orientation Portrait*,
Landscape
Font Courier* Select from 81 fonts
Symbol Set Roman-8* Select from 36 sets
Font Size 12.00* 4.00 - 50.00 (increment: 0.25 pt)
Font Pitch 10.00* 6.00 - 24.00 (increment: 0.01 cpi)
Form Lines 64* 5 - 128 (increment: 1)
Quantity 1* 1 - 999 (increment: 1)
Image Enhance On*,

Off
HexDump Disable*,
Enable
Draft Mode Disable*,

Enable
Line Termination Off*, Add-LF,

Add-CR, CR-XX
Output Color Black*,

Color
H (The items appear only on the DocuPrint C1110.)

PostScript Adjust
PS Error
Paper
Report
Type On*, Paper
Plain
Off
PS Job Time-out Off*,

xx Minutes 1 - 900 Minutes (increment: 1 min.)
PaperSelect Mode Auto*,

Select FromTray
Default Color Black,

Color*

I
Panel Settings Adjust
PS
Panel
Error
Lock
Paper
Report
Type Off**
Plain
On ,, Paper
Off
On
Change Password Current Password New Password Reenter
These items appear only when [Panel Lock] is [On].
6 – 69
Chapter 6 General
6 – 70
CONTENTS
7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)].....................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 List of P/J ........................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.2 IOT P/J layout diagram ................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Connection Wiring Diagram........................................................................................7-7
7.2.1 Symbols in the General Connection Wiring Diagram...................................................................... 7-7
7.2.2 General Wiring Diagram ................................................................................................................. 7-9
7.3 Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts..................................................................7-10
7.3.1 Notes on Using the Wiring Diagram between Parts...................................................................... 7-10
7.3.2 Configuration of the Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts...................................................... 7-12
§ 1 DC POWER SUPPLY ....................................................................................................................... 7-14
§ 2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI ...................................................................................................................... 7-16
§ 3 DRIVE ............................................................................................................................................... 7-18
§ 4 ROS .................................................................................................................................................. 7-20
§ 5 XEROGRAPHIC ............................................................................................................................... 7-22
§ 6 HIGH VOLTAGE ............................................................................................................................... 7-24
§ 7 DEVELOPER .................................................................................................................................... 7-26
§ 8 FUSER.............................................................................................................................................. 7-28
§ 9 CONTROLLER ................................................................................................................................. 7-30
7.1 Connector [P (plug) / J (jack)]

7.1.1 List of P/J
Printer
P/J Coordiates Remarks

3 D-139 Connects PWBA ESS and MULTI PROTOCOL CARD
10 I-156 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ESS
11 I-156 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ESS VIDEO
14 H-157 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY LVPS
15 H-156 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY 24V
16 I-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY HVPS
17 H-157 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY FUSER
18 H-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT
19 H-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT
20 J-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY HUM
21 J-157 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT
22 J-157 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY SUB MOT
23 J-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE
24 J-158 Connects PWBA MCU and DRIVE ASSY PH (Color Mode Switching Solenoid)
26 J-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL
28 J-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE
29 C-140 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY B
29 I-158 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY SIDE SW
31 H-157 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM
40 C-136 Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY ESS POWER
40 I-156 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ROS RE
41 I-156 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO
42 J-157 Connects PWBA MCU and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO
44 G-136 Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY INTERLOCK
47 F-136 Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY FUSER
48 G-137 Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR
101 D-138 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS
101 I-157 Not Connect (Debug only)
111 E-138 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS VIDEO
141 G-107 Connects LED ASSY ERASE and HARNESS ASSY LVPS
144 G-151 Connects PWBA EEPROM and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO
161 F-153 Connects PWBA HVPS and HARNESS ASSY HVPS
171 H-106 Connects FUSER ASSY and HARNESS ASSY FUSER
7-1
P/J Coordiates Remarks

181 C-152 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP Y) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT
182 C-151 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP M) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT
191 C-151 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP C) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT
192 C-150 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Motor Assy DISP K) and HARNESS ASSY TNR MOT
201 H-140 Connects FEEDER ASSY V (HUM Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY HUM
211 J-138 Connects DRIVE ASSY MAIN (Main Motor) and HARNESS ASSY MAIN MOT
220 E-106 Connects CONSOLE ASSY PANEL and HARNESS ASSY A-OP
221 H-138 Connects DRIVE ASSY SUB (Sub Motor) and HARNESS ASSY SUB MOT
231 C-125 Connects FEEDER ASSY V (Feed Solenoid) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE
232 F-125 Connects FEEDER ASSY V (REGI Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE
233 G-125 Connects FEEDER ASSY V (SSI No Paper Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE
234 F-124 Connects FEEDER ASSY V (CST No Paper Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE
Connects DRIVE ASSY PH (Color Mode Switching Sensor) and HARNESS ASSY KSNR
261 H-139
REGCL
262 I-139 Connects CLUTCH ASSY DRV and HARNESS ASSY KSNR REGCL
281 C-108 Connects TRANSFER ASSY (Harness Assy CTD SNR2) and HARNESS ASSY L SIDE
291 H-107 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Side Cover Switch) and HARNESS ASSY SIDE SW
311 H-110 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM Y) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM
Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM M) and HARNESS ASSY TONER
312 H-109
CRUM
313 H-108 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM C) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM
314 H-108 Connects DISPENSER ASSY (Connector CRUM K) and HARNESS ASSY TONER CRUM
401 C-139 Connects PWBA ESS and HARNESS ASSY ESS POWER
411 D-122 Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS RE
412 D-123 Connects ROS ASSY and HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO
422 G-150 Connects PHD ASSY ( Eeprom PHD) and HARNESS ASSY PHD XPRO
482 G-140 Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR
483 G-140 Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY SW PWR
484 G-141 Connects BREAKER GFI and HARNESS ASSY GFI GND
501 D-136 Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY LVPS
502 C-136 Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY 24V
503 C-136 Connects PWBA LVPS and FAN MAIN
504 D-136 Connects PWBA LVPS and HARNESS ASSY TEST RL
2811 D-107 Connects ADC Sensor and HARNESS ASSY CTD SNR2 (TRANSFER ASSY)
5041 I-107 Not Connects (Used in production process only)
2200/
H-111 Connects HARNESS ASSY A-OP and HARNESS ASSY B
2900
7-2
7.1.2 IOT P/J layout diagram
A B C D E F G H I J K L
101
102
103 220
171
104 291
105
106
2811 5041
107 141
314
108
281 313
109
312
110 311
111
112 2200/2900
113
114
115
Wsb07001FA
7-3
116
117
118
119
120
121
122 411
123
412
124
125
126
231
127 233
234
232
128
129
130
Wsb07002FA
7-4
131
132
133 504
501 47
48
502 44
134
503
40
135
136
137
221
101
138
111 211
401
139
3
29
140
141
262
261
142 201
483
482 484
143
144
145
Wsb07003FA
7-5
146
144
147 422
148
149
150
192
191
151
182
152
181
153
154
155
40 41 10
156 161 15
11
14
42
17
157
22
101
21
31
24
158 19
26
18
23
159 28
29 16 20
160
Wsb07004FA
7-6

7.2.1 Symbols in the General Connection Wiring Diagram
The symbols in the general connection wiring diagram are described below.
Symbol Description
Represents an interconnection between parts using wiring harness or wire.
Represents an interconnection which differs according to the specifications.
Represents an interconnection between parts using a conductive member such as a

plate spring.
Represents a connection between parts by tightening of a screw.
Indicates a frame ground.
Represents a connector. The connector No. is indicated inside the box.
Represents a connection terminal with a plate spring on the printed circuit board.
The connector (terminal) No. is indicated inside the box.
Represents a connector directly connected to the printed circuit board. The

connector No. is indicated inside the box.
The box containing a part name represents a part.

"PL X.Y.Z" indicates the item "Z" of the plate (PL) "X.Y" described in Chapter 5
"Parts List."
Represents a functional part within a part, and indicates the name of the functional
part.
Represents a section in "7.3. Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts," and

indicates its section No.
7-7
Symbol Description
Represents a screw for fixing wiring harness and a conductive member such as a
plate spring.
Represents a conductive member such as a plate spring.
7-8
7.2.2 General Wiring Diagram
8 Fuser PWBA LVPS HARN ASSY

BREAKER
PL8.2.1 P/J48 SW PWR P/J482
FUSER ASSY PL8.2.9 GFI
PL6.1.1 P/J171 P/J47
P/J483 PL8.2.11
Used in production
PWBA MCU J5041 P/J504
process only.
PL8.2.13
FAN MAIN
P/J503
PL8.1.1
SWITCH
P/J17 PL5.1.9
HARN ASSY
P/J29 P/J291 INTERLOCK
P/J44 PL8.2.5
4 ROS ROS ASSY
P/J15 P/J502
PL4.1.1 P/J411 P/J40
DC Power Supply 1
P/J412 P/J41 P/J14 P/J501
P/J40
Controller 9
6 High Voltage PWBA HVPS
PL4.1.19
P161 P/J16
LED ASSY
ERASE
PL4.1.8 P/J401
P/J141
CONSOLE
PWB ESS
ASSY PANEL
PHD ASSY PL8.1.9
PL1.1.19
PL4.1.21
P/J10 P/J101
P/J29 P/J2900 P/J220
EEPROM PHD P/J11 P/J111
P/J422 P/J42
PWBA EEPROM
PL8.2.16
P/J144
Developer 7
MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y)
P/J18 P/J181
PL5.1.3
SENSOR HUM
PL8.2.7 P/J201 P/J20
MOTOR ASSY DISP (M)
P/J182
PL5.1.3
TRANSFER ADC SENSOR
ASSY
PL6.1.7 P/J2811 P/J281 P/J28
MOTOR ASSY DISP (C)
P/J19 P/J191
5 Xerographic PL5.1.3
MOTOR ASSY DISP (K)

2 Feeder, SSI & Regi P/J192
PL5.1.3
SOLENOID FEED MSI

PL3.1.9 CONNECTOR CRUM (K)
P/J231 P/J23 P/J31 P/J314
PL5.1.14
REGI SENSOR CONNECTOR CRUM (C)

PL3.2.13 P/J313
P/J232 PL5.1.14
SSI NO PAPER CONNECTOR CRUM (M)

SENSOR P/J312
P/J233 PL5.1.14
PL3.2.13
CST NO PAPER CONNECTOR CRUM (Y)

P/J311
SENSOR PL5.1.14
P/J234
PL3.2.13
CLUTCH ASSY
DRV P/J262 P/J26
PL3.1.1
Drive 3
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
P/J21 P/J211 PL7.1.2
DRIVE ASSY SUB

P/J22 P/J221 PL7.1.1
COLOR MODE
P/J24
SWITCHING SOLENOID
DRIVE ASSY PH
PL7.1.4
COLOR MODE
P/J261
SWITCHING SENSOR
WSB07001KC
7-9

7.3.1 Notes on Using the Wiring Diagram between Parts
The following describes the legend of the wiring diagrams between parts shown on the following pages.
Symbols Description
Denotes a plug.
Denotes a jack.
P/JXX
YY
Denotes Pin yy and Jack yy of the connector Pxx and Jxx.
PWBA HNB DRV Denotes the parts.

(PL X.Y.Z)
PL X.Y.Z implies the item "Z" of plate (PL) "X.Y" in Chapter 5. Parts
List.
Heater
Denotes functional parts attached with functional parts name.
Control
Denotes the control and its outline in PWB.
DEVE_A Denotes a connection between parts with harnesses or wires, attached

with signal name/contents.
Denotes the function, and logic value of the signal to operate the
REGI CLUTCH ON(L)+24VDC function (Low: L, High: H).
The given voltage is for signal in high status.
The arrow indicates the direction of signal.
7-10
Symbols Description
EXIT PAPER SENSED(L)+3.3VDC Denotes the function, and logic value of the signal when the function
operated (Low: L, High: H).
The given voltage is for signal in high status.
The arrow indicates the direction of signal.
Denotes a connection between wires.
Denotes DC voltage when the interlock switch in HNB MCU WITH

I/L +24VDC
CPU turns on.
+5VDC
Denotes DC voltage.
+3.3VDC
SG Denotes signal ground.
AG Denotes analog ground.
RTN Denotes the return.
7-11
7.3.2 Configuration of the Interconnection Wiring Diagram of Parts
The interconnection wiring diagram is divided into 9 sections. § 1 to § 9 indicate details of the interconnections of parts.
§1 DC POWER SUPPLY
Connections of PWBA LVPS with PWBA MCU.

Connections of HARN ASSY SW PWR with PWBA LVPS.
Connections of BREAKER GFI with HARN ASSY SW PWR.
Connections of FAN MAIN with PWBA LVPS.
Connections of HARN ASSY INTERLOCK with PWBA LVPS.
Connections of SWITCH with PWBA MCU.
§2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI
Connections of SOLENOID FEED MSI with PWBA MCU.

Connections of REGI SENSOR with PWBA MCU.
Connections of SSI NO PAPER SENSOR with PWBA MCU.
Connections of CST NO PAPER SENSOR with PWBA MCU.
Connections of CLUTCH ASSY DRV with PWBA MCU.
§3 DRIVE
Connections of DRIVE ASSY PH with PWBA MCU.

Connections of DRIVE ASSY MAIN with PWBA MCU.
Connections of DRIVE ASSY SUB with PWBA MCU.
§4 ROS
Connections of ROS ASSY with PWBA MCU.
§5 XEROGRAPHIC
Connections of PWBA EEPROM with PWBA MCU.

Connections of PHD ASSY with PWBA MCU.
Connections of SENSOR HUM with PWBA MCU.
Connections of LED ASSY ERASE with PWBA MCU.
Connections of TRANSFER ASSY with PWBA MCU.
§6 HIGH VOLTAGE
Connections of PWBA HVPS with PWBA MCU.
7-12
§7 DEVELOPER
Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y) with PWBA MCU.

Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (M) with PWBA MCU.
Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (C) with PWBA MCU.
Connections of MOTOR ASSY DISP (K) with PWBA MCU.
Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (Y) with PWBA MCU.
Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (M) with PWBA MCU.
Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (C) with PWBA MCU.
Connections of CONNECTOR CRUM (K) with PWBA MCU.
§8 FUSER
Connections of FUSER ASSY with PWBA MCU.

Connections of FUSER ASSY with PWBA LVPS.
Connections of PWBA MCU with PWBA LVPS.
§9 CONTROLLER
Connections of PWB ESS with PWBA MCU.

Connections of CONSOLE ASSY PANEL with PWB ESS.
Connections of PWBA LVPS with PWB ESS.
7-13
§ 1 DC POWER SUPPLY
PWBA LVPS PWBA MCU

PL8.2.1 PL8.2.13
HARN ASSY INTERLOCK
PL8.2.5
P/J44
1
POWER
CONTROL
I/L +24VDC
3
SWITCH P/J291 P/J29

R/H COVER OPEN
PL5.1.9 2 1
SG
1 2
HARN ASSY SIDE SW

PL5.1.27
HARN ASSY LVPS
PL9.1.3 +5VDC
P/J501 P/J14
+5VDC +3.3VDC
1 14
SG
2 13
+3.3VDC
3 12
SG
4 11
LV TYPE
7 8
DEEP SLEEP
8 7
SLEEP
9 6
24V ON
10 5
FAN ON
11 4
FAN LOW
12 3
FAN ALARM
13 2
I/L OPEN
14 1
HARN ASSY 24V INTERLOCK
PL9.1.4 +24VDC
P/J502 P/J15
I/L +24VDC
1 1
SG
2 2
FAN MAIN
P/J503 PL8.1.1
FAN +24VDC
1
FAN FAN ALARM
2
CONTROL SG
3
HARN ASSY SW PWR BREAKER GFI

P/J48 PL8.2.9 PL8.2.11
1 P/J483
LINE
2 4 3
NUT
3 2 1 P/J482
T484 P/J484
HARN ASSY GFI GND

PL8.2.10
WSB07002KC
7-14
Signal line name Description

LV TYPE
DEEP SLEEP
Control signal of the LVPS
SLEEP
24V ON
FAN ON
FAN LOW Drive control signal of the SIDE FAN
FAN ALARM
LVPS overcurrent protection circuit
This circuit stops all outputs, if the power supply voltage 24VDC, 5VDC, or 3.3VDC is shorted.
LVPS overvoltage protection circuit
This circuit stops all outputs, if the power supply voltage 24VDC, 5VDC, or 3.3VDC exceeds the
specified voltage respectively.
At this time, the operating point is 36VDC or less for 24VDC, 7VDC or less for 5VDC and 3.3VDC.
Low Power mode and Sleep mode
The output of the following power supply are stopped according to the these signals.
Output
+24VDC +5VDC +3.3VDC
Signal
Sleep (Low Power mode) OFF OFF ON
Deep sleep (Sleep mode) OFF OFF OFF
7-15
§ 2 FEEDER, SSI & REGI
PWBA MCU
PL8.2.13 HARN ASSY L SIDE
PL3.1.18
P/J23 P/J231
I/L +24VDC
1 2 1 SOLENOID FEED MSI
CST FEED CL ON (L) +24VDC PL3.1.9
2 1 2
+3.3VDC
P/J232
PULL UP +3.3VDC
3 3 REGI SENSOR
SG
4 2 PL3.2.13
REGI SENSED (L) +3.3VDC
5 1
+3.3VDC
P/J233
PULL UP +3.3VDC
6 3 SSI NO PAPER
SG
7 2 SENSOR
PAPER EMPTY SENSED (H) +3.3VDC PL3.2.13
8 1
+3.3VDC
P/J234
PULL UP +3.3VDC
9 3 CST NO PAPER
SG
10 2 SENSOR
PAPER EMPTY SENSED (L) +3.3VDC PL3.2.13
11 1
HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL

INTERLOCK PL9.1.9
+24VDC P/J26 P/J262
I/L +24VDC 2 1
4 CLUTCH ASSY DRV
REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC PL3.1.1
5 1 2
WSB07003GA
7-16

CST FEED CL ON (L)
ON/OFF signal of the SOLENOID FEED MSI
+24VDC
REGI SENSED (L)
Paper detect signal of the Regi part by the Sensor Photo (REGI SENSOR)
+3.3VDC
PAPER EMPTY SENSED Paper detect signal of the SSI by the Sensor Photo
(H) +3.3VDC (SSI NO PAPER SENSOR)
PAPER EMPTY SENSED Paper detect signal of the Paper Cassette by the Sensor Photo
(L) +3.3VDC (CST NO PAPER SENSOR)
REGI CL ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF signal of the CLUTCH ASSY DRV
7-17
§ 3 DRIVE
PWBA MCU DRIVE ASSY PH

PL8.2.13 PL7.1.4
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J24
I/L +24VDC
1 COLOR MODE
K MODE SOL ON (L) +24VDC SWITCHING SOLENOID
2
+3.3VDC HARN ASSY KSNR REGCL

PL9.1.9
P/J26 P/J261
PULL UP +3.3VDC
1 3
SG COLOR MODE
2 2
K MODE SENSED (L) +3.3VDC SWITCHING SENSOR
3 1
INTERLOCK
+24VDC HARN ASSY MAIN MOT
PL9.1.7
P/J21 P/J211 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
SG PL7.1.2
1 11
I/L +24VDC
2 10
SG
3 9
I/L +24VDC
4 8
SG
5 7 M
MAIN MOT ON
6 6
MAIN MOT ALARM
7 5
MAIN MOT CLK
8 4
MAIN MOT LOW
9 3
MAIN MOT CW/CCW
10 2
INTERLOCK
+24VDC HARN ASSY SUB MOT
PL9.1.8
P/J22 P/J221 DRIVE ASSY SUB
SG PL7.1.1
1 10
I/L +24VDC
2 9
SG
3 8
I/L +24VDC
4 7
SG
5 6 M
SUB MOTO ON
6 5
SUB MOT ALARM
7 4
SUB MOT CLK
8 3
SUB MOT LOW
9 2
SUB MOT BRAKE
10 1
WSB07004KC
7-18

K MODE SOL ON (L) +24VDC ON/OFF signal of the COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID
K MODE SENSED (L) Color mode detect signal of the DRIVE ASSY PH by the Sensor Photo
+3.3VDC (COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR)
MAIN MOT ON
MAIN MOT ALARM
MAIN MOT CLK Drive control signal of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN
MAIN MOT LOW
MAIN MOT CW/CCW
SUB MOT ON
SUB MOT ALARM
SUB MOT CLK Drive control signal of the DRIVE ASSY SUB
SUB MOT LOW
SUB MOT BRAKE
7-19
§ 4 ROS
PWBA MCU ROS ASSY

PL8.2.13 PL4.1.1
HARNESS ASSY ROS RE

INTERLOCK PL4.1.22
+24VDC
P/J40 P/J411
ROS MOT ON CLK ROS MOT
1 15 1 5
SG LOCK
2 14 2 4
I/L +24VDC ROS MOT ON
3 13 3 3
ROS MOT CLK SG
4 12 4 2
SOS +24VDC
5 11 5 1
LD ERR
6 10
PCONT
7 9
SG
8 8
V REF K +5VDC
9 7 1 3
V REF C SOS PWBA SOS
10 6 2 2
V REF M SG
11 5 3 1
V REF Y
12 4
ENB
13 3
SG
14 2
+3.3V LD
15 1
from Xerography
HARNESS ASSY ROS VIDEO
PL4.1.23
P/J41 P/J412
SG
1 8
DATA K
2 7
SG
3 6
DATA C
4 5
SG
5 4
DATA M
6 3
SG
7 2
DATA Y
8 1
WSB07006KD
7-20

ROS MOT ON
Drive control signal of the ROS MOTOR
ROS MOT CLK
SOS Reference signal for scan start of LASER
V REF K
V REF C
Emission control signal of the laser diode
V REF M
V REF Y
LD ERR Error signal of the laser diode
PCONT Power control signal of the laser diode
DATA K
DATA C
Video signal of the laser diode
DATA M
DATA Y
7-21
§ 5 XEROGRAPHIC
PWBA MCU
PL8.2.13 HARN ASSY PHD XPRO
PL9.1.11
P/J42 P/J144
+3.3VDC DATA
1 4 PWBA EEPROM
CLOCK PL8.2.16
2 3
+3.3VDC
3 2
SG
4 1
PHD ASSY
PL4.1.21
P/J422
5 +3.3VLD 6 EEPROM PHD
+3.3VDC DATA
6 5
7 CLOCK 4
+3.3VDC
8 3
SG
9 2
+3.3VLD
10 1
to ROS
HARN ASSY HUM
PL9.1.6
P/J20 P/J201
TEMP.
+5VDC 1 4 SENSOR HUM
SG PL8.2.7
2 3
HUMI.
3 2
+5VDC
4 1
HARN ASSY LVPS

+3.3VDC PL9.1.3
P/J14 P/J141
15 +3.3VDC 3 LED ASSY ERASE
ERASE Y/M/C ON (L) +3.3VDC PL4.1.8
16 2
ERASE K ON (L) +3.3VDC
17 1
TRANSFER ASSY
HARN ASSY L SIDE PL6.1.7
PL3.1.18
P/J28 P/J281 P/J2811
+5VDC
1 5 1 5
ADC SENSOR
2 4 2 4
LED REM
3 3 3 3 ADC SENSOR
ADC V MONI
4 2 4 2
SG
5 1 5 1
WSB07007KC
7-22

CLOCK
Control signal of the PWBA EEPROM
DATA
CLOCK
Control signal of the EEPROM PHD
DATA
Temperature data in the printer by the SENSOR HUM
TEMP.
(Analog value)
Humidity data in the printer by the SENSOR HUM
HUMI.
(Analog value)
ERASE K ON (L) +3.3VDC
ON/OFF signal of the LED ASSY ERASE
ERASE Y/M/C ON (L) +3.3VDC
Toner patch density data measured by the ADC SENSOR
ADC SENSOR
(Analog value)
LED REM Remote signal of the LED of ADC SENSOR
ADC V MONI Control signal of the ADC SENSOR
7-23
§ 6 HIGH VOLTAGE
PWBA MCU PWBA HVPS

PL8.2.13 PL4.1.19
A
P/J16 P/J161
TR MON
10 1
CF MON
9 2
+3.0V REF E
HV DO
8 3
HV LD I
7 4
HV CLK D
6 5
+3.0V REF H
5 6
SG C
4 7
MAIN CLK G
3 8
SG B
2 9
I/L +24V F
1 10
BCR
BTR
K Developer
C
BTR : Bias Transfer Roll
BCR : Bias Charge Roll
WSB07008KB
7-24

TR MON
CF MON
HV DO
Control signal of the HVPS
HV LD
HV CLK
MAIN CLK
7-25
§ 7 DEVELOPER
PWBA MCU
PL8.2.13
INTERLOCK
+24VDC HARN ASSY TNR MOT
PL5.1.25
P/J18 P181 J181
Y DISPENSE MOT A MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y)
1 5 1
Y DISPENSE MOT B PL5.1.3
2 4 2
I/L +24VDC
3 3 3 M
INTERLOCK Y DISPENSE MOT XA
4 2 4
+24VDC Y DISPENSE MOT XB
5 1 5
P182 J182
M DISPENSE MOT A MOTOR ASSY DISP (M)
6 5 1
M DISPENSE MOT B PL5.1.3
7 4 2
I/L +24VDC
8 3 3 M
M DISPENSE MOT XA
9 2 4
M DISPENSE MOT XB
10 1 5
INTERLOCK
+24VDC
P/J19
N.C.
1 P191 J191
C DISPENSE MOT A MOTOR ASSY DISP (C)
2 5 1
C DISPENSE MOT B PL5.1.3
3 4 2
I/L +24VDC
4 3 3 M
INTERLOCK C DISPENSE MOT XA
5 2 4
+24VDC C DISPENSE MOT XB
6 1 5
P192 J192
K DISPENSE MOT A MOTOR ASSY DISP (K)
7 5 1
K DISPENSE MOT B PL5.1.3
8 4 2
I/L +24VDC
9 3 3 M
K DISPENSE MOT XA
10 2 4
K DISPENSE MOT XB
11 1 5
HARN ASSY TONER CRUM

P/J31 PL5.1.26 P/J311
+3.3VDC DATA Y IN
1 4
CLK Y OUT
2 3 CONNECTOR CRUM (Y)
+3.3VDC
3 2 PL5.1.14
SG
4 1
P/J312
DATA M IN
5 4
CLK M OUT
6 3 CONNECTOR CRUM (M)
+3.3VDC PL5.1.14
7 2
SG
8 1
P/J313
DATA C IN
9 4
CLK C OUT
10 3 CONNECTOR CRUM (C)
+3.3VDC PL5.1.14
11 2
SG
12 1
P/J314
DATA K IN
13 4
CLK K OUT
14 3 CONNECTOR CRUM (K)
+3.3VDC PL5.1.14
15 2
SG
16 1
WSB07009KB
7-26

Y DISPENSE MOT A
Y DISPENSE MOT B
Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (Y)
Y DISPENSE MOT XA
Y DISPENSE MOT XB
M DISPENSE MOT A
M DISPENSE MOT B
Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (M)
M DISPENSE MOT XA
M DISPENSE MOT XB
C DISPENSE MOT A
C DISPENSE MOT B
Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (C)
C DISPENSE MOT XA
C DISPENSE MOT XB
K DISPENSE MOT A
K DISPENSE MOT B
Drive control signal of the MOTOR ASSY DISP (K)
K DISPENSE MOT XA
K DISPENSE MOT XB
DATA Y IN
Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (Y)
CLK Y OUT
DATA M IN
Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (M)
CLK M OUT
DATA C IN
Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (C)
CLK C OUT
DATA K IN
Control signal of the CONNECTOR CRUM (K)
CLK K OUT
7-27
§ 8 FUSER
PWBA MCU FUSER ASSY

PL8.2.13 PL6.1.1
HARN ASSY FUSER
P/J17 PL6.1.2 P/J171 P/J175
VC
8 1 8 1 3 NC SNS
VD
7 2 7 2 2
SG
6 3 6 3 1
P/J176
SG
5 4 5 1 2 STS
STS
4 5 4 2 1
+3.3VDC
P/J172 P/J173
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) +3.3VDC 6 3
3 1 3 1
2 SG 7 2 2 2 2
PULL UP +3.3VDC
1 8 1 3 1 3
EXIT
SENSOR
PWBA LVPS
PL8.2.1
P/J171
LAMP
1 1 P1711 Heater
P/J14 P/J501 CONTROL P/J47
xHEAT1 N HEAT1 2 2 P1712
10 5 3
FUSER ON LINE 3 3 P1713
9 6 1
Thermostat
P/J504
1
2
J5041
1
RELAY TEST LOW
Used in production 2
process only. RELAY TEST HIGH
3
HARN ASSY TEST RL
PL5.1.28
230V Spec.
P/J171
1 1
P/J47 N HEAT1
2 2
3
LINE 3 3
1
WSB07010GC
7-28

VC Temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for controlling
VD temperature (analog value)
Heat Roll surface temperature data measured by Temp. Sensor for
STS
detecting high temperature (analog value)
FUSER EXIT SENSED (L) Paper detect signal of the Fuser Exit by the Sensor Photo (EXIT
+3.3VDC SENSOR)
FUSER ON Lighting signal of Fuser Lamp
RELAY TEST LOW
Test signal of the LVPS (Used in production process only)
RELAY TEST HIGH
7-29
§ 9 CONTROLLER
PWB ESS PWBA MCU

PL8.1.9 HARN ASSY ESS PL8.2.13
PL9.1.1
P/J101 P/J10
+3.3VDC TEST PRINT +3.3VDC
1 18
SG
2 17
+3.3VDC
3 16
DEEP SLEEP
4 15
SG
5 14
STS
6 13
CMD
7 12
CREADY
8 11
SREADY
9 10
SG
10 9
VSYNC K
11 8
VSYNC C
12 7
VSYNC M
13 6
VSYNC Y
14 5
SG
15 4
HSYNC
16 3
SG
17 2
18 1
HARN ASSY ESS VIDEO

PL9.1.2
P/J111 P/J11
SG
1 8
DATA K
2 7
SG
3 6
DATA C
4 5
SG
5 4
DATA M
6 3
SG
7 2
DATA Y
8 1
PWBA LVPS
PL8.2.1
+5VDC HARN ASSY ESS POWER
PL9.1.10 +5VDC
P/J401 P/J40
+3.3VDC +5VDC +3.3VDC
1 1
SG
2 2
+3.3VDC
3 3
SG
4 4
HARNESS ASSY B HARNESS ASSY A-OP CONSOLE ASSY

PL9.1.12 PL1.1.17 PANEL
P/J29 P/J2900 P/J220 PL1.1.19
7 1 7 SG 1
+5VDC DATA +5VDC
6 2 6 2
5 3 5 CLK 3
4 4 4 +5VDC 4
WAKE UP
3 5 3 5
2 6 2 LED ON 6
1 7 1 +3.3VDC 7
WSB07011GA
7-30

TEST PRINT Control signal for the TEST PRINT mode
DEEP SLEEP Control signal for the DEEP SLEEP mode
STS Status signal transmitted fro the PWBA MCU to the PWB ESS
Command signal transmitted from the PWB ESS to the
CMD
PWBA MCU
CREADY Signal for indicating weather or not the printer is ready for
SREADY receiving command signal
VSYNC K
VSYNC C Signal for indicating registration position of each of images
VSYNC M Y, M, C and K
VSYNC Y
HSYNC Signal for data
DATA K
DATA C
Video data of four colors
DATA M
DATA Y
DATA
CLK
Control signal of the CONSOLE ASSY
WAKE UP
LED ON
7-31
7-32
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional) .........................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Checking the Package Contents ............................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB) .........................................................................8-5
8.2.1 Checking the Package Contents ............................................................................................ 8-5
8.2.2 Installation Procedure............................................................................................................. 8-5
8.2.3 Changing the Accessory Configuration on the Print Driver .................................................... 8-9
8.1 Network Expansion Card (Optional)
CAUTION Before plugging or unplugging the interface cable connector, be sure to

switch off the printer or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
Plugging or unplugging the connector when the printer is on can cause
printer failure.
If installing the network expansion card to the printer when the printer
is used in a network environment, the entire network-related settings on
the printer will be initialized to the defaults. Before installing the
network expansion card, we suggest you to record the current settings
by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Refer to the User Guide on how
to print the [Printer Settings] list..
8.1.1 Checking the Package Contents

The packaging box contains the following items. If you find any items missing, please contact our
Customer Support Center or your dealers.
• Network expansion card • 2 screws
• Installation guide
8-1
8.1.2 Installation Procedure

The network expansion card goes into the controller board right above additional memory (optional).
If you purchased additional memory, install it before installing the network expansion card. For
information on how to install additional memory to the printer, refer to the User Guide.
Network
expansion card Additional memory
Follow these steps when installing the network expansion card to the printer.
1. Switch the power off by pressing the power

switch located on the left side of the printer to the
<O> position.
Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and
the printer.
2. Loosen the screw on the rear cover of the printer

and open the cover.
3. Remove the rear cover from the printer by pulling

out the bottom tab of the cover from the slot,
tilting the cover, and pulling out the top tab of the
cover from the slot.
8-2
4.
Remove the black plastic part (used for the
wireless LAN) from the network expansion card.
Important
Remove the black plastic part from the network
expansion card before installing the card to the printer.
Otherwise, the rear cover cannot be closed.
The black plastic part cannot be removed after the
network expansion card is installed to the printer.
Make sure to remove the part in this step.
5. Align the connector of the network expansion

card with the card connector on the printer and
insert the card into the connector.
Use the following procedure since the opening on
the printer is narrow.
1) Insert the left side of the card at an angle into
the opening on the printer.
2) Insert the right side of the card into the
opening and align the connector of the network
expansion card with the card connector on the
printer.
3) Push the network expansion card by the part
shown in the figure and firmly insert it into the
connector.
6. Check the following to ensure that the connector

of the network expansion card is inserted
correctly.
- There is no gap between the connector of the
network expansion card and the card connector
on the printer.
- The two screw holes on the network expansion
card are perfectly aligned with the holes on the
printer.
8-3
7. Secure the network expansion card onto the

controller board by tightening the two screws
(supplied) from the outside of the printer.
8. Re-attach the rear cover on the printer by

inserting the top tab and then bottom one of the
cover into the slots. Then, close the rear cover
and tighten the screw loosened in Step 2.
9. Plug in the power cord and switch the power on by pressing the power switch to the <|> position.
The installation is now complete.
NOTE You can check whether the network expansion card has been installed
correctly by printing out the [Printer Settings] list. Refer to the User Guide on
how to print the [Printer Settings] list.
8-4
8.2 Additional Memory (256MB/512MB)

In case of the following situations, install additional memory to the printer.
- When the [Out of Memory] message appears frequently on the control panel
- When using the Secure/Sample Print feature
- When using the electronic sort function
Additional memory may be required also when printing large data such as complex graphics.
NOTE For more information about additional memory and how to order it, refer to
"A.2 Optional Accessories" (User Guide P. 182).
8.2.1 Checking the Package Contents

The packaging box contains the following items. If you find any items missing, please contact our
Customer Support Center or your dealers.
• Memory card
8.2.2 Installation Procedure

Additional memory goes into the controller board right underneath a network expansion card
(optional). If your printer is the DocuPrint 1110 with a network expansion card installed, remove the
network expansion card to get an access to the RAM slot. For information on how to uninstall/re-
install the network expansion card, refer to the installation guide included with the printer.
Network
expansion card Additional memory
The following describes how to install additional memory to the printer.

The printer has one slot for installing a memory card. If you want to add memory when the slot already
has a memory card, replace the memory card with the one with larger capacity.
CAUTION Before plugging or unplugging the interface cable connector, be sure to

switch off the printer or unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
Plugging or unplugging the connector when the printer is on can cause
printer failure.
8-5
1. Switch the power off by pressing the power

switch located on the left side of the printer to the
<O> position.
Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and
the printer.
2. Loosen the screw on the rear cover of the printer

and open the cover.
3. Remove the rear cover from the printer by pulling

out the bottom tab of the cover from the slot,
tilting the cover, and pulling out the top tab of the
cover from the slot.
4. If a network expansion card is installed, remove it

temporarily.
5.
If another memory card is already installed, push
the retaining clips on both ends in the outward
direction. After the memory card pops up, pull it
out at an angle.
8-6
6. Hold the new memory card so that the notch on

the card comes below the center of the card.
7. Use the following steps to install the memory card to the printer.
1) Align the notch on the new memory card with the

projection on the RAM slot, and insert the
memory card at an angle into the slot.
Important
Make sure to insert the memory card securely until the
terminal area cannot be seen.
2) Check the following points to ensure that the

memory card is inserted correctly.
- The terminal area of the memory card cannot
be seen.
- The memory card is not inserted at an angle.
8-7
3) Push the new memory card by the part shown in

the figure. When the card is installed correctly, it
clicks into place.
8. If the network expansion card was removed, re-

install it to the printer.
9. Re-attach the rear cover on the printer by

inserting the top tab and then bottom one of the
cover into the slots. Then, close the rear cover
and tighten the screw loosened in Step 2.
10. Plug in the power cord and switch on the power by pressing the power switch to the <|> position.
The installation is now complete.
NOTE You can check whether the memory card is installed correctly by printing out
the [Printer Settings] list. [Memory Capacity] under [General] shows the total
memory capacity of the printer (which is the memory on the controller board
(128 MB) plus the memory you just added). For information on how to print
the [Printer Settings] list, refer to " Printing a Report/List" (User Guide P.
138).
8-8
8.2.3 Changing the Accessory Configuration on the Print Driver

If you are finished installing additional memory to the printer, change the accessory configuration.
This can be done on the [Options] tab on your print driver.
The following procedure use the PCL print driver as an example.
1. On the Windows [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].

Select to highlight the printer, and select [Properties] from the [File] menu.
2. The Properties dialog box appears. In the dialog box, click the [Options] tab.
3. Select [Memory Capacity] from [Items], and then select the total memory capacity of the printer
from [Memory Capacity].
4. Select [RAM Disk] from [Items], and then select [Available] from [RAM Disk].
5. Click [OK] to close the Properties dialog box.
8-9
8-10
CONTENTS
10.1 Printing Process .....................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Summary of Printing Process ..................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.2 Schematic Diagram for Printing Processes ................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.3 Description of Printing Process Techniques ............................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3.1 Charging with electricity ...................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.3.2 Exposure............................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.1.3.3 Development....................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.3.4 Transfer (Drum -> Paper) ................................................................................................... 10-8
10.1.3.5 Cleaning............................................................................................................................ 10-10
10.1.3.6 Excess Toner Collecting ................................................................................................... 10-11
10.1.3.7 Fusing ............................................................................................................................... 10-12
10.2 Paper Path............................................................................................................10-13
10.2.1 Paper Path ................................................................................................................................ 10-13
10.2.2 Layout of Paper Path ................................................................................................................ 10-14
10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components .........................................................10-15
10.3.1 Paper Cassette ......................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.3.1.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-15
10.3.1.2 Reference diagram ........................................................................................................... 10-16
10.3.1.3 Multiple Sheet Feed Prevention........................................................................................ 10-17
10.3.2 Paper Feeder ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
10.3.2.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.3.3 SSI & Regi Assy........................................................................................................................ 10-20
10.3.3.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.3.3.3 Lead-edge Registration..................................................................................................... 10-22
10.3.3.5 Paper detection by the Regi Sensor ................................................................................. 10-23
10.3.4 Transfer Belt & Fuser................................................................................................................ 10-24
10.3.4.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-24
10.3.5 ROS ASSY................................................................................................................................ 10-26
10.3.5.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-26
10.3.6 TONER CARTRIDGE & DISPENSER ...................................................................................... 10-28
10.3.6.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-28
10.3.7 PHD ASSY................................................................................................................................ 10-29
10.3.7.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-29
10.3.8 Drive.......................................................................................................................................... 10-31
10.3.8.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-31
10.3.9 Electrical ................................................................................................................................... 10-34
10.3.9.1 Major functions.................................................................................................................. 10-34
10.3.9.3 Data Flow.......................................................................................................................... 10-37
10.4 MODES ................................................................................................................10-38
10.4.1 Operation Modes ...................................................................................................................... 10-38
10.5 Control ..................................................................................................................10-39
10.5.1 Control of Paper Size................................................................................................................ 10-39
10.5.2 ROS Light Quantity Control ...................................................................................................... 10-39
10.5.3 Process Control ........................................................................................................................ 10-40
10.5.3.1 Potential Control ............................................................................................................... 10-40
10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control ....................................................................................................... 10-41
10.5.3.3 High Area Coverage Mode ............................................................................................... 10-42
10.5.3.4 Admix Mode ...................................................................................................................... 10-42
10.5.3.5 LED Light Quantity Control of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR.................. 10-43
10.5.4 Color Registration Control......................................................................................................... 10-44
10.5.5 Fuser Control ............................................................................................................................ 10-45
10.5.5.1 Fuser temperature control................................................................................................. 10-45
10.5.5.2 Cooling down .................................................................................................................... 10-45
10.5.5.3 Sensor Warm-up............................................................................................................... 10-45
10.6 Drive Transmission Route ....................................................................................10-46
10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN .................................................................................................................. 10-46
10.6.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB DRIVE ................................................................ 10-49
10.6.3 TONER DISPENSER (Y, M, C, K)............................................................................................ 10-54
10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB .................................................................................................................... 10-56
10.1 Printing Process

10.1.1 Summary of Printing Process
This printer is a "Full-color laser printer" which applies the principle of an electrophotographic recording system. The
tandem system comprising the four color PHD ASSY of yellow, magenta, cyan and black (Y, M, C and K) creates the
toner image.
Printing processes of this printer is composed of the basic steps as follows.
(1) Charge: ........................ Drum surface is charged with electricity.

(2) Exposure: .................... Image unit is exposed to laser beams.
(3) Development:.............. Image is developed with toner.
(4) Transfer: ...................... Four-color finished toner image on the Drum is transferred onto the paper.
(5) Cleaning: ..................... Remaining toner on the drum is collected.
(6) Fusing:......................... Toner on the paper is fixed by heat and pressure.
(7) Cleaning: ..................... Remaining toner on the belt is collected.
PHD ASSY
Wsb10001FA
10-1
10.1.2 Schematic Diagram for Printing Processes
Outline of printing processes is shown in the figure below.
: Laser beam
: Paper transfer
PHD ASSY
[(1) Charge]
[(3) Development]
[(4) Transfer]
[(5) Cleaning]
ROS FUSER
[(2) Exposure] [(6) Fusing]
TRANSFER BELT
[(4) Transfer]
[(7) Cleaning]
Wsb10002FA
10-2
10.1.3 Description of Printing Process Techniques
10.1.3.1 Charging with electricity

In the charging process, the drum surface rotating at a constant speed is charged uniformly with negative electricity by
the discharge from BCR (Bias Charge Roll).
This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors.
z The BCR is kept in contact with the drum and rotates following the rotations of the drum.
BCR is a conductive roll, receives discharge voltage from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) and
discharges a negative DC voltage.
z The drum surface is uniformly and negatively charged with DC bias voltage.
The drum surface is a photoreceptor (which is an insulator in the dark and a conductor in the light) and the
drum inside is composed of a conductor.
z The Cleaning Roll is a sponge, which contacts with the BCR to catch the toner.
Wsb06003KA
engine principle0006FA
10-3
10.1.3.2 Exposure
In the exposure process, the drum surface charged negatively is scanned by laser beams to form invisible electrostatic
latent image on the drum surface.
This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black colors.
z Laser beams are emitted from the laser diode in the ROS ASSY. By the rotating polygon mirror, fixed mirror
and lens attached to the Scanner Motor Assy of the ROS ASSY, the surface of each color drum is scanned
from end to end in the axial direction.
: Laser beams (K)

: Laser beams (C)
: Laser beams (M)
: Laser beams (Y)
Mirror Mirror Mirror
Drum (K)
Lens
Polygon Mirror Mirror

Drum (C)
Lens
Mirror
Drum (M)
Mirror Lens
Lens
Mirror Drum (Y)
Mirror Lens
Mirror
Wsb06004KA
10-4
z The laser beam is irradiated according to the printing data (image data) output from the printer controller. The
laser beam is output only when printing data is pixels (micro points composing characters or pictures). (The
laser diode lights up for parts to be developed by toner, and not for parts that are not to be developed.)
The drum surface irradiated by the laser beam becomes a conductor, and the negative charge on the drum
surface flows to the positive side and the charges cancel each other out so that the potential on the drum
surface drops. The part on the surface where potential drops becomes the electrostatic latent image.
10-5
10.1.3.3 Development
In the development process, toner is electrically attached to the invisible electrostatic latent image on the drum surface to
form visible toner image on the drum.
This process is performed in parallel for yellow, magenta, cyan and black color independently.
z The toner in the toner cartridge is agitated by the built-in Agitator and fed into the developer. The Auger is
driven by the toner motor.The amount of toner to be consumed according to the print count is calculated and
that amount is fed into the developer. This is called "toner dispensation", which is controlled by two types of
control, "PCDC" and "ADC". (Refer to “10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control”)
z The toner fed into the developer and the carrier in the developer are agitated by the Auger, and supplied to the
Magnet Roll arranged in the vicinity of the drum surface. The toner and carrier are charged by friction due to
the agitation (toner in negative, carrier in positive), and they are attracted to one another electrically. As the
carrier is a magnetic substance, it is attracted to the Magnet Roll having a magnetic force and a homogeneous
layer is formed by the Trimmer Rod.
z The magnet roll is covered by a thin semi-conductive sleeve over the surface. DB (Developing Bias) voltage
is supplied to this semiconductor sleeve from the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). DB voltage is negative
DC voltage combined with AC voltage. The magnet roll is kept at a constant negative voltage against the
photoreceptor layer of the drum by DC voltage. Therefore, at the area surface where the negative electric
charge on the drum does not decrease, potential is lower than the magnet roll, while the potential is higher than
the magnet roll at the area where the negative charge on the drum surface decreases. The AC voltage shakes
the developer on the magnet roll surface Stimulating the toner to fly to the drum.
Thus, the toner charged negatively is attracted only to the drum surface area where the negative charge has
decreased below that of the magnet roll (electrostatic latent image) and the toner image is formed on the
drum.
Once the toner is adhered on the drum, the negative charge of the toner-bearing portion increases, which
decreases the potential and the toner-attracting force of that portion.
10-6
: Negative electric charge

Toner Cartridge : Positive electric charge
Agitator : Toner
: Carrier
Paddle
Trimmer Rod
Drum
Auger
Magnet Roll
HVPS
Auger
Wsb06005KA
10-7
10.1.3.4 Transfer (Drum -> Paper)

In the transfer process, toner image formed on the drum surface is transferred onto the surface of the paper. The toner is
transferred onto the paper in the order of Y, M, C, and K.
z BTR
The BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) is a conductive roll, to which the positive voltage is applied from the High
Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). The BTR contacts the rear side of the Belt and applies the positive voltage to
the Belt.
z Belt
The Belt is a conductive belt, to which the positive voltage is applied from the BTR. After the negatively
charged toner image on the drum surface is drawn by the positive charge on the belt, it is transferred from the
drum to the paper. The Belt feeds the paper to the direction of FUSER.
Paper : Negative electric charge

: Positive electric charge
: Toner
Drum (K)
BTR
Drum (C)
Drum surface
BTR
Drum (M)
BTR
BTR
Drum (Y)
HVPS
Transfer Belt
Wsb06007KA
10-8
Kmy06007KA
10-9
10.1.3.5 Cleaning
In the cleaning process, excess toner is removed from the drum surfaces, while excess charge is also eliminated from the
drum surface.
z Drum cleaning
The cleaning blade contacts the surface of the drum collecting the excess toner by scraping.
z Cleaning Roll
The Cleaning Roll contacts the surface of the BCR collecting the foreign matter.
z Charge cleaning
When the drum is charged by BCR, any excess charge hinders the drum surface from being uniformly
charged, which may lead to print quality problems.
The excess charge on the surface of the drum is eliminated by irradiating the light of the Erase Lamp (LED
ASSEMBLY).
Wsb06008KA
10-10
10.1.3.6 Excess Toner Collecting

(1) The excess toner is collected by the cleaner blade contacting the drum, and then carried to the AUGER
CLNG SIDE by the Auger.
(2) The toner is carried by the AUGER CLNG SIDE to the joint to the collection box in the toner cartridge.
(3) The toner then falls into the collection box in the toner cartridge.
AUGER CLNG SIDE
Collection Box
Toner Cartridge
2)
Auger
1) Cleaner Blade
3)
Wsb06006KA
10-11
10.1.3.7 Fusing
In the fusing process, toner is fixed on the paper by heat and pressure.
z Since the finished toner image transferred from the belt can be easily broken by a finger touch, the toner
image must be fixed on the paper with the FUSER (fusing unit).
The toner particles are melted by the HEAT ROLL heated by the Heater lamp and is deposited on the paper
under pressure given by the belt opposed against the heat roll.
Table 10-1 Conditions to be met to light up the Heater Lamp
Warm up Stand by Printing

Main Heater Lamp ON ON/OFF ON
Spring Nip Nip Head
Paper
Felt
Belt
Frame Belt
Fixed toner
Heat Roll
Heater Lamp Sheet

Not fixed toner
Wsb06009KA
10-12
10.2 Paper Path
10.2 Paper Path

10.2.1 Paper Path
Wsb06010KA
10-13
10.2 Paper Path
10.2.2 Layout of Paper Path
: Laser beam
: Paper transfer
: Paper sensors
Exit roll [Fuser]
Exit Sensor [Fuser]
Heat roll [Fuser]
Pressure belt [Fuser]
Belt [Transfer Belt]
Regi roll (rubber)

[Regi Assembly]
Regi roll (metal)

[Regi Assembly]
SSI No Paper Sensor

[Regi Assembly]
Regi Sensor [Regi Assembly]

Retard roller [Tray 1]
Feed roll [Feeder Assy V]
Tray No Paper Sensor [Feeder Assy V]
Wsb10011FA
10-14
10.3 Functions of Major Functional Components

Major functional components of the printer are described below with illustrations.
These components are classified into the following blocks based on the configuration of the printer.
z Paper Cassette
z Paper Feeder
z SSI & Regi Assy
z Transfer Belt & Fuser
z ROS ASSY
z TONER CARTRIDGE & Dispenser
z PHD ASSY
z Drive
z Electrical
10.3.1 Paper Cassette
10.3.1.1 Major functions

SIDE GUIDE(R/L)
The SIDE GUIDE(R/L) can move at a right angle to the paper transfer direction to align the paper width.
END GUIDE
The END GUIDE can move in the paper transfer direction to determine the paper size.
RETARD ROLLER
The RETARD ROLLER and the FEED ROLLER pinch the paper to prevent multiple sheet feed.
BOTTOM PLATE
BOTTOM PLATE is locked to the bottom side when paper cassette is pulled out from the paper feeder and unlocked
when paper cassette is installed to the paper feeder. Pushes the paper against the feed roll using a spring tension.
10-15
10.3.1.2 Reference diagram
Bottom Plate End Guide
Side Guide (L)
Side Guide (R)
Retard Roller
Wsb10012FA
10-16
10.3.1.3 Multiple Sheet Feed Prevention

The sheets set in a tray or cassette are occasionally stuck together along the edges. The stuck sheets cause a multiple
sheet feed or a jam. The sheets are fed by the Feed Roll to a position between the Feed Roll and the Retard Roll.
Normally, when only one sheet is fed, both the Feed Roll and Retard Roll rotate to allow the sheet to pass. However,
when two sheets are fed concurrently, only the Feed Roll rotates and the Retard Roll is locked thereby allowing the upper
sheet to pass by being separated from the lower sheet that is stopped by the friction with the Retard Roll at rest.
The Retard Roll is being pushed toward the Feed Roll by spring pressure, and controlled by the torque limiter (Clutch
Assy Friction) with which it is coupled.
Feed Roller
Retard Roller
Clutch Assy Friction
Retard Roller
Wsb10013FA
10-17
10.3.2 Paper Feeder

SENSOR PHOTO (No Paper Sensor)
Detects the presence/absence of paper in the paper tray based on the position of ACTUATOR NO PAPER. (No paper:
Sensor beam is intercepted)
SENSOR PHOTO SENSOR PHOTO

(Tray No Paper Sensor) (Tray No Paper Sensor)
Paper
Bottom Plate
ACTUATOR NO PAPER ACTUATOR NO PAPER

(No Paper Position)
Wsb06014KA
SOLENOID ASSY FEED
Transmits the drive from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to FEED ROLLER. (Refer to “10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB”)
FEED ROLLER
When the SOLENOID ASSY FEED operates, the FEED ROLLER starts rotating and the FEED ROLLER feeds the
paper. (Refer to “10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB”)
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
DRIVE ASSY PH
FEED ROLLER
SOLENOID ASSY FEED

Wsb06015KA
10-18
FEED ROLLER
SENSOR PHOTO (Tray No Paper Sensor)
SOLENOID ASSY FEED

Wsb06016GA
10-19
10.3.3 SSI & Regi Assy

SENSOR PHOTO (SSI No Paper Sensor)
Detects presence/absence of paper in the SSI tray by the change in actuator position.
SSI No Paper Sensor
Upon detecting the sheet, the Regi Roll rotates for a predetermined duration to feed the sheet. The sheet is fixed between
the Rolls so that it may not fall from the SSI.
The Rolls stop immediately when the Regi Sensor detects the presence of paper.
SENSOR PHOTO SENSOR PHOTO

(SSI No Paper Sensor) (SSI No Paper Sensor)
ACTUATOR SSI
Paper
Regi Roll Regi Roll
ACTUATOR SSI
(No Paper Position)
Wsb06017GA
SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)
It detects when the paper front end reaches the CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI.
When the paper feeds from the SSI, Regi Sensor is measuring the paper length (size).
The ON time of Regi Sensor is converted into the paper length.
ON: The paper activates the actuator.
Regi Clutch
CLUTCH ASSY REGI transmits the driving power from the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to ROLL ASSY REGI, and
transports the paper from the tray and SSI toward the PHD ASSY direction.
The timing of sheet feed from the Regi Assy is adjusted by the duration of the Regi Clutch operation so that the toner
image on the drum can be transferred to the appropriate position on the sheet. (Refer to “10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB”)
10-20
Rear view illustration
ACTUATOR REGI ROLL ACTUATOR REGI OUT
SPRING REGI OUT

ACTUATOR REGI IN
SPRING ACT REGI
ROLL REGI METAL
REGI CLUTCH SENSOR PHOTO (Regi Sensor)

ROLL ASSY REGI(Rubber)
Wsb06018GA
10-21
10.3.3.3 Lead-edge Registration

When a sheet is fed from the Tray to the toner transfer position, the registration of the sheet may not be correctly
maintained due to such troubles as misalignment of lead edges in the Tray.To avoid this trouble, the lead edge position
needs to be aligned at the Regi part before the sheet is fed to the toner transfer position.
By thrusting the edge of the sheet coming out of the Tray against the Regi Roll that is at rest, the lead edge of the sheet is
registered.
REGI ROLL
Wsb06019KA
REGI ROLL
SKEWED PAPER Wsb06020KA
10-22
10.3.3.5 Paper detection by the Regi Sensor

Since the paper path from the SSI to the Regi Sensor and that from the Paper Tray to the Regi Sensor are different, the
Regi Sensor is provided with the ACTUATOR REGI IN and the ACTUATOR REGI ROLL. The ACTUATOR REGI
ROLL detects the sheet from the SSI and detects the tail edge of the paper from the paper tray. The ACTUATOR REGI
IN detects the lead edge of the paper from the paper tray. However, the movement of ACTUATOR REGI IN does not
affect that of ACTUATOR REGI ROLL.
ACTUATOR REGI ROLL ACTUATOR REGI OUT
SPRING REGI OUT

ACTUATOR REGI IN
SPRING ACT REGI
Normal Position From Paper Tray

ACTUATOR REGI ROLL
SENSOR PHOTO ACTUATOR REGI IN
(Regi Sensor)
SENSOR PHOTO
ACTUATOR REGI IN (Regi Sensor)
PAPER
Detection of paper (Tail Edge) From SSI

PAPER
ACTUATOR ACTUATOR
REGI ROLL REGI ROLL
SENSOR PHOTO
(Regi Sensor)
PAPER
SENSOR PHOTO
(Regi Sensor) ACTUATOR REGI IN ACTUATOR REGI IN
Wsb06041KA
10-23
10.3.4 Transfer Belt & Fuser

TRANSFER BELT
z Belt
Belt feeds the paper to the direction of FUSER.
z Sensor ADC
Sensor ADC reads the toner patch on the BELT, and converts it to voltage value. Voltage value is used to
control the density of toner. (Refer to “10.5.3.1 Potential Control”)
FUSER
The FUSER fixes toner which was transferred onto the paper but not fixed by the heat and pressure and feeds
paper before and after being fixed.
The FUSER mainly consists of the following parts:
z Heat Roll z Pressure Belt
z Heater Lamp z Roll Assy Exit
z Thermostat z Exit Sensor
z Temp. Sensor
z Exit Sensor
Detects passage of print after fixed based on the change of position of the actuator.
10-24

HEAT ROLL
PRESSURE BELT
SENSOR PHOTO
(Exit Sensor)
THERMOSTAT
TEMP. SENSOR
(Un-contacting type)
HEATER LAMP
TEMP. SENSOR
(Contacted type)
ROLL ASSY EXIT
FUSER
SENSOR ADC
BLADE ASSY
TRANSFER BELT
BELT
Wsb06021GA
10-25
10.3.5 ROS ASSY

ROS ASSY
ROS ASSY is an exposure unit that generates laser beams to form electrostatic latent image on the drum surface.
In this manual, the ROS ASSY is referred to as ROS.
The ROS mainly consists of the following parts:
z LD PWB
z Scanner ASSY
z SOS PWB
z Lens
z Mirror
z Window
LD PWB
The LD PWB is comprised of four LDs (laser diodes) corresponding to Y, M, C, and K.
Each LD converts the electric signals of incoming image data into laser wave or pulse. In order to stabilize the
laser light quantity during formation of an electrostatic latent image, the LD PWB always monitors the laser light
quantity to adjust it to the appropriate level. This is called "APC (auto power control)".
Scanner Assy
The Scanner Assy is comprised of the Scanner Motor that rotates at a constant speed and the Polygon Mirror that
is mounted on the motor shaft.
The laser light output from the LD is irradiated onto the Polygon Mirror via the Mirror.
The Polygon Mirror, provided with six reflecting mirror faces, changes the reflection angle of the laser light as it
rotates by the Scanner Motor, thereby allowing the laser light to scan the drum along its axial direction. Scanning
is performed using one reflecting mirror face for each line.
SOS PWB
The SOS sensor on the SOS (start of scan) PWB converts an incoming laser beam, upon detection, to an electric
signal as the reference signal for starting scanning and transmits this signal to the PWBA MCU.
The SOS sensor signals are used to synchronize the starting point of the laser-beam scanning with the starting
point of the image writing.
Lens
Mirror
Window
The laser light reflected from the Polygon Mirror reaches the drum surface via the Lens, Mirror, and Window. The
Lens corrects aberration, the Mirror secures an optical path, and the Window prevents foreign matters from
entering the ROS.
10-26
Rear view illustration Mirror

Polygon Mirror
Scanner Assy
Mirror
LD PWB
Lens
Mirror
SOS PWB
SOS Sensor
Mirror ROS
Lens
Window
Wsb06022GA
10-27
10.3.6 TONER CARTRIDGE & DISPENSER

CONNECTOR CRUM (CRUM Sensor)
The CONNECTOR CRUM reads and writes the data of the CRUM. (CRUM : Customer Replaceable Unit Memory)
Printer specific information is stored.
DISPENSE MOTOR (Y/M/C/K)
The dispense motor supplies the drive to the Agitator and Auger in the TONER CARTRIDGE, and supplies toner to the
developer.
DISPENSE MOTOR (K)
TONER CARTRIDGE (K)

DISPENSE MOTOR (C)
CONNECTOR CRUM (K)
TONER CARTRIDGE (C) DISPENSE MOTOR (M)
CONNECTOR CRUM (C)

DISPENSE MOTOR (Y)
TONER CARTRIDGE (M)
CONNECTOR CRUM (M)
TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
CONNECTOR CRUM (Y)
Wsb06023GA
10-28
10.3.7 PHD ASSY

PHD ASSY
PHD ASSY carries out a series of operation in the print process such as charging, and transfer.
PHD ASSY mainly consists of the following parts.
Developer is an equipment which develops images in the print process.
z Drum (Y) z Developer (Y)
z Drum (M) z Developer (M)
z Drum (C) z Developer (C)
z Drum (K) z Developer (K)
CRUM
PHD specific information is stored.
Erase Lamp (LED ASSEMBLY)
The light of the LED is reflected by the HOLDER ASSY ERASE.

The light of the LED eliminates the charge on the drum.
PHD ASSY HOLDER ASSY ERASE ERASE LAMP
DRUM LED ASSEMBLY
Wsb10024FA
10-29

CRUM
Developer (K)
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
PHD ASSY
Drum (K)
Drum (C)
Drum (M)
Drum (Y)
LED ASSEMBLY
Wsb10025FA
10-30
10.3.8 Drive

DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Supplies the drive to parts as follows. (Refer to “10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN”)
z (C/M/Y/K) Drum
z Transfer Belt
z Regi
z Feeder
DRIVE ASSY SUB
Supplies the drive to parts as follows.

z Fuser
z Developer (C/M/Y/K)
10-31
DRIVE ASSY PH
DRIVE ASSY PH transmits the driving force from the DRIV ASSY SUB to relevant parts.
The transmission channel is changed by the COLOR MODE SWITCHING SOLENOID in the DRIVE ASSY PH to
allow the driving force of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN to reach the Black Developer only.
This is performed to ensure that the Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan Developers cannot be rotated by the DRIVE ASSY SUB
during B/W printing.
The COLOR MODE SWITCHING SENSOR detects the status of the transmission route (whether it is set for B/W or full
color).
[ FULL COLOR MODE ]

CAM C
GEAR D3 OUT DRIVE ASSY PH
Drive to
Developer
(Y, M, C)
Drive from
Sub Motor
GEAR D3 IN
[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]

CAM C
GEAR D3 OUT
Drive from
Sub Motor
GEAR D3 IN
[ FULL COLOR MODE ] [ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]

COLOR MODE COLOR MODE
SWITCHING SENSOR SWITCHING SENSOR
CAM C CAM C
GEAR C GEAR C
COLOR MODE COLOR MODE

SWITCHING SOLENOID SWITCHING SOLENOID
Wsb06026KA
10-32
DRIVE ASSY MAIN

DRIVE ASSY SUB
DRIVE ASSY PH
Wsb06027GA
10-33
10.3.9 Electrical

FAN
Disspates heat out of the printer to prevent the printer from overheating.
SWITCH
The SWITCH turns ON/OFF the AC power supply of the printer.
Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS)
The LVPS is provided in two types, 120V and 240V.

Supplies AC power from the power source to the FUSER heater and generates and supplies stable low voltage DC power
used for the logic circuit, etc.
LVPS contains control circuit for the heater of the FUSER, in addition to the power circuit.
Machine Control Unit (MCU)
Controls printing operation based on the communication with the print controller and information from the sensor/
switch.
Major functions are as follows:
z Communication with the ESS.
z Receive of information from the sensors or switches.
z Control of Motor in DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB.
z Distributing low voltage DC power output from LVPS to each component
z Control of ROS
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS)
Supplies high voltage to the following parts in the Transfer Belt and Developer to perform charging, development, and
primary transfer.
z BCR
z BTR
z Developer
PWBA EEPROM
Information unique to the printer is stored.
Electronic Sub System (ESS)
The ESS connected to the MCU controls the entire system (Diagnostic, Interface and Image processing).
HUMIDITY SENSOR
HUMIDITY SENSOR reads the temperature/humidity within the printer and converts the values to voltage values.
10-34
OPERATOR PANEL
OPERATOR PANEL displays the state of the printer using LED.
INTERLOCK SWITCH
INTERLOCK SWITCH is a switch that cuts the +24VDC power supply to the HVPS or Motor, etc. upon the opening of
the Front Cover.
Network Adaptor
A adaptor for enabling the network connectivity of the printer. Connecting the network cable without inserting Network
Adaptor does not connect the printer to the network.
SIDE COVER SWITCH
SIDE COVER SW is a switch that detects the right side cover open.
BREAKER GFI
Opens the circuit upon detecting any voltage or current or leakage current that exceeds the rating of the AC power
supply.
10-35
OPERATOR PANEL
SIDE COVER SWITCH

INTERLOCK SWITCH
PWBA LVPS
FAN
PWBA EEPROM
PWBA ESS
PWBA MCU
SENSOR HUM
MULTI PROTOCOL CARD POWER SWITCH

BREAKER GFI
PWBA HVPS
Wsb06028GA
10-36
10.3.9.3 Data Flow

Print data (electric signal) from the printer controller flows as shown below until it is turned into a print.
Wsb06042KA
10-37
10.4 MODES
10.4 MODES
10.4.1 Operation Modes
For the operation of the printer, the following four modes are provided.
z READY mode
The printer is ready for printing.
z PRINTING mode
The printer is under printing.
z Low Power mode
The printer is under power saving.
z Sleep mode
The printer is under power saving.
10-38
10.5 Control
10.5 Control
10.5.1 Control of Paper Size
The printer doesn't have switches for detecting paper size, and only length of paper is detected by the Regi Sensor when
feeding paper. If printing data and paper size don't match, error is sent to the ESS.
10.5.2 ROS Light Quantity Control
The image data are entered to the laser diodes in the ROS as electric signals (data are expressed with high and low
voltage values), and the laser diodes convert the image data from electric signals to optical signals (data are expressed
with blinking laser beams).
Variations in light quantity of laser beams or variations in optical system (such as lenses) or drum sensitivity cannot
attain a proper electrostatic image, therefore, the laser beam light quantity is monitored and controlled by the laser
diodes.
The ROS in this printer has four laser diodes for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black respectively, and the light quantity is
automatically adjusted for each color.
10-39
10.5 Control
10.5.3 Process Control
For a stable printing, the parameters related to the image forming must be corrected as necessary. The control of entire
printing process including parameter correction control is called "process control".
Mainly, the following two controls are made:
z Potential control
z Toner density control
To supplement these two controls, the following controls are provided:
z High Area Coverage Mode
z Admix Mode
z AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR LED light quantity setting
10.5.3.1 Potential Control

To attain stable printing image density, the drum charging voltage and the developing DC voltage are adjusted according
to the developing capability of each color carrier that varies momentarily. The adjusted drum charging voltage and the
developing DC voltage are fed back to keep the printing image density constant.
The potential control is made immediately before the start of printing, if either of the following conditions is satisfied:
z At the first printing after the power on
z When cumulative print count after the power on exceeds 25
z When a cleaning cycle is executed during continuous printing
The outline of control is as follows.

1 The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR (temperature and humidity sensor) detects the
temperature and humidity, and sets target values of drum charging voltage and developing DC voltage.
2 The patches of respective colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) for the potential control are generated
and transferred on the BTR. (For the shape of patches, see the following figure.)
About 11mm
Y About 12mm
About 3mm
M
About 57mm
3 3) The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR (density sensor) detects the density of the area on
BTR where no toner is present and the density of patches.
10-40
10.5 Control
4 4) The density measured in step 3) is compared with target value set in step 1) to change the drum charging
voltage and the developing DC voltage for each color according to a difference.
10.5.3.2 Toner Density Control

The toner density must be kept constant to attain stable printing image. To keep the toner density constant, the toner
should be dispensed exactly by the quantity consumed for the printing. This system is the PCDC. However, the system
with only the PCDC generates a difference from target toner density, thus requiring the system to correct this error. This
is the toner density control by the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR. These two control systems are
altogether called the toner density control.
1 PCDC (Pixel Count Dispense Control)
The toner quantity consumed in the developing process is calculated by counting the video signals entered
to the PRINT HEAD. The video signal counting is made by the charging and discharging of the capacitor
in the CR circuit arranged in parallel to the video signal line. The consumed toner quantity is calculated by
the toner dispense time. The Toner Motor in the TONER DISPENSER ASSEMBLY is driven by the
amount of calculated toner dispense time to supply the toner into the developer.
2 ADC (Auto Density Control)
The patches of respective colors (yellow, magenta, cyan, and black) for the toner density control are
generated under specified potential condition, and transferred on the BTR. The AUTOMATIC DENSITY
CONTROL SENSOR measures this density. The measured value is compared with reference value, and if
the toner density is low, the toner dispense quantity is increased at the next printing, or if the toner density
is high, the toner dispense quantity is reduced at the next printing. The toner dispense quantity is calculated
by the toner dispense time. This calculation is made for each color.
ADC is made after the completion of printing, if either of the following conditions is satisfied:
- When cumulative print count after the power on exceeds 25
- When a cleaning cycle is executed during continuous printing
3 Example of toner dispensation
The Toner Motor revolves for the duration of the specified time per 1-time dispensation. The toner
dispense time in 1) and 2) above is calculated with the number of revolutions of Toner Motor. In the
following description, this is called the dispense count.
The dispense count calculated by the ADC is cancelled in the subsequent 8 prints.
If 16 dispense counts were calculated as a lack of toner by the ADC, the toner is dispensed additionally to
the dispense count calculated by the PCDC by 2 counts (16/8=2) in the subsequent 8 prints.
Or, if 16 dispense counts were calculated as an excess of toner by the ADC, the toner is dispensed by
subtracting from the dispense count calculated by the PCDC in the subsequent 8 prints. If the excess
amount cannot be subtracted in 8 prints, the remainder is subtracted in 9 and subsequent prints.
10-41
10.5 Control
Total dispense counts 4 5 3 4 2 2 3 4 3 2

Even allotment in first 8 prints
Correction amount by ADC +16
Dispense counts by PCDC 2 3 1 2 0 0 1 2 3 2
Correction amount by ADC -8
Total dispense counts 1 2 0 1 0 0 0 0 2 2
10.5.3.3 High Area Coverage Mode

A continuous printing of the image of area coverage exceeding the toner dispense capability causes the toner density in
the developer to be lowered.
The High Area Coverage Mode extends the next page feed and dispenses the toner during this time, if the toner dispense
time reached the specified value during a continuous printing.
10.5.3.4 Admix Mode

Even the High Area Coverage Mode may not be able to cope with the reduction of toner density in the developer. Also, if
the machine used in high humidity environment is relocated to the place in low humidity environment, the reference
value of toner density is different in respective environments, thus causing large discrepancy between measured value by
AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR and reference value of toner density.
The Admix Mode dispenses the toner immediately to prevent the reduction of toner density, if the patch density result
measured by the AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is far lower than the reference value when the patches
for toner density control are generated.
10-42
10.5 Control
10.5.3.5 LED Light Quantity Control of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR

The AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is a reflection type density sensor that radiates the light to an
objective from the LED in the sensor and detects the reflected light from the objective to output electric signal according
to the light quantity. For exact density measurement, the sensor output value (reflected light quantity) must be the
specified value when no toner is put on the BTR as an objective. The reflected light quantity varies depending on the
BTR surface condition or dirty condition of AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR surface. The light quantity
emitted from the LED is controlled so that the reflected light quantity satisfies the specified value.
This control is made in two ways; one to set the light quantity so that the reflected light quantity satisfies the specified
value, and one to adjust the subsequent light quantity to be within the tolerance.
1 Light quantity setting
The reflected light quantity may vary largely, if the Transfer Roller was replaced or the AUTOMATIC
DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR was cleaned. Assuming this fact, the light quantity is set when the power
is turned on, or the front cover is opened and closed.
The light quantity of LED is increased gradually, and the set value is fixed when the output of
AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR exceeds the specified value. At this time, if the output of
AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR does not reach the specified value even though the light
quantity is increased to the upper limit, the controller judges the sensor as dirty. Also, the controller judges
the sensor as faulty in the event of extremely high output.
2 Light quantity adjustment
At the execution of ADC, the light quantity adjustment is made immediately before the patches for toner
density control are generated.
The light is emitted from the LED with current setting of light quantity to check if the output value of the
AUTOMATIC DENSITY CONTROL SENSOR is within the specified range. If the output value is low,
the light quantity is increased by the specified amount at the next ADC, or if high, the light quantity is
reduced at the next ADC.
At this time, if the output value is less than the first lower limit, the controller judges the sensor as dirty
and outputs the warning. Further, if less than the second lower limit, the controller judges the sensor as
faulty and stops the printing.
10-43
10.5 Control
10.5.4 Color Registration Control
The printer uses a tandem system where the drums and developers are arranged respectively for each of yellow, magenta,
cyan, and black colors. Since the images are formed on the drum of each color to be overlayed one another, a color shift
may occur. The color registration control calculates how much the registration is shifted, and adjusts the ROS write
timing.
The lateral registration control adjusts all of four colors in lateral directions.
The color registration control is made from a change in inside temperature and the print count at the execution of the
process control.
The control is outlined below:
1 With no toner on the Belt, the output value of ADC Sensor is measured to determine the threshold value.
2 The patches for color registration control are generated on the Belt. These patches are composed of 10mm
lines of K, C, K, M, K, and Y in this order.
3 The density of patches generated by the ADC Sensor is read.
4 The shift correction amount is calculated from the threshold value determined in 1) and the patch density
measured in 3).
5 The ROS write timing is changed according to the shift correction amount.
10-44
10.5 Control
10.5.5 Fuser Control
10.5.5.1 Fuser temperature control

As for the fuser temperature control, the target temperature is set, then the Heat Roll surface temperature is controlled so
that it can meet the target value by turning on/off the Heater Lamp.
Temperature of individual area of the Heat Roll is detected by the Fuser Non-Contact Sensor (NCS) in the middle of the
Heat Roll and the Temp Sensor at the edge of it. When the temperature detected is higher than the target value, the Heater
Lamp will be turned OFF. When the temperature is below the target value, the Heater Lamp will be turned ON.
The target temperature setting varies depending on the time of Warm-up, Printing, or Process Control. The target
temperature varies according to such environmental factors as the interior temperature detected by the Sensor Hum
Temp.
10.5.5.2 Cooling down

As the printing continues, the temperature distribution in the Heat Roll becomes uneven both in the paper feed and non-
paper feed areas. Cooling Down suspends paper feeling for a certain period of time so that the Heat Roll temperature
distribution can be uniform.
When the temperature of the Heat Roll edge is high, cooling down is performed to lower the temperature to the target
value.
10.5.5.3 Sensor Warm-up

The Fuser NCS (Non Contact Sensor) at the center of the Heat Roll will be lose its accuracy of detecting temperature
when the temperature of the Sensor itself is below -5°C. Therefore, the Sensor will be warmed up when the temperature
is below -5°C. This action is called Sensor Warm-up.
10-45
10.6 Drive Transmission Route

10.6.1 DRIVE ASSY MAIN
Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN is transmitted through the route below.
[ Name of moving parts ]
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
GEAR T4 GEAR P2
GEAR DRV GEAR P3
[ BELT ] GEAR P4
GEAR P5
TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ASSY PH
REGI CLUTCH
SOLENOID ASSY FEED GEAR ASSY FEED [ ROLL ASSY REGI ]
[ FEED ROLLER ] GEAR REGI RUBBER
GEAR REGI METAL
[ ROLL REGI METAL ]

CHUTE ASSY FDR REGI
GEAR PHD 1
GEAR PHD 2 GEAR PHD 2
[ DRUM (K) ] [ DRUM (C) ] [ DRUM (M) ] [ DRUM (Y) ]
HSG ASSY XERO (K) HSG ASSY XERO (C) HSG ASSY XERO (M) HSG ASSY XERO (Y)
PHD ASSY
Wsb10029FA
10-46
[ PAPER FEED DRIVE ] [ Name of moving parts ]

: Indicates the engagement of gears.
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
DRIVE ASSY PH
GEAR P2
GEAR REGI RUBBER

GEAR REGI METAL
[ ROLL ASSY REGI ]

GEAR P4
GEAR P3
GEAR P5 REGI CLUTCH [ ROLL REGI METAL ]
FRONT
[ FEED ROLLER ]
SOLENOID ASSY FEED

GEAR ASSY FEED
Wsb10051FA
10-47
[ DRUM and BELT DRIVE ] [ Name of moving parts ]

PHD ASSY
[ DRUM (K) ]
[ DRUM (C) ]
GEAR PHD 2
GEAR PHD 1
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
[ BELT ]
[ DRUM (M) ]
GEAR PHD 2
[ DRUM (Y) ]
GEAR DRV
FRONT
GEAR T4 Wsb10052FA
10-48
10.6.2 DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB DRIVE
Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY MAIN and DRIVE ASSY SUB are transmitted through the route below.
[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ]

DRIVE ASSY SUB
SUB MOTOR DRIVE ASSY MAIN
GEAR D1 GEAR P2
GEAR DK GEAR D1 GEAR P3
GEAR D5 GEAR D2 GEAR P4
GEAR P4-2
GEAR MAG (K) GEAR D3 IN COLOR MODE

GEAR C SWITCHING SOLENOID
CAM C
[ MAGNET ROLL (K) ]
HSG ASSY DEVE (K) GEAR D3 OUT FLANGE D3
PHD ASSY DRIVE ASSY PH
Wsb10031FA
10-49
[ BLACK and WHITE MODE ] [ Name of moving parts ]

GEAR D5
DRIVE ASSY SUB
GEAR DK
GEAR D1
[ MAGNET ROLL (K) ]
GEAR MAG (K)
SUB MOTOR
GEAR D1
GEAR D2
DRIVE ASSY PH
FRONT FLANGE D3 CAM C
GEAR D4
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
GEAR D3 OUT GEAR D2

GEAR D3 IN
FLANGE D3
CAM C
GEAR P2
DRIVE ASSY PH
GEAR P3
GEAR P4 COLOR MODE

SWITCHING SOLENOID
GEAR P4-2 GEAR C
Wsb10053FA
10-50
[ DEVELOPMENT and EXCESS TONER COLLECTING ]

DRIVE ASSY MAIN DRIVE ASSY SUB
GEAR PHD 1
GEAR PHD 2 GEAR MAG (Y, M, C, K)
[ DRUM ] [ MAGNET ROLL ]
GEAR MAG IDLR

GEAR AUGER CLNG
GEAR IDLER AUGER SIDE GEAR IDLER PADDLE
GEAR AUGER SIDE GEAR PADDLE
[ AUGER ] [ AUGER CLNG SIDE ] [ PADDLE DEVE ] GEAR AUGER
[ AUGER FRONT ]
GEAR AUGER
[ AUGER REAR ]
HSG ASSY XERO (Y, M, C, K) HSG ASSY DEVE (Y, M, C, K)
PHD ASSY
Wsb10037FA
10-51
[ EXCESS TONER COLLECTING DRIVE ] [ Name of moving parts ]

[ AUGER CLNG SIDE ]

HSG ASSY XERO
[ AUGER ] GEAR AUGER SIDE
GEAR AUGER CLNG
GEAR IDLER AUGER SIDE
[ DRUM ]
GEAR PHD 2
GEAR PHD 1
DRIVE ASSY MAIN
FRONT
PHD ASSY
GEAR PHD 2
Wsb10054FA
10-52
[ DEVELOPMENT DRIVE ] [ Name of moving parts ]

[ PADDLE DEVE ]
[ AUGER FRONT ]
[ AUGER REAR ]
GEAR IDLER PADDLE
GEAR PADDLE
HSG ASSY DEVE
[ MAGNET ROLL ]
GEAR AUGER GEAR MAG IDLR

GEAR MAG
GEAR AUGER
FRONT
PHD ASSY
DRIVE ASSY SUB Wsb10055FA
10-53
10.6.3 TONER DISPENSER (Y, M, C, K)
Rotation power of the TONER DISPENSER drives the agitator and the auger in the TONER CARTRIDGE.
[TONER CARTRIDGE]
[ TONER DISPENSER ]
DISPENSE MOTOR (K) DISPENSE MOTOR (C) DISPENSE MOTOR (M) DISPENSE MOTOR (Y)
GEAR IDLER (K) GEAR IDLER (C) GEAR IDLER (M) GEAR IDLER (Y)
GEAR IDLER AUG (K) GEAR IDLER AUG (C) GEAR IDLER AUG (M) GEAR IDLER AUG (Y)
GEAR AUGER (K) GEAR AUGER (C) GEAR AUGER (M) GEAR AUGER (Y)
[ AUGER (K) ] [ AUGER (C) ] [ AUGER (M) ] [ AUGER (Y) ]
GEAR IDLER AGI (K) GEAR IDLER AGI (C) GEAR IDLER AGI (M) GEAR IDLER AGI (Y)
DISPENSER ASSY
GEAR AGITATOR (K) GEAR AGITATOR (C) GEAR AGITATOR (M) GEAR AGITATOR (Y)
[ AGITATOR (K) ] [ AGITATOR (C) ] [ AGITATOR (M) ] [ AGITATOR (Y) ]
TONER CARTRIDGE (K) TONER CARTRIDGE (C) TONER CARTRIDGE (M) TONER CARTRIDGE (Y)
Wsb06039KA
10-54
[TONER CARTRIDGE]
[ TONER DISPENSER ] [ Name of moving parts ]

TONER CARTRIDGE
[ AUGER ]
[ AGITATOR ]
GEAR IDLER AGI

GEAR IDLER
FRONT
GEAR AGITATOR
GEAR AUGER
DISPENSE MOTOR
GEAR IDLER AUG

Wsb10056FA
10-55
10.6.4 DRIVE ASSY SUB
Rotation power of the DRIVE ASSY SUB is transmitted through the route below.
[PAPER HANDLING]
[ FULL COLOR MODE ]

DRIVE ASSY SUB DRIVE ASSY PH
SUB MOTOR
GEAR D1 GEAR D1
GEAR DK GEAR D2 GEAR D3 IN
GEAR D3 OUT
GEAR D4 GEAR D4
GEAR D5 GEAR D5 GEAR D5 GEAR D5
GEAR MAG (K) GEAR MAG (C) GEAR MAG (M) GEAR MAG (Y)
[ MAGNET ROLL (K) ] [ MAGNET ROLL (C) ] [ MAGNET ROLL (M) ] [ MAGNET ROLL (Y) ]
HSG ASSY DEVE (K) HSG ASSY DEVE (C) HSG ASSY DEVE (M) HSG ASSY DEVE (Y)
PHD ASSY
Wsb10033FA
10-56
[PAPER HANDLING]
[ FULL COLOR MODE ] [ Name of moving parts ]

DRIVE ASSY SUB

GEAR DK
GEAR D1
GEAR MAG (K)

[ MAGNET ROLL (K) ] GEAR D5
SUB MOTOR
GEAR MAG (C)

[ MAGNET ROLL (C) ] GEAR D5 GEAR D1
GEAR D4
GEAR MAG (M)

GEAR D2
[ MAGNET ROLL (M) ] GEAR D5
GEAR D4 DRIVE ASSY PH
GEAR MAG (Y)

[ MAGNET ROLL (Y) ] GEAR D5
FRONT GEAR D3 OUT
GEAR D4
GEAR D2
GEAR D3 IN
Wsb10057FA
10-57
[ FUSER DRIVE ]
DRIVE ASSY SUB
GEAR IDLER HR
GEAR HR GEAR IDLER EXIT
[ HEAT ROLL ] GEAR EXIT
[ ROLL ASSY EXIT ]

FUSER
Wsb06035KA
10-58
[ FUSER DRIVE ] [ Name of moving parts ]

[ ROLL ASSY EXIT ]
FUSER
GEAR EXIT
GEAR IDLER EXIT
[ HEAT ROLL ]
GEAR HR
GEAR IDLER HR
DRIVE ASSY SUB
FRONT
Wsb10058FA
10-59
10-60
PUBLICATION COMMENT SHEET
Use this feedback sheet to make us aware of the strengths and weaknesses of the material you
have received. Please comment on adequacy, quality, usability, format, parts of manual not
used, etc. Specific errors or deficiencies should be referenced by page and/or page number.
Mail to your Technical Support Department and they will pass to us.
(Customer Engineer→OpCo Technical Support Department→FX/CSS/IBS)
Use black pencil or ink:
Name : Date : Publication No. :
Job Title : Employee No. : Title of Publication :
OpCo (Country) : Mailing Address :

Date and Revision of Publication :
Page No. - Figure No. Description of Error or Deficiency (please be specific).
Please check if answer is requested. No Yes
If yes, be sure to fill in Name, Job Title, Employee No., OpCo name and Mailing Address
FIRST FOLD
Place
Postage
Stamp
Here
FUJI XEROX Co., Ltd.

Attn: CSS/IBS
KSP/R&D Business Park Bldg.6A7
3-2-1,Sakado Takatsu-ku,Kanagawa-ken
213-8508 Japan
SECOND FOLD
CLEAR TAPE Before sealing, please be sure that all information is completed on reverse side. CLEAR TAPE

FujiXerox C1110 Service Manual PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

FujiXerox C1110 Service Manual PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B

Service Manual 1st Edition

Edited by: Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. CS&S TSC SDEG

[XEROX] [The Document Company] are registered trademarks.

Full Name Employee No.

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments

Chapter 5 Parts List

Chapter 7 Wiring Data

Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) Not yet

Chapter 10 Machine Overview

1. Getting to know the Service Manual

• Publication Comment Sheet

2. How to use the Service Manual

2.1 Contents of Manual

Chapter 1 Service Call Procedure

Chapter 3 Image Quality Troubleshooting

Chapter 4 Repairs and Adjustments

Chapter 5 Parts List

6.15 Control Panel Menu Tree

Chapter 7 Wiring Data

Chapter 9 BSD (Block Schematic Diagram) (Not yet issued)

Chapter 10 Machine Overview

2.2 Information on Updating

3. Terms and Symbols

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as death or serious

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, such as injury or property

NOTE Used to emphasize the procedure, servicing, and regulation.

REFERENCE Used to describe the technical terminology and supplementary explanations.

OBJECTIVE Used to explain purpose of adjustment.

Safety Critical Components (SCC)

Important Information Stored Component (ISC)

1.1 Before Starting the Servicing

5. Installing and removing the parts

8. Cleaning the Toner and Developer

10.Other Safety Precautions

1.1.2 Notes on the Handling of Customer Information

2. Handling PWB and HDD storing customer information

3. Rewritten-in-maintenance NVMs involving security concerns

5. Other notes on the handling of customer information

1.1.3 Other Things to Note

4. Handling of parts/consumables replaced

DocuPrint C1110/C1110B weighs 18kg.

1.2 Servicing Call Procedure

1. Ask the operator(s) about the machine condition.

1.3 TRIM Servicing

1.3.1 TRIM Servicing Procedure

* Refer to Chapter 2 Troubleshooting 2.6.7.8 Test Print on executing test print.

2. Clean the interior of the machine

5. Check the overall operation after servicing as follows:

1.3.2 Machine Consumables and Periodic Replacement Parts

Product Name Country Product Code Expected yield

Print Cartridge 2K (Black) *1 AP/Korea/Taiwan CT201114 2kPV

Periodic Replacement Parts

Product Name Product Code Note

1.3.3 TRIM Check List

CAUTION Do not touch the Drum/Toner Cartridges with hand.

2.1 Progressing with the Troubleshooting

2.1.1 Flow of Troubleshooting

Flow of the troubleshooting is as follows:

Installation status check

How to use Diag. CE Mode